VOLUME 2 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS BID NO. 2017-064 ...access.tarrantcounty.com/content/dam/main... · HVAC REPLACEMENT 3829 ALTA MESA BOULEVARD FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76133 BIDS DUE

Vendor Name: _____________________

TARRANT COUNTY PURCHASING DEPARTMENT JACK BEACHAM, C.P.M., A.P.P. ROB COX, C.P.M., A.P.P. PURCHASING AGENT ASSISTANT PURCHASING AGENT

VOLUME 2 – TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

BID NO. 2017-064

PROJECT MANUAL FOR

TARRANT COUNTY DICK ANDERSEN BUILDING HVAC REPLACEMENT

3829 ALTA MESA BOULEVARD FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76133

BIDS DUE JANUARY 30, 2017

2:00 P.M.

Technical Specifications Prepared by BAIRD, HAMPTON & BROWN ENGINEERING & SURVEYING

6300 RIDGLEA PLACE, SUITE 700 FORT WORTH, TEXAS 76116

RFB NO. 2017-064

NO. DESCRIPTION DATE

DATE:

SHEET

STATUS:PROJECT NUMBER:

DRAWN BY:CHECKED BY:

DESIGN BY:SCALE:

Tarr

ant C

ount

y

Dic

k A

nder

sen

Bui

ldin

g H

VA

C R

enov

atio

n

3829

ALT

A M

ES

A B

LVD

, FO

RT

WO

RTH

, TX

761

33

NOVEMBER 18, 2016CONSTRUCTION DOCUMENTS

2016.013.068

6300

Rid

glea

Pla

ce, S

uite

700

Fort

Wor

th, T

X 7

6116

mai

l@bh

binc

.com

8

17.3

38.1

277

b

hbin

c.co

mTB

PE

Firm

#44

TB

PLS

FIR

M #

1001

1300

Engi

neer

ing

& S

urve

ying

Bai

rd,

Ham

pton

& B

rown

COVERSHEET

CSNONE

CWPCADCWP of 1 CS

N

TARRANT COUNTY DICK ANDERSEN BUILDING

LOCATION MAPN.T.S.

HVAC REPLACEMENT

BUILDING PLANN.T.S.

MECHANICAL ROOM

EXISTING CONDENSING UNIT

FORT WORTH, TEXAS

SHEET LISTM1.1 LEVEL 1 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION PLANM2.1 LEVEL 1 MECHANICAL PLANM3.1 MECHANICAL DETAILS AND SCHEDULESM3.2 MECHANICAL DETAILSM3.3 MECHANICAL DETAILSE2.1 LEVEL 1 POWER PLAN

N

N

11/18/16

http://www.ketiv.com






BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

01 02 70 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT01 03 50 MODIFICATION PROCEDURES01 04 00 PROJECT COORDINATION01 04 50 CUTTING AND PATCHING01 20 50 PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS01 50 50 TEMPORARY FACILITIES01 60 50 PRODUCTS, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SUBMITTALS01 70 00 PROJECT CLOSEOUT

DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING

22 00 10 BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS22 05 06 PLUMBING DEMOLITION22 05 12 PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION22 05 19 PLUMBING METERS AND GAUGES22 05 29 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS22 05 53 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION22 07 16 PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION22 10 00 PLUMBING PIPING22 10 01 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES22 11 19 PIPING SPECIALTIES22 30 00 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, ANDAIR-CONDITIONING (HVAC)

23 00 10 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS23 05 06 MECHANICAL DEMOLITION23 05 12 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION23 05 19 MECHANICAL METERS AND GAUGES23 05 29 MECHANICAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS23 05 48 MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL23 05 53 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION23 05 93 MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING23 07 13 HVAC DUCT INSULATION23 07 16 HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION23 07 19 HVAC PIPING INSULATION23 09 23 BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM (BCS)23 09 93 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION23 21 13.23 HYDRONIC PIPING23 21 13.24 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES23 23 00 REFRIGERANT PIPING23 31 13 METAL DUCTWORK23 31 13.19 DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES23 34 00 FANS23 52 00 BOILERS23 52 16 CONDENSING BOILERS23 73 13 AIR HANDLING UNITS23 81 26 SPLIT DX CONDENSING UNITS

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2

DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL

26 05 10 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK26 05 11 WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING26 05 12 MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION26 05 19 WIRES AND CABLES26 05 20 WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES26 05 26 GROUNDING26 05 27 SEALING OF PENETRATIONS26 05 29 SUPPORTING DEVICES26 05 32 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES26 05 33 CONDUITS26 05 34 OUTLET BOXES26 27 26 WIRING DEVICES26 28 17 DISCONNECT SWITCHES26 29 13 MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01 02 70

SECTION 01 02 70

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements governing theContractor’s Applications for Payment.

B. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule and Submittal Schedule are included in section“Submittals.”

1.3 APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT:

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and paymentsas certified by the Engineer and paid for by the Owner.

1. The initial Application for Payment, the application for payment at the time ofsubstantial Completion, and the final Application for payment involve additionalrequirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Each progress payment date is as indicated in the agreement. The period of construction work covered by each Application or payment is the periodindicated in the agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Use AIA Document G702 and Continuation Sheets G703 asthe form for application for payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on the form, including notarization andexecution by person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of the Owner. Incomplete applications will be returned without action.

E. Transmittal: Submit three (3) executed copies of each Application for Payment.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments, and recordingappropriate information related to the application.

F. Waivers of Mechanics Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers ofmechanics lien from every entity who may lawfully be entitled to file a mechanics lienarising out of the Contract, and related to the work covered by the payment. Owner willprovide partial waiver and final waiver lien forms to be attached to each application, forpayment.

G. Initial application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede orcoincide with submittal of the first Application for payment include the following:


1. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies must be submitted and approvedbefore any on-site work begins

2. Performance and payment bonds (if required).

3. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance.

4. Initial settlement survey and damage report, if required.

H. Application for payment at Substantial Completion: following issuance of the Certification ofSubstantial Completion, submit an application for payment; this application shall reflect anycertificates of partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy ofdesignated portions of the work, if any.

I. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with Application forPayment at Substantial Completion included:

1. Occupancy permits and similar approvals.

2. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements.

3. Test/adjust/balance records.

4. Maintenance instructions.

5. Change-over information related to Owners occupancy use, operation andmaintenance.

6. Final cleaning.

7. Application for reduction of retainage and consent of surety.

8. Advice on shifting insurance coverage.

9. List of incomplete work, recognized as exceptions to Engineer’s Certificate ofSubstantial Completion.

J. Final Payment Application: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede orcoincide with submittal of the final payment Application for Payment include the following:

1. Completion of project close out requirements.

2. Completion of items specified for completion after substantial completion.

3. Assurance that unsettled claims will be settled.

4. Assurances that work not complete and accepted will be completed without unduedelay.

5. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid.

6. Removal of temporary facilities and services.

7. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS – NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED

END OF SECTION 01 02 70


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 03 50

SECTION 01 03 50

MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including supplementary conditions and otherdivision 1 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. This section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling andprocessing contract modifications.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section.

1. Division 1 Section 01 02 70, “Applications for Payment” for administrative proceduresgoverning applications for payment.

2. Division 1 Section 01 60 50, “Products, Substitutions, and Submittals”, foradministrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after award ofthe contract.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK:

A. Supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the work, not involving anadjustment to the contract sum or contract time, will be issued by the Engineer on AIA form,G710, Engineers Supplemental Instructions.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Proposed changes in the work that will requireadjustment to the contract sum or contract time will be issued by the Engineer, with adetailed description of the proposed change and supplemental or revised drawings andspecifications, if necessary.

1. Proposal requests issued by the Engineer are for information only. Do not considerthem instruction either to stop work in progress, or to execute the proposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the proposal request, within 10 days of receipt of theproposal request, submit to the Engineer for the Owner’s review an estimate of costnecessary to execute the proposed change.a. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs, along with

the total amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey datato substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts oftrade discounts.

c. Include a statement indicating the effect the proposed change in the work willhave on the contract time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Change Order Proposal Requests: When latent or other unforeseenconditions require modifications to the contract, the Contractor may propose changes by

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 03 50

submitting a request for a change to the Engineer, with a copy to the Owner’sRepresentative.

1. Include a statement outlining the reasons for the change and the effect of the changeon the work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate theeffect of the proposed change on the contract sum and contract time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products to be purchased and unit costs along with thetotal amount of purchases to be made. Where requested, furnish survey data tosubstantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of tradediscounts.

4. Comply with requirements in section “Product Substitutions” if the proposed change inthe work requires the substitution of one product or system for a product or systemspecified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Doc. G709 for Change Order Proposal Requests.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: When the Owner and Contractor are not in total agreementon the terms of a Change Order Proposal Request, the Engineer may issue a ConstructionChange Directive on AIA Form G714, instructing the Contractor to proceed with a change inthe Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the changein the Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in thecontract sum or contract time.


PART 3 - EXECUTION – NOT USED


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PROJECT COORDINATION 01 04 00

SECTION 01 04 00

PROJECT COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and supervisory requirements necessary for Projectcoordination including, but not necessarily limited to:

1. Coordination.

2. General installation provisions.

3. Cleaning and protection.

1.3 PROJECT SCHEDULE

A. Prior to the start of any work on the project, the Contractor shall develop an overall projectschedule for completion of all elements of the work. The project schedule shall bereviewed and approved by the Engineer and Owner prior to the start of any work. TheEngineer and the Owner will be kept informed as to any proposed revisions to the projectschedule.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction activities included under various Sections of theseSpecifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections of the Specificationsthat are dependent upon each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on installation of othercomponents, either before or after its own installation, schedule construction activitiesin the sequence required to obtain the best results.

2. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components toassure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

B. Where necessary prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved outliningspecial procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,reports, and attendance at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for the Owner and separate Contractors wherecoordination of their work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrativeprocedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progressof the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:


1. Installation and removal of temporary facilities.

2. Delivery and processing of submittals.

3. Progress meetings. Coordinate meeting schedule with the Engineer.

4. Project Close-Out Activities.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried outwith consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both thesubstrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions andrecommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are moreexplicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents.

C. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement.

E. Visual Effects: Provide uniform joint widths in exposed Work. Arrange joints in exposedWork to obtain the best visual effect. Refer questionable choices to the Engineer for finaldecision.

F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.

G. Install each component during weather conditions and Project status that will ensure thebest possible results. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatiblematerial as necessary to prevent deterioration.

H. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, to minimize thenecessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

I. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, install individual componentsat standard mounting heights indicated. Refer questionable mounting height decisions tothe Engineer for final decision.

3.2 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoiningmaterials in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection fromdamage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.


B. Clean and maintain completed construction as frequently as necessary through theremainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensureoperability without damaging effects.

C. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of theconstruction, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, orotherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Where applicable, suchexposures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Excessive static or dynamic loading.

2. Excessive internal or external pressures.

3. Excessively high or low temperatures.

4. Thermal shock.

5. Excessively high or low humidity.

6. Air contamination or pollution.

7. Water or ice.

8. Solvents.

9. Chemicals.

10. Bacteria.

11. Rodent and insect infestation.

12. Combustion.

13. Electrical current.

14. High speed operation.

15. Improper lubrication.

16. Unusual wear or other misuse.

17. Contact between incompatible materials.

18. Misalignment.

19. Excessive weathering.

20. Unprotected storage.

21. Improper shipping or handling.

22. Theft.

23. Vandalism.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 04 50

SECTION 01 04 50

CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for cutting and patching.

B. Refer to other Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting andpatching individual parts of the Work.

1. Requirements of this Section apply to mechanical and electrical installations. Refer toDivision-23 and Division-26 Sections for other requirements and limitations applicableto cutting and patching mechanical and electrical installations.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and patching Proposal: Where approval of procedures for cutting and patching isrequired before proceeding, submit a proposal describing procedures well in advance of thetime cutting and patching will be performed and request approval to proceed. Include thefollowing information, as applicable, in the proposal:

1. Describe the extent of cutting and patching required and how it is to be performed;indicate why it cannot be avoided.

2. Describe anticipated results in terms of changes to existing construction; includechanges to structural elements and appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform Work.

4. Indicate dates when cutting and patching is to be performed.

5. List utilities that will be distributed or affected, including those that will be relocated andthose that will be temporarily out-of-service. Indicate how long service will bedisrupted.

6. Where cutting and patching involves addition of reinforcement to structural elements,submit details and engineering calculations to show how reinforcement is integratedwith the original structure.

7. Approval by the Engineer to proceed with cutting and patching does not waive theEngineer’s right to later require complete removal and replacement of a part of thework found to be unsatisfactory.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Requirements for Structural Work: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a mannerthat would reduce their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.


1. Obtain approval of the cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching thefollowing structural elements:a. Foundation construction.b. Bearing and retaining walls.c. Structural concrete.d. Structural steel.e. Lintels.f. Timber and primary wood framing.g. Structural decking.h. Miscellaneous structural metals.i. Equipment supports.j. Piping, ductwork, vessels and equipment.k. Structural systems of special construction in Division-13.

B. Operational and Safety Limitations: Do not cut and patch operating elements or safetyrelated components in a manner that would result in reducing their capacity to perform asintended, or result in increased maintenance, or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or inoccupied spaces, in a manner that would, in the Engineer’s opinion, reduce the building’saesthetic qualities, or result in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Remove andreplace all work cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1. If possible retain the original installer or fabricator to cut and patch the followingcategories of exposed Work, or if it is not possible to engage the original installer orfabricator, engage another recognized experienced and specialized firm:a. Processed concrete finishes.b. Matched-veneer woodwork.c. Pre-formed metal panels.d. Window wall system.e. Stucco and ornamental plaster.f. Acoustical ceilings.g. HVAC enclosures, cabinets or covers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials that are identical to existing materials. If identical materials are not availableor cannot be used where exposed surfaces are involved, use materials that match existingadjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible with regard to visual effect. Use materialswhose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Before cutting existing surfaces, examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditionsunder which cutting and patching is to be performed. Take corrective action beforeproceeding, if unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions are encountered.

1. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching,including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference andconflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.


3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect existing construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of the project that might beexposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoiningareas.

D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork servingthe building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made tobypass them.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workmen to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cuttingand parching at the earliest feasible time and complete without delay.

B. Cutting: Cut existing construction using methods least likely to damage elements to beretained or adjoining construction. Where possible review proposed procedures with theoriginal installer; comply with original installer’s recommendations.

1. In general, where cutting is required, use hand or small power tools designed forsawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to sizerequired with minimum disturbance of adjacent structures. Temporarily coveropenings when not in use.

2. To avoid marring existing finished surfaces, cut or drill from the exposed or finishedside into concealed surfaces.

3. Cut through concrete and masonry using a cutting machine such as a Carborundumsaw or diamond core drill.

4. Comply with requirements of applicable Sections of Division-2 where cutting andpatching requires excavating and backfilling.

C. Patching: Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with specifiedtolerances.

1. Where feasible, inspect and test patched areas to demonstrate integrity of theinstallation.

2. Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retainedadjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching andrefinishing.

3. Where removal of walls or partitions extends one finished area into another, patch andrepair floor and wall surfaces in the new space to provide an even surface of uniformcolor and appearance. Remove existing floor and wall coverings and replace with newmaterials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.a. Where patching occurs in a smooth painted surface, extend final paint coat over

entire unbroken containing the patch, after the patched area has received primerand second coat.


4. Patch, repair or rehang ceilings as necessary to provide an even plane surface ofuniform appearance.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used asaccess. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing isapplied. Restore damaged pipe coverings to their original condition.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS 01 20 50

SECTION 01 20 50

PROCEDURES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. Definitions: Specific quality control requirements for the work are indicated throughout thecontract documents. In particular, quality control provisions for manufactured products arespecified in individual work sections and are not repeated herein. The requirements of thissection are primarily related to performance of the work beyond furnishing of manufacturedproducts. The term “Quality Control” includes, but is not necessarily limited to, inspectionand testing and associated requirements.

1.2 SURVEYS AND RECORDS / REPORTS:

A. General: Working from lines and levels established by property survey, and as required inrelation to the work, establish and maintain benchmarks and other dependable markers toset lines and levels for the work and elsewhere on site as needed to properly locate eachelement of entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions (within recognizedtolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale drawings to determine dimensions. Advise tradesmen performing work of marked lines and levels provided for their use inlayout of work.

1.3 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF SITE:

A. Closely coordinate all site space requirements with the Owner.

B. General: In addition to site utilization limitations and requirements by contract documents,administer allocation of available space equitably among entities needing access andspace, so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materialsand equipment on site.

C. Waste Materials: Dispose of organic and hazardous materials off the site.

1.4 TRADESPERSONS AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS:

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that persons performing work at siteare skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship needed to produce requiredquality-levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work that does notcomply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the constructionindustry for applications required. Remove and replace other work damaged ordeteriorated by faulty workmanship or by its replacement.

1.5 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS:

A. All testing required during the course of construction shall be performed by an independenttesting laboratory employed and paid for by the Contractor. The cost of all testing shall beincluded as a part of the Contract Amount.


B. The Owner may perform his own independent testing or may observe the Contractor’stesting, at his option.

C. Failure of test agencies to perform satisfactorily shall not relieve contractor of responsibilityfor fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Required inspection and testingservices are intended to assist in determination of probably compliances of work withrequirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or forgeneral fulfillment of requirements of contract documents. Specified inspections and testsare not intended to limit Contractor’s quality control program. Afford reasonable access toagencies performing tests and inspections.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF TEST AGENCY WORK – NOT USED

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS:

A. Installer’s Inspection of Conditions: Require Installer of each major unit of work to inspectsubstrate to receive work, and conditions under which work will be performed, and to reportin writing to Contractor unsatisfactory conditions. Do not proceed with the work untilunsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Where installations include manufactured products, withmanufacturer’s applicable instructions and recommendations for installation, to the extentthese are more explicit or more stringent than requirements in contract documents.

C. Inspect each item of materials or equipment immediately prior to installation, and rejectdamaged and defective items.

D. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods for securing work properly as it isinstalled, true to line and level, and within recognized industry tolerances if not otherwiserequired. Allow for expansions and building movements. Provide uniform joint widths inexposed work, organized for best possible visual effect. Refer questionable visual-effectchoices to the Engineer for final decision.

E. Recheck measurements and dimensions of the work, as an integral step of starting eachinstallation.

F. Install work during conditions of temperature, humidity, exposure, forecast weather, andstatus of project completion that will ensure best possible results for each unit of work, incoordination with entire work. Isolate each unit of work from non-compatible work, asrequired to prevent deterioration.

G. Coordinate enclosure (closing-in) of work with required inspections and tests, so as tominimize necessity of uncovering work for that purpose.

H. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount individual units ofwork at industry-recognized standard mounting heights for applications required. Facilitiesintended for use by the physically handicapped shall be mounted as required by current


rules relating to the elimination of architectural barriers. Refer questionable mountingheight choices to the Engineer for final decision.

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. General: During handling and installation of work at project site, clean and protect work inprogress and adjoining work on a basis of continuous maintenance. Apply suitableprotective covering on newly installed work where reasonable required to ensure freedomfrom damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion; otherwise, clean andperform maintenance on newly installed work as frequently as necessary throughremainder of construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensureoperability without damaging effects.

B. Limiting Exposures of Work: To the extent possible through reasonable control andprotection methods, supervise performance of work in a manner and by means which willensure that none of the work, whether completed or in progress, will be subjected toharmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposures during constructionperiod. Such exposures include, but are not necessarily limited to, static loading, dynamicloading, internal pressures, high or low temperatures, thermal shock, high or low humidity,air contamination or pollution, water, ice, solvents, chemicals, light, radiation, puncture,abrasion, heavy traffic, soiling bacteria, insect infestation, combustion, electrical current,high speed operation, improper lubrication, unusual wear, misuse, incompatible interface,destructive testing, misalignment, excessive weathering, unprotected storage, impropershipping/handling, theft and vandalism.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01 50 50

SECTION 01 50 50

TEMPORARY FACILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF REQUIREMENTS:

A. Definitions: Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in thissection, as extensions of provisions in general Conditions and other contract documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in thissection is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omissionfrom this section will be recognized as an indication by the Engineer that such temporaryactivity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance withrequirements of contract documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but arenot necessarily limited to, utility services, construction facilities, security/protectionprovisions, and support facilities.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules andrecommendations of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirementsindicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction work (publishedrecommendations by local consensus “building councils.”)

B. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10 Series standards onconstruction safety, including A10.3, A10.4, A10.5, A10.6, A10.7, A10.8, A10.9, A10.10,A10.11, A10.12, A10.13, A10.14, A10.15, A10.17, A10.18, A10.20, and A10.22.

C. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241, “Building and Demolition Operations.”

D. Conservation: Install and operate temporary facilities and perform construction activities ina manner that reasonably will be conservative and avoid waste of energy and materialsincluding water.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonablyrequired for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities atearliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, withauthorized use, replaced the need.

B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a mannerand at locations that will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons andproperty, and free of deleterious effects.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES:

A. The types of services required include, but are not necessarily limited to, water, sewage,surface drainage, electrical power and telephones. Locate and relocate services (asnecessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.

B. The Contractor shall make all arrangements with the Owner for temporary electricalservice; provide all equipment necessary for temporary power and lighting; pay all chargesfor the equipment and the installation of it. The Owner will pay for all current consumedduring construction operations.

C. Temporary Water: The Contractor shall provide all water necessary for constructionpurposes. The Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements with the Owner andincur all expenses for support system. The Owner will pay for all water consumed duringthe construction process.

D. Temporary Power: Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter features, activatedfrom each circuit of 20-amp or less rating.

E. Temporary Telephone Services: The Owner will not provide a temporary telephone serviceat the project site for the use of the Contractor and the Engineer’s representative. TheContractor shall pay for all Long Distance Calls.

2.2 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES:

A. The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but are not necessarilylimited to, water distribution, lighting, and hoisting facilities. Provide facilities reasonablyrequired to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

B. Enclosure: Provide temporary enclosure where indicated or where required to provideseparation of any adjacent occupied area or where reasonably required to ensure adequateworkmanship and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for thework, including enclosure where temporary heat is used.

C. Heating: Use gas from piped distribution system where available. Where piped gas is notavailable, heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or otherapproval labels appropriate for application. Vent fuel-burning heaters, and equip units withindividual-space thermostatic controls. Use electric-resistance space heaters only whereno other, more energy-efficient type of heater is available and allowable.

D. Electrical Power: Provide weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient toaccommodate construction operations requiring power, use of power tools, electricalheating, lighting, and start-up testing of permanent electric powered equipment prior to itspermanent connection to electrical system. Provide overload protection. Locate multipleoutlets (not less than 4-gang) at construction, spaced so that power tools on a singleextension cord of 100’ maximum length can reach entire area of construction.

1. Supply power for electric welding, if any, from either temporary power distributionsystem or by engine-driven power-generator sets, at Contractor’s option.


E. Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workmanship everywhere,by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Providegeneral lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods ofvarying activity (work in progress, traffic only, security check, lock-up, etc.).

1. Provide uniformly spaced general lighting equivalent to not less than one 200-wattincandescent lamp per 1000 square foot of floor area, and on 100-watt lamp per 50' ofcorridor.

2.3 SECURITY/ PROTECTION PROVISIONS:

A. The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but are notnecessarily limited to, barricades, warning signs or lights, site enclosure fence, buildingenclosure/lock, environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimizeproperty losses, personal injuries and claims for damages at project site. Such temporaryFort Worth, Texas.

B. Building Enclosure and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building againstunauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporaryenclosures at locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

2.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES:

A. The types of temporary support facilities required include, but are not necessarily limited tofield offices, storage sheds, fabrication sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aidfacilities, bulletin board, private and public telephones, clocks, clean-up facilities, wastedisposal service, rodent/pest control, and similar miscellaneous general services, all asmay be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation ofpersonnel at the site including Owner’s and Engineer’s personnel. Discontinue and removetemporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of theproject, only when and in manner authorized by the Engineer; and, if not otherwiseindicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary supportfacilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.

B. Sanitary Facilities: The Owner will make available to the Contractor designated portableself-contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at allstages of construction) for use of personnel at project site. The Contractor will not bepermitted to use toilet facilities in the building.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PRODUCTS, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SUBMITTALS 01 60 50

SECTION 01 60 50

PRODUCTS, SUBSTITUTIONS, AND SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. “Products” is defined to include purchased items for incorporation into the work, regardlessof whether specifically purchased for project or taken from Contractor’s stock of previouslypurchased products.

B. “Materials” is defined as products which must be substantially cut, shaped, worked, mixed,finished, refined or otherwise fabricated, processed, installed or applied to form units ofwork.

C. “Equipment” is defined as products with operational parts, regardless of whether motorizedor manually operated, and particularly including products with service connections (wiring,piping, etc.).

D. Definitions in this paragraph are not intended to negate the meaning of other terms used incontract documents, including “specialties,” “systems,” “structure,” “finishes,” “accessories,”“furnishings,” “special construction,” and similar terms, which are self-explanatory and haverecognized meanings in the construction industry.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Source Limitations: To the greatest extent possible for each unit of work, provide productsor materials of a singular generic kind and from a single source.

1.3 PRODUCT DELIVERY-STORAGE-HANDLING:

A. General: Deliver, handle and store products in accordance with manufacturer’srecommendations and by methods and means that will prevent damage, deterioration, andloss including theft. Control delivery schedules to minimize long-term storage of productsat site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, provide delivery/installationcoordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times for products recognized to beflammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft and othersources of loss.

1.4 WARRANTIES / GUARANTEES:

A. Categories of Specific Warranties: Warranties on the work are in several categories,including those of General conditions, and including (but not necessarily limited to) thefollowing specific categories related to individual units of work specified in sections ofDivisions 2 through 16 of these specifications:

1. Special Project Warranty (Guarantee): A warranty specifically written and signed byContractor for a defined portion of the work and, where required, countersigned bysubcontractor, installer, manufacturer or other entity engaged by Contractor.

2. Specified Product Warranty: A warranty which is required by contract documents tobe provided for a manufactured product incorporated into the work, regardless ofwhether manufacturer has published a similar warranty without regard for specific


incorporation of product into the work, or has written and executed a special projectwarranty as a direct result of contract document requirements.

3. Coincidental Product Warranty: A warranty which is not specifically required bycontract documents (other than as specified in this Section), but which is available ona product incorporated into the work, by virtue of the fact that manufacturer of producthas published warranty in connection with purchases and uses of project withoutregard for specific applications except as otherwise limited by terms of warranty.

B. Refer to individual sections of Divisions 2 through 26 for the determination of units of workthat are required to be specifically or individually warranted, and for the specificrequirements and terms of those warranties.

C. General Limitations: It is recognized that specific warranties are intended primarily toprotect Owner against failure of the work to perform as required, and against deficient,defective and faulty materials and workmanship, regardless of sources. Except asotherwise indicated, specific warranties do not cover failures in the work which result fromthe following:

1. Unusual and abnormal phenomena of the elements.

2. The Owner’s misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of the work.

3. Vandalism after time of substantial completion.

4. Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.

D. Related Damages and Losses: In connection with Contractor’s correction of warrantedwork which has failed, remove and replace other work of project which has been damagedas a result of such failure, or which must be removed and replaced to provide access forcorrection of warranted work.

1. Consequential Damages: Except as otherwise indicated or required by governingregulations, special project warranties and product warranties are not extended tocover damage to building contents (other than work of Contract) which occurs as aresult of failure of warranted work.

E. Reinstatement of Warranty Period: Unless specifically noted otherwise, when work coveredby a special project warranty or product warranty has failed and has been corrected byreplacement or restoration, reinstate warranty by written endorsement for a period of timestarting on date of acceptance of replaced or restored work and ending upon date originalwarranty would have expired if there had been no failure.

F. Replacement Cost, Obligations: Unless specifically noted otherwise, cost of replacing ofrestoring a warranted unit or product is Contractor’s obligation, without regard for whetherOwner has already benefited from use through a portion of the anticipated useful servicelife.

G. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves the right, at time of substantial completion orthereafter, to reject coincidental product warranties submitted by Contractor, which inopinion of Owner tend to detract from or confuse interpretation of requirements of contractdocuments.

H. Contractor’s Procurement Obligations: Do not purchase, subcontract for, or allow others topurchase or sub-subcontract for materials or units of work for project where a specialproject warranty, specified product warranty, certification or similar commitment is required,


until it has been determined that entities required to countersign such commitments arewilling to do so.

1.5 GENERAL PRODUCT COMPLIANCES:

A. General: The compliance requirements, for individual products as indicated in contractdocuments, are multiple in nature and may include generic descriptive, proprietaryperformance, compliance with standards, compliance with codes, conformance withgraphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of whichmust be complied with.

B. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor’s options for selecting products are limitedby contract document requirements, and governing regulations, and are not controlled byindustry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous constructionprojects. Required procedures include, but are not necessarily limited to, the following forvarious indicated methods of specifying:

1. Single Product/Manufacturer Name: Provide product indicated, except adviseEngineer before proceeding, where known that named product is not a feasible oracceptable selection.

2. Two or More Product/Manufacturer Names: Provide one of the named products, atContractor’s option, but excluding products which do not comply with requirements. Do not provide or offer to provide an unnamed product, except where none of namedproducts comply with requirements or are a feasible selection; advise Engineer beforeproceeding.

3. “Or Equal:” Where named products in specifications text are accompanied by the term“or equal,” or other language of similar effect, comply with those contract documentprovisions concerning “substitutions” for obtaining Engineer’s approval (by changeorder) to provide an unnamed product.

4. Standards, Codes and Regulations: Where only compliance with an imposedstandard, code or regulation is required, selection from among products which complywith requirements including those standards, codes and regulations, is Contractor’soption.

5. Performance Requirements: Provide products that comply with specific performanceindicated, and which are recommended by manufacturer (in published productliterature or by individual certification) for application indicated. Overall performance ofa product is implied where product is specified with only certain specific performancerequirements.

6. Prescriptive Requirements: Provide products which have been produced inaccordance with prescriptive requirements, using specified ingredients andcomponents, and complying with specified requirements for mixing, fabricating, curing,finishing, testing and similar operations in manufacturing process.

7. Visual Matching: Where matching with an established sample is required, finaljudgment of whether a product proposed by Contractor matches sample satisfactorilyshall be made by the Engineer. Where no product within specified cost category isavailable which matches sample satisfactorily and complies with requirements, complywith contract document provisions concerning “substitutions” and “change orders” forselection of a matching product outside established cost category, of a product notcomplying with requirements.

8. Visual Selection: Except as otherwise indicated, where specified product requirementsinclude “as selected from manufacturer’s standard colors, patterns, textures...” orwords of similar effect, the selection of manufacturer and basic product (comply with


requirements) is Contractor’s option, and subsequent selection of color, pattern andtexture is Engineer’s selection. Where specified product requirements include “...asselected from standard colors, patterns, textures available within the industry...”, orwords to that effect, selection of product (complying with requirements, and withinestablished cost category) is Engineer’s selection, including designation ofmanufacturer where necessary to obtain desired color, pattern or texture.

1.6 GENERAL PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS:

A. General: Provide products which comply with requirements, and which are undamaged andunused at time of installation, and which are complete with accessories, trim, finish, safetyguards and other devices and details needed for complete installation and for intended useand effect.

1. Standard Products Where Available: Provide standard products of types that havebeen produced and used previously and successfully on other projects and in similarapplications.

2. Continued Availability: Where additional amounts of a product, by nature of itsapplication, are likely to be needed by Owner at a later date for maintenance andrepair or replacement work, provide a standard, domestically produced product whichis likely to be available to Owner at such later date.

B. Nameplates: Except as otherwise indicated, for required approval labels, do notpermanently attach or imprint manufacturer’s or producer’s nameplates or trademarks onexposed surfaces or products which will be exposed to view on exterior of the work.

1. Labels: Locate required labels and stamps on a concealed surface or, where requiredfor observation after installation, on an accessible surface which is not conspicuous.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS:

A. General:

1. The requirements for substitutions do not apply to specified Contractor options onproducts and construction methods.

2. Revisions to contract documents, where requested by Owner or Engineer, are“changes,” not “substitutions.”

3. Requested substitutions during bidding period, which have been accepted prior toContract Date, are included in contract document and are not subject to requirementsfor substitutions as specified herein.

4. Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations and ordersissued by governing authorities do not constitute a basis for change orders, except asprovided for in contract documents.

5. All other requests by the Contractor for changes in products, materials and methods ofconstruction required by contract documents will be considered requests for“substitutions,” and are subject to requirements hereof.

B. Requests for Substitutions Prior to Award of Contract:

1. Requests for substitution of material, products, and equipment will be considered bythe Engineer, provided such requests for substitution are received in writing at theoffice of the Engineer not later than 15 days prior to the date established for the receiptof bids.


2. It shall be the responsibility of the Bidder to provide a clear, well-documented, andeasily referenced presentation of all comparison data and physical samples relating toany request for substitution. Time constraints and the quantity of materials will notallow the Engineer to research or perform any comparison work relating to requestsfor substitution.

3. All substitute materials, products, or equipment that are acceptable to the Engineer willbe listed in an addendum that will be distributed to all Bidders.

4. Requests for substitution that are deemed by the Engineer to be incomplete orunacceptable will not be acted upon.

C. Requests for Substitutions After Award Contract:

1. After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and Engineer will consider a formalrequest for the substitution of products in place of those specified, under the followingconditions:a. The request for proposed substitution shall be submitted within 30 days after

award of the Contract. All requests submitted after expiration of this time limitshall be accompanied by a certified letter from the manufacturer that the specifiedproduct(s) is/are no longer available.

b. The request shall be accompanied by complete data on the proposed substitutionsubstantiating compliance with the Contract Documents including productidentification and description, performance and test date, references and sampleswhere applicable, and an itemized comparison of the proposed substitution withthe products specified or named by Addenda, with data relating to Contract timeand schedule, design and artistic effect where applicable, and its relationship toseparate contracts.

c. The request shall be accompanied by accurate cost data on the proposedsubstitution if modification of the Contract Sum is to be a consideration.

d. Extensive revisions to contract documents shall not be required and changesshall be in keeping with general intent of contract documents.

e. One or more of the following conditions shall be satisfied in the judgment of theEngineer:1) Request is directly related to an “or equal” clause or other language of same

effect in contract documents.2) Required product, material or method cannot be provided within Contract

Time, but not as a result of Contractor’s failure to pursue the work promptlyor to coordinate various activities properly.

3) Required product, material or method cannot be provided in a manner whichis compatible with other materials of the work, or cannot be properlycoordinated therewith, or cannot be warranted as required, or cannot beused without adversely affecting Owner’s insurance coverage on completedwork, or will encounter other substantial noncompliance which are notpossible to overcome otherwise except by making requested substitution. Inrequesting the substitutions, Contractor thereby certifies to overcome suchnon-compatibility, non-coordination, non-warranty, non-insurability, or othernon-compliance as claimed.

4) Required product, material or method cannot receive required approval by agoverning authority, and requested substitution can be so approved.

5) Substantial advantage is offered Owner, in terms of cost, time, energyconservation or other valuable considerations, after deducting off-settingresponsibilities Owner may be required to bear, including additionalcompensation to Engineer for redesign and evaluation services, increasedcost of other work by Owner or separate contractors, and similarconsiderations.


f. A request for substitution not meeting the above conditions will be returnedwithout action having been taken, except to record non-compliance with therequirements.

g. Requests for substitution, when forwarded by the Contractor to the Engineer inaccordance with the conditions described above, are understood to mean that theContractor:1) Represents that he has personally investigated the proposed substitute

product and determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to thatspecified;

2) Will provide the same guarantee for the substitution that he would for thatspecified;

3) Certifies that the cost data presented is complete and includes all relatedcosts under this Contract, but excludes costs under separate contracts andthe Engineer’s redesign costs, and that he waives all claims for additionalcosts related to the substitution which subsequently becomes apparent; and

4) Will coordinate the installation of the accepted substitute, making suchchanges as may be required for the work to be complete in all respects.

h. Substitutions will not be considered if:1) They are requested after expiration of specified time limit;2) They are indicated or implied on shop drawing submissions without the

formal request required above; or3) For their implementation they require a substantial revision of the contract

documents in order to accommodate their use.

1.8 SUBMITTALS:

A. General:

1. The Contractor shall carefully review the individual sections of specifications todetermine the requirements for submittals of shop drawings, samples, test reports,certificates and other data. He shall forward all submittals to the Engineer at the timeand in the number required by the specifications.

2. The Contractor shall provide a list of all required submittals in the form of the sampleschedule included as the last page of this section. This schedule shall be forwarded tothe Engineer not later than seven (7) days following the date of a written “Notice toProceed.”

3. Contractor shall check all submittals for completeness and accuracy prior toforwarding them to the Engineer. If submittals are incomplete or obviously inaccurate,the Engineer will send them back to the Contractor unchecked.

4. All submittals shall be dated and marked to show the names of the Project, Engineer,Contractor, originating Subcontractor, manufacturer or supplier, and separate detailer,if pertinent. Submittals shall completely identify the specification section and locationsat which material or equipment is to be installed. Reproductions of contract drawingsare acceptable as shop drawings only when specifically authorized in writing by theEngineer.

5. Each submittal shall be accompanied by a separate transmittal letter on which thefollowing information is stated:a. Name of projectb. Name of Contractorc. Date of submittald. Contractor’s submittal numbere. Specification section number (and paragraph number, if required for clarification.)f. Name of material or productg. Other pertinent data as required for complete identification


B. Shop Drawings:

1. Shop drawing submittals which relate to architectural and structural items shall consistof one reproducible transparency and one blue-line print of each drawing; for itemsrelating to mechanical and electrical work, include one reproducible transparency andtwo blue-line prints of each drawing. Shop drawings shall include details of fabrication,erection, layout and setting, as well as such other information as may be required bythe various sections of the specifications.

2. After shop drawings have been checked and any corrections noted, the transparencieswould be returned to the Contractor for reproduction and distribution. The Engineerwill retain blue-line prints.

3. Contractor is responsible for distributing required prints of shop drawings to hissubcontractors and material suppliers. Prints of reviewed shop drawings shall bemade from transparencies that carry the Engineer’s stamp.

C. Descriptive Data:

1. Submittals which consist of manufacturer’s descriptive data, including cataloguesheets for materials, equipment and fixtures, shall show dimensions, performancecharacteristics and capacities, wiring diagrams and controls, schedules, and otherpertinent information as required. Where printed materials describe more than oneproduct or model, clearly identify which is to be furnished.

2. After manufacturer’s descriptive data has been checked, the Engineer will retain onecopy of the complete submittal relating to architectural and structural items and twocopies of complete submittal relating to mechanical and electrical work. Balance ofcopies will be returned to Contractor for distribution.

D. Samples:

1. Unless specifically noted otherwise, two samples shall be submitted for each type,color and finish of material and accessory as called for in the various sections ofspecifications. If color or pattern is not scheduled, specified or shown, submitmanufacturer’s entire line of standard colors and patterns.

2. As soon as practicable, but not later than 60 days following award of contract, allsamples required for color selections or verification shall be forwarded to the Engineeras a single submittal, in order to facilitate color selections and coordination of thevarious materials. Final color selections and release of shop drawings contingentupon color selection will not be made until all samples have been submitted,coordinated and approved.

3. Samples will be reviewed by the Engineer for appearance, color, pattern, texture, andfinish only. Compliance with all other requirements is the exclusive responsibility ofthe Contractor.

4. Transportation charges to the Engineer’s office shall be prepaid on all samplesforwarded.

5. Except where specifically noted that approved samples will be returned to theContractor and may be incorporated into the construction, the Engineer will retain allapproved samples.

E. Review by Architect / Engineer:


1. For any single item, the Architect / Engineer will review the original submittal and, ifnecessary, one revised submittal without cost to the Contractor. However, should arevised submittal be so incomplete or inaccurate, in the judgment of the Architect/Engineer, as to require further corrections and resubmittals, the cost of reviewing thesubsequent resubmittals will be billed to the Contractor by the Architect / Engineer.

F. PRODUCT SUBMITTAL LISTING FORM

INSTRUCTIONS:

Do not use the terminology "as specified", rather indicate specifically the product proposed. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders, Construction Contract Agreement and other Division 1Sections for product options and substitutions.

Prepared by:_________________________________________________________________________

SPEC SECITION ITEM MANUFACTURER


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PROJECT CLOSEOUT 01 70 00

SECTION 01 70 00

PROJECT CLOSEOUT

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and other Division-01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for project close out,including but not limited to:

1. Inspection procedures.

2. Project record document submittal.

3. Operating and maintenance manual submittal.

4. Submittal of warranties.

5. Final cleaning.

B. Close out requirements for specific construction activities are included in the appropriateSections in Divisions-2 through -26.

1.3 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for certification of SubstantialCompletion, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date SubstantialCompletion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Workclaimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documentation for completionas indicated in these Contract documents and a statement showing an accounting ofchanges to the Contract Sum.a. If 100 percent completion cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the

value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.

3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance agreements, finalcertifications and similar documents to Owner.

4. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items to Owner.

5. Complete start-up testing of systems, and instruction of Owner’s operating andmaintenance personnel. Discontinue or change over and remove temporary facilitiesfrom the site, along with construction tools, mock-ups, and similar elements.

B. Inspection Procedures: On receipt of a request for inspection, Owner will either proceedwith inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. Owner will prepare theCertificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor ofconstruction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.


1. Owner will repeat inspection when requested and assured that the Work has beensubstantially completed.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for finalacceptance.

1.4 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for certification of finalacceptance and final payment, complete the following. List exceptions in the request.

1. Submit the final payment request with releases and supporting documentation notpreviously submitted and accepted. Include certificates of insurance for products andcompleted operations where required.

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to theContract Sum.

3. Submit a certified copy of the final inspection list of items to be completed orcorrected, stating that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved foracceptance, and the list has been endorsed and dated by Owner.

4. Submit a final liquidated damages settlement statement.

5. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurancerequirements.

B. Re-inspection Procedure: Owner will re-inspect the work upon receipt of notice that thework, including inspection list items form earlier inspections, has been completed, exceptitems whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to Owner.

1. Upon completion of re-inspection, Owner will prepare a certificate of final acceptance,or advise the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have notbeen fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

2. If necessary, re-inspection will be repeated.

1.5 RECORD DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS

A. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect fromdeterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to recorddocuments for Owner’s reference during normal working hours.

B. Record Drawings:

1. During the progress of work the job superintendents for the air conditioning, electricaland plumbing subcontractors shall record on their field sets of drawings the exactlocations as installed of all underground and otherwise concealed conduit pipe andduct lines which were not installed exactly as shown on the contract drawings. Pipelines and ducts which were installed in furred paces, pipe chases, or their spaceswhich can be readily inspected by the use of access panels or other means of accesswill not be considered as being concealed.

2. Upon completion of the work, this data shall be recorded, to scale, and used todevelop As-Built drawings. Each sheet shall bear the name of the subcontractor whoprepared the drawing.


3. One set reproducible Mylar As-Built drawings and two sets blue lines shall besubmitted to Owner upon completion of the work and prior to final payment. TheEngineer shall approve as-Built drawings.

4. Maintain a clean, undamaged set of approved Shop Drawings for submission to theOwner upon completion of the work and prior to final payment.a. Organize record Shop Drawings into manageable sets, bind with durable paper

cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification asappropriate.

C. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets ofmanageable size. Submit 2 complete sets of all manuals to the Engineer for approval. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, withpocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front andspine of each binder. Include the following types of information:

1. Emergency instructions.

2. Spare parts list.

3. Copies of warranties.

4. Wiring diagrams.

5. Recommended “turn around” cycles.

6. Inspection procedures.

D. Prior to final payment, submit a list of all sub-contractors, including address and phonenumbers, to Owner.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment thatrequires regular maintenance to meet with Owner’s personnel to provide instruction inproper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provideinstruction by manufacturer’s representatives. Include a detailed review of the followingitems:

1. Maintenance manuals.

2. Record documents.

3. Spare parts and materials.

4. Tools.

5. Lubricants.

6. Fuels.

7. Identification systems.

8. Control sequences.

9. Hazards.


10. Cleaning.

11. Warranties and bonds.

12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures:

1. Start-up.

2. Shutdown.

3. Emergency operations.

4. Noise and vibration adjustments.

5. Safety procedures.

6. Economy and efficiency adjustments.

7. Effective energy utilization.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions andincluded in Section “Temporary Facilities.”

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Cleaneach surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaningand maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer’s instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection forCertification of Substantial completion.a. Remove labels that are not permanent labels.b. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass indoors and windows.

Remove glazing compound and other substances that are noticeablevision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damagedtransparent materials.

c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dust-freecondition, free of stains, flaws, films and similar foreign substances. Restorereflective condition. Leave all concrete floors broom clean. Vacuum entrancematted surfaces.

d. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. Remove excesslubrication and other substances. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition. Clean light fixtures and lamps.

e. Clean the site, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, litter and otherforeign substances. Sweep paved areas broom clean; remove stains, spills andother foreign deposits. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted, to asmooth even-textured surface.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced exterminator to make a final inspection, and rid theProject of rodents, insects and other pests.

D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protectionof the work during construction.

E. Compliance: Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standardsfor cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on the


owner’s property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful or dangerous materials into drainagesystems. Remove waste materials from the site and dispose of in a lawful manner.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work havebecome the owner’s property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS 22 00 10

SECTION 22 00 10

BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS AND SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. The "General Conditions" and "Supplementary Conditions" are by reference made a part ofthis section and shall apply to each and every heading as though included herein.

B. In the event of conflict, the requirements of the "General Conditions" and "SupplementaryConditions" will take precedence over these "General Requirements".

1.2 GENERAL

A. The Contractor shall provide all plans, labor, equipment, appliances and materials, andshall perform all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing work inaccordance with the Specifications, applicable drawings, and the conditions specifiedabove.

B. Contractor shall provide all equipment required and usually furnished in connection withsuch work and systems whether or not specifically mentioned or specifically indicated onthe drawings.

1.3 INSPECTION OF THE SITE

A. The Contractor shall visit the site, verifying all existing items indicated on drawings and/orspecified, and familiarize himself with the existing work conditions, hazards, grades, actualformations, soil conditions, and local requirements. The submission of bids shall bedeemed evidence of such visits.

B. All proposals shall take these existing conditions into consideration, and the lack of specificinformation on the drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of any responsibility.

C. The trade furnishing the equipment shall be responsible for notifying the Contractor prior toordering it, in the event that equipment specified and/or reviewed is incompatible with thisrequirement.

1.4 PERMITS, UTILITY CONNECTIONS, AND INSPECTIONS

A. Refer to other sections of the specifications for construction phasing and time increments.

B. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for all required utility connections, impact fees, utilityextensions and/or relocations and shall pay all costs and inspection fees for all workincluded herein.

1.5 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

A. The installation shall meet the minimum standards prescribed in the latest editions of thefollowing listed codes and standards, which are made a part of the Specifications, exceptas may be hereinafter modified in these Specifications and associated drawings.


B. Latest edition of the National Fire Protection Association Standards (NFPA):

1. NFPA No. 70 National Electrical Code

2. NFPA No. 101 Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures

3. NFPA No. 255 Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials

C. United States of America Standards Institute (ASA) Standards:

1. A40.8 National Plumbing Code

2. B31.1 & B31.1a Code for Pressure Piping

D. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME): Boiler and Pressure Vessel Codes.

E. American Society of Testing and Material (ASTM): All applicable manuals and standards.

F. American Water Works Association (AWWA): All applicable manuals and standards.

G. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): All applicable manuals andstandards.

H. City and State Building Codes.

I. State of Texas Occupational Safety Act: Applicable safety standards.

J. Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA).

K. State of Texas Energy Conservation Construction Code.

L. All work shall be in accordance with all regulations and requirements of the State of TexasArchitectural Barriers Act (TAS).

M. Refer to Specifications sections hereinafter bound for additional codes and standards.

N. All materials and workmanship shall comply with all applicable state and national codes,specifications, and industry standards. All material shall be listed by the Underwriter'sLaboratories, Inc., as conforming to its standards and so labeled in every case where sucha standard has been established for the particular type of material in question.

O. All equipment provided and all installation methods shall meet all applicable requirementsof the Fort Worth Energy Code.

P. The Contract Documents are intended to comply with the aforementioned rules andregulations; however, some discrepancies may occur. Where such discrepancies occur,the Contractor shall immediately apply for an interpretation. Should the discovery andnotification occur after the execution of a contract, any additional work required forcompliance with said regulations shall be paid for as covered by other specifications of theContract Documents, providing no work or fabrication of materials has been accomplishedin a manner of non-compliance. Should the Contractor fabricate and/or install materialsand/or workmanship in such a manner that does not comply with the applicable codes,


rules and regulations, the Contractor who performed such work shall bear all costs arisingin correcting these deficiencies to comply with said rules and regulations.

1.6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. These specifications are accompanied by drawings of the building and details of theinstallations indicating the locations of equipment, piping, ductwork, outlets, switch controls,circuits, lines, etc. The drawings and these specifications are complementary to eachother, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by both.

B. If the Contractor deems any departures from the drawings necessary, details of suchdepartures and the reasons therefore shall be submitted to the Engineer for review. Nodepartures shall be made without prior written acceptance.

C. There are intricacies of construction that are impractical to specify or indicate in detail;however, in such cases the current rules of good practice and applicable specificationsshall govern.

D. It is the Contractor's responsibility to properly use all information found on the Structural,Plumbing, Mechanical and Electrical drawings where such information affects his work.

E. All dimensional information related to new structures should be taken from the appropriatedrawings. All dimensional information related to existing facilities shall be taken from actualmeasurements made by the Contractor on the site.

F. The interrelation of the specifications, the drawings, and the schedules is as follows: Thespecifications determine the nature and setting of the several materials, the drawingsestablish the quantities, dimensions and details, and the schedules give the performancecharacteristics.

G. Should the drawings or specifications disagree within themselves, or with each other, thebetter quality of greater quantity of work or materials shall be estimated upon, and unlessotherwise directed by the Architect in writing, shall be performed or furnished. Figuresindicated on drawings govern scale measurements and large-scale details governsmall-scale drawings.

1.7 SPACE AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT

A. The size of plumbing, mechanical and electrical equipment indicated on the drawings isbased on the dimensions of a particular manufacturer. While other manufacturers may beacceptable, it is the responsibility of the Contractor to determine if the equipment heproposes to furnish will fit in the space. Shop drawings shall be prepared to indicate asuitable arrangement.

B. All equipment shall be installed in a manner to permit access to all surfaces. All valves,motors, drives, filters, and other accessory items shall be installed in a position to allowremoval for service without disassembly of another part.

1.8 FABRICATION DRAWINGS

A. Each Contractor shall submit shop drawings whenever (1) equipment proposed varies inphysical size and arrangement from that indicated on the drawings, thus causingrearrangement of equipment space, (2) where tight spaces require extreme coordination


between ductwork, piping, conduit and other equipment, and (3) where called for elsewherein these specifications.

B. Contractor shall submit fabrication drawings for review by the Engineer. Fabricationdrawings shall be coordinated with all other trades and with existing conditions.

C. All required shop drawings, except as hereinafter specified, shall be prepared at a scale ofnot less than 1/4 in. equal to 1 ft. by the Contractor.

1.9 SUPERVISION

A. Each contractor shall keep a competent superintendent or foreman on the job at all timesnecessary for the timely and proper completion of the work.

B. It shall be the responsibility of each superintendent to study all drawings and familiarizehimself with the work to be done by other trades. He shall coordinate this work with othertrades, and before material is fabricated or installed, make sure that his work will not causean interference that cannot be resolved without major changes to the drawings. If a conflictbetween trades arises that cannot be resolved at the jobsite, the matter shall be referred tothe Architect for his ruling.

1.10 EXISTING FACILITIES

A. The Contractor shall be responsible for loss or damage to the existing facilities caused byhim and his workmen, and shall be responsible for repairing or replacing such loss ordamage. The Contractor shall send proper notices, make necessary arrangements, andperform other services required for the care, protection and in-service maintenance of allplumbing, heating, air conditioning, and ventilating services for the new and existingfacilities. The Contractor shall erect temporary barricades, with necessary safety devices,as required to protect personnel from injury, and remove all such temporary protectionupon completion of the work. All barricades and safety devices shall be in compliance withOSHA.

B. The Contractor shall provide temporary or new services to all existing facilities as requiredto maintain their proper operation when normal services are disrupted as a result of thework being accomplished under this project.

C. Where existing construction is removed to provide working and extension access toexisting utilities, Contractor shall remove doors, piping, conduit, outlet boxes, wiring, lightfixtures, air conditioning ductwork and equipment, etc., to provide this access and shallreinstall same upon completion of work in the areas affected.

D. Where partitions, walls, floors, or ceilings of existing construction are indicated to beremoved, all Contractors shall remove and reinstall, in locations approved by the Architect,all devices required for the operation of the various systems installed in the existingconstruction. This is to include, but is not limited to, temperature control system devices,electrical switches, relays, fixtures, piping, conduit, etc.

E. Outages of services, as required by the new installation, will be permitted only at a timeapproved by the Architect.


1.11 DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. The Contractor shall modify, remove and/or relocate all materials and items so indicated onthe drawings or required by the installation of new facilities. Materials and/or itemsscheduled for relocation and which are damaged during dismantling or reassemblyoperations shall be repaired and restored to good operative condition.

B. All items that are to be relocated shall be carefully removed in reverse to original assemblyor placement and protected until relocated. The Contractor shall clean and repair andprovide all new materials, fittings, and appurtenances required to complete the relocationsand to restore to good operative order. All relocations shall be performed by workmenskilled in the work and in accordance with standard practice of the trades involved.

C. Service lines and wiring to items to be removed, salvaged, or relocated shall be removed topoints indicated on the drawings, specified, or acceptable to the Owner. Service lines andwiring not scheduled for reuse shall be removed and sealed, capped, or otherwise tied-offor disconnected in a safe manner acceptable to the Architect. All disconnections orconnections into the existing facilities shall be done in such a manner as to result inminimum interruption of services to adjacent occupied areas. Services to existing areas offacilities, which must remain in operation during the construction period, shall not beinterrupted without prior specific approval of the Architect as hereinbefore specified.

D. All equipment and materials indicated to be removed and not be re-used shall be disposedof by the Contractor. Coordinate with Owner where materials are to be stored.

1.12 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. The Contractor shall prepare, in triplicate for the Owner's Manual, complete sets ofoperating and maintenance instructions, system piping, valving, control and interlockdiagrams, manuals, parts lists, etc., for each item of equipment.

B. In addition, the Contractor shall provide the services of a competent engineer or atechnician acceptable to the Architect to instruct a representative of the Owner in thecomplete and detailed operation of all equipment and systems. These instructions shall beprovided for a period of not less than 4 hours to fully accomplish the desired results. Uponcompletion of these instructions, a letter of release will be required, stating the dates ofinstruction and the personnel to whom instructions were given. The Contractor shall beresponsible for proper maintenance until the instructions have been given to the Owner'smaintenance personnel.

1.13 GUARANTEE

A. All work and equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of one year from the date ofsubstantial completion.

B. Guarantee shall be for all labor and materials.

C. Certain items for equipment shall have additional or extended guarantees when sospecified.


1.14 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP

A. All materials, unless otherwise specified, shall be of current U.S. manufacture, new, freefrom all defects, and of the best quality of their respective kinds. Materials and equipmentshall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and the beststandard practice for the type of work involved. All work shall be executed by mechanicsskilled in their respective trades, and the installations shall present a neat, workmanlikeappearance. Materials, and/or equipment damaged in shipment, or otherwise damagedprior to installation, shall not be repaired at the job site, but shall be replaced with newmaterials and/or equipment.

B. The responsibility for furnishing the proper equipment and/or material, and to see that it isinstalled as intended by the manufacturer rests entirely upon the Contractor, who shallrequest advice and supervisory assistance from the representative of specificmanufacturers during the installation.

1.15 FLAME SPREAD PROPERTIES OF MATERIALS

A. Materials and adhesives incorporated in this project shall conform to NFPA 255, latestedition. The classification shall not exceed No. 2, with the range of indices between 0 to 25for these Classifications as listed in the Federal Specifications. Modifications shall bemade to insulating materials, etc., as required to comply with the Federal Specification.

1.16 LARGE APPARATUS

A. Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and whichis too large to permit access through stairways, doorways, or shafts shall be brought to thejob and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. Followingplacement in the space, such apparatus shall be thoroughly, completely protected fromdamage as hereinafter specified.

1.17 FLOOR AND CEILING PLATES

A. Except as otherwise noted, provide chrome plated brass floor and ceiling plates around allpipes, conduits, ducts, etc., passing exposed through walls, floors, or ceilings, in anyspaces, except under floor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against theoutside of the pipe or against the insulation on lines that are insulated and positivelysecured to such pipe or insulation. Plates will not be required for piping where pipe sleevesextend 3/4 in. above finished floor. All equipment rooms are classified as finished areas. Round and rectangular ducts shall have plates made to fit accurately at all floor, wall andceiling penetrations.

1.18 SLEEVES, INSERTS AND FASTENINGS

A. Proper openings through floors, walls, roofs, etc., for the passage of piping, ductwork, etc.,shall be provided. All penetrations must pass through sleeves except soil pipe installedunder concrete slabs on fill. Sleeves shall be set in new construction before concrete ispoured, as cutting holes through any part of the concrete will not be permitted unlessacceptable to the Architect.

B. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall beprotected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the local


code. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in anapproved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-ratedassemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.

C. The minimum clearance between horizontal penetrations including insulation whereapplicable, and sleeves shall be 1/4 in., except that the minimum clearance shall be 2 in.where piping contacts the ground. Sleeves through walls and partitions shall be installedflush with exposed surfaces. Sleeves through floors shall be extended 2 in. above finishedfloor.

D. Above grade and dry location sleeves shall be constructed from 20 to 22 gauge galvanizedsteel. Sleeves passing through walls or floors on or below grade and/or moist areas suchas mechanical rooms shall be constructed of galvanized steel Schedule 40 pipe and shallbe designed with suitable flange in the center of the floor or wall to form a waterproofpassage. After the pipes have been installed in the sleeves, void space around the pipeshall be sealed with "Link-Seal" modular wall and casing seals as manufactured byThunderline Corporation.

E. Suitable concrete inserts for pipe and equipment hangers shall be set and properly locatedfor all pipe and equipment to be suspended from concrete construction.

F. Fastening of pipes, conduits, etc., in the building shall be as follows: To wood members -by wood screws; to masonry - by threaded metal inserts, metal expansion screws, or togglebolts, whichever is appropriate for the particular type of masonry; to steel - machine screwsor welding (when specifically permitted or directed), or bolts, and to concrete by suitableinserts anchored to reinforcing steel, and poured in place unless other means areacceptable for general use, and will only be permitted where specifically acceptable to theArchitect.

G. Under no circumstances will the use of plastic anchors or plastic expansion shields bepermitted for any purpose whatsoever.

H. Vermin Proofing: The open space around all ductwork, piping, etc., passing through theground floor and/or exterior walls shall be sealed with a continuous bead of sealant.

I. The space around piping, ductwork, etc., penetrating walls, ceilings and floors that defineair plenums shall be sealed airtight in an acceptable manner. Ceiling plenums used forreturn air are considered air plenums.

1.19 ACCESS DOORS

A. This Contractor shall provide wall or ceiling access doors for unrestricted access to allconcealed shutoff or service valves, fire and/or smoke dampers, and other items ofconcealed mechanical equipment. All access door locations are not shown on thedrawings. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide access doors at all locationsrequired.

B. Refer to Architectural Division 08 for Access Doors and Panels requirements.

C. Access doors mounted in painted surfaces shall be equal to Milcor (Inland-RyersonConstruction Products Company) manufacture, Style K for plastered surfaces and Style Mor DW for non-plastered surfaces. The Style K doors shall be set so that the finishedsurface of the door is even with the finished surfaces of the adjacent finishes. Access


doors mounted on tile surfaces shall be stainless steel materials. Access doors shall beminimum of 18 in. x 18 in. in size.

1.20 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. The Structural, Mechanical and Electrical plans and specifications including the GeneralProvisions, Supplemental General Provisions, and other pertinent documents issued by theEngineer, are a part of these specifications and shall be complied with in every respect. Allthe above is included in the Contract Documents, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis foradditional compensation due to omission of architectural, structural and electrical detailsfrom the mechanical drawings.

B. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to provide an installation complete in everyrespect. In the event that additional details or special construction may be required forwork indicated or specified in this section or work specified in other sections, it shall be theresponsibility of the Contractor to provide same as well as to provide material andequipment usually furnished with such systems or required to complete the installation,whether mentioned or not.

C. The Contractor shall be responsible for fitting his material and apparatus into the buildingand shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the structural conditions, toavoid all obstructions, to conform to the details of the installation supplied by themanufacturer of the equipment to be installed and thereby to provide an integratedsatisfactory operating installation.

D. The plumbing and associated drawings are necessarily diagrammatic in character andcannot show every connection in detail or every pipe or equipment in its exact location. These details are subject to the requirements of ordinances and also structural andarchitectural conditions. The Contractor shall carefully investigate structural and finishconditions and shall coordinate the separate trades in order to avoid interference betweenthe various phases of work. Work shall be laid out so that it will be concealed in furredchases and suspended ceilings, etc., in finished portions of the building, unless specificallynoted to be exposed. Work shall be installed to avoid crippling of structural members;therefore, inserts to accommodate pipe hangers shall be set before concrete is poured, andproper openings through floor, walls, beams, etc., shall be provided as hereinafter specifiedor as otherwise indicated or required. All work shall be installed parallel or perpendicular tothe lines of the building unless otherwise noted.

E. When the plumbing drawings do not give exact details as to the elevation of pipe, ducts,etc., physically arrange the systems to fit in the space available at the elevations intendedwith the proper grades for the functioning of the system involved. Piping and duct systemsare generally intended to be installed true and square to the building construction, andlocated as high as possible against the structure in a neat and workmanlike manner, andthe plans do not show all required offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other location details.Work shall be concealed in all finished areas. Piping specified to be insulated shall besupported in a manner that will allow the insulation to be installed without gaps. Insulatedpiping in concealed areas shall be offset with fittings as necessary to permit installation ofinsulation. Bending of pipes or installing pipes in a strain in order to insulate will not bepermitted.

F. All oiling devices and all parts of equipment requiring adjustment shall be easily accessible.Equipment shall be so located and installed as to permit convenient and safe maintenanceand future replacement. Piping, ductwork, valve stems, etc., shall not block service space.


1.21 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and the Division 01 Section "SUBSTITUTIONPROCEDURES" for requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions.

B. Standards for Materials:

1. These specifications indicate a standard for all materials incorporated into the work,with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers used to establish a grade and qualityof materials and equipment. The manufacturer listed on the equipment schedules, ornamed first in the specifications, is the one on whose equipment the layout is based. Other named manufacturers must meet the indicated performance and spacerequirements.

2. The "approved equal" clause used in these specifications is to permit the proposal ofunnamed manufacturer's products for the work, and the Engineer's decisionconcerning equal products is final.

3. Considerations as to determination of equal products include, but are not limited to,the following:

Materials Physical sizeWorkmanship WeightGauges of Materials AppearanceAvailable Local Service Personnel PerformancePrevious successful installations CapacityDelivery Schedules Required Equipment Clearances

C. Requests for substitutions for equipment, materials and apparatus listed in Division 22Sections must be submitted in writing a MINIMUM OF 10 DAYS prior to the scheduled biddate. Such requests must be accompanied by complete data to permit proper evaluation.

D. BIDS SHALL NOT BE BASED ON UN-APPROVED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ORAPPARATUS. UNAPPROVED MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT OR APPARATUS WILL NOT BEACCEPTED.

E. Should electrical, water, drain, natural gas, structural support, or other similar requirementsfor alternate equipment, whether named in the specifications or approved as a substitution,be different from requirements for the products used in laying out the project, such changesshall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall not result in extra charges to theOwner or Engineer.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. The manufacturer's published instructions shall be followed for preparing, assembling,installing, erecting, and cleaning manufacturer's materials or equipment, unless otherwiseindicated. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Architect in writing of any conflictbetween the requirements of the Contract Documents and the manufacturer's directionsand shall obtain the Architect's instructions before proceeding with the work. Should theContractor perform any such work that does not comply with the manufacturer's directions


or such instructions from the Architect, he shall bear all costs arising in connection with thedeficiencies.

B. The Contractor shall not receive material or equipment at the jobsite until there is suitablespace provided to properly protect equipment from rust, drip, humidity, and dust damage.

C. Capacities shall be not less than those indicated but shall be such that no component orsystem becomes inoperative or is damaged because of start-up or other overloadconditions.

D. Where materials or equipment are specified to be approved, listed, tested, or labeled by theUnderwriter's Laboratories, Inc., or constructed and/or tested in accordance with thestandards of the American Society of Mechanical Engineers or the Air Moving andConditioning Association, the Contractor shall submit proof that the items furnished underthese sections of the specifications conform to such requirements. The ASME stamp orthe AMCA label will be acceptable as sufficient evidence that the items conform to therespective requirements.

E. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, andcatalog number on a plate securely attached to the item of equipment. All data onnameplates shall be legible at the time of Final Observation.

F. Standard factory finish will be acceptable on equipment specified by model number;otherwise surfaces of ferrous metal shall be given a rust-inhibiting coating. The treatmentshall withstand 200 hours in salt-spray fog test, in accordance with Method 6061 of FederalStandard No. 141. Immediately after completion of the test, the specimen shall show nosigns of wrinkling or cracking, and no signs of rust creepage beyond 1/8 in. on either side ofthe scratch mark. Where rust-inhibitor coating is specified hereinafter, any treatment thatwill pass the above test is acceptable, unless a specific coating is specified, except thatcoal tar or asphalt type coatings will not be acceptable, unless so stated for a specific item. Where steel is specified to be hot-dip galvanized, mill-galvanized sheet steel may be usedprovided all raw edges are painted with a zinc-pigmented paint conforming to MilitarySpecification MIL-P-6215.

G. Belts, pulleys, chains, gears, couplings, projecting setscrews, keys and other rotating partslocated so that any person can come in close proximity thereto, shall be fully enclosed orproperly guarded.

H. The Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and proper relation of his work tothe building structure and to the work of all trades. The Contractor shall visit the premisesand thoroughly familiarize himself with all details of the work and working conditions, toverify all dimensions in the field, and to advise the Architect of any discrepancy beforeperforming any work. Adjustments to the work required, in order to facilitate a coordinatedinstallation, shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner.

2.2 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properlyprotect all materials and equipment from damage from the time of delivery until thecompletion of the work. This shall include the erection of all required temporary sheltersand supports to adequately protect any items stored in the open on the site from theweather, the ground and surrounding work; the cribbing of any items above the floor of theconstruction; and the covering of items in the incomplete building with tarpaulins or other


protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above will besufficient cause for the rejection of the items in question.

B. Take particular care not to damage the building structure in performing work. All finishedfloors, steel treads, and workmen or their tools and equipment shall cover finished surfacesto prevent any damage during the construction of the building.

C. Equipment and materials shall be protected from rust both before and after installation. Any equipment or materials found in a rusty condition at the time of final observation mustbe cleaned of rust and repainted as specified elsewhere in these specifications.

2.3 COOPERATION BETWEEN TRADES AND WITH OTHER CONTRACTORS

A. Each trade, subcontractor and/or contractor must work in harmony with the various othertrades, subcontractors, and/or contractors on the job as may be required to facilitate theprogress to the best advantage of the job as a whole. Each trade, subcontractor, and/orcontractor must pursue his work promptly and carefully as not to delay the general progressof the job. This Contractor shall work in harmony with contractors working under othercontracts on the premises.

2.4 PRECEDENCE OF MATERIALS

A. These specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to cover systems whichwill not interfere with the structural design of the building, which will fit into the availablespace, and which will insure complete and satisfactory systems. Each Contractor shall beresponsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the building.

B. Each Contractor shall so harmonize his work with that of the other trades so that it may beinstalled in the most direct and workmanlike manner without hindering or handicapping theother trades. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipelines thatrequire a stated grade for proper operation. Where space requirements conflict, thefollowing order of precedence shall, in general, be observed: See special conditions notedhereinafter for work integrated with structural systems.

1. Building lines

2. Structural members

3. Drain piping

4. Vent piping

5. Steam piping

6. Condensate piping

7. Refrigerant piping

8. Electrical bus duct

9. Supply ductwork

10. Return ductwork

11. Exhaust ductwork

12. Chilled water and heating water piping

13. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Piping


14. Natural gas piping

15. Domestic hot and cold water piping

16. Electrical conduit

2.5 LOCATION OF OUTLETS IN ROOMS

A. All fire protection, plumbing, acoustical tile, diffusers, grilles, registers, and other devicesshall be referenced to coordinated, established data points and shall be located to presentsymmetrical arrangements with these points and to facilitate the proper arrangements ofacoustical tile panels and other similar panels with respect to the mechanical and electricaloutlets and devices. Those mechanical and electrical outlets shall be referenced to suchfeatures as wall and ceiling furrings, balanced border widths, masonry joints, etc. Outlets inacoustical tile shall occur symmetrically in tile joints or in the center of whole tiles. Whenlocations of mechanical and electrical devices shown on the Architect's reflected ceilingplans need to be modified, the final determination of the exact location of each outlet andthe arrangement to be followed shall be acceptable to the Architect.

B. The drawings show diagrammatically the location of the various outlets and apparatus. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to thegeneral plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing-in drawings, etc., bymeasurements at the building, and in cooperation with the other trades. The Architectreserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatusbefore installation, without additional cost to the Owner.

C. The Contractor, by submitting a bid on this work, sets forth that he has the necessarytechnical training and ability, and that he will install his work in a satisfactory andworkmanlike manner which is up to the best standards of the trade, complete, and in goodworking order. If any of the requirements of the drawings and specifications are impossibleof performance, or if the installation, when made in accordance with such requirements, willnot perform satisfactorily, he shall report it to the Architect for correction promptly afterdiscovery of the discrepancy.

2.6 CONNECTIONS FOR OTHERS

A. This Contractor shall rough-in for and make all gas, water, steam, sewer, etc., connectionsto all fixtures, equipment, machinery, etc., provided by others in accordance with detailedroughing-in drawings provided by the equipment suppliers, along with actual measurementsof the equipment connections, or as detailed.

B. After the equipment is set in place, this Contractor shall make all final connections and shallprovide all required pipe, fittings, valves, traps, etc.

C. Provide all air gap fittings where required. In each water line serving an item of equipmentor piece of machinery, provide a shut-off valve. On each drain not provided with a trap,provide a suitable trap.

D. All pipe fittings, valves, traps, etc., exposed in finished areas and connected tochrome-plated lines provided by others shall be chrome plated to match.


PART 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1 INSTALLATION METHODS

A. All pipes shall be concealed in pipe chases, walls, furred spaces, or above the building,unless otherwise indicated.

B. Piping may be run exposed in mechanical rooms, janitors' closets, or storage spaces, butonly where necessary. All exposed piping shall be run in the neatest, most inconspicuousmanner, and parallel or perpendicular to the building lines.

C. All piping shall be adequately and properly supported from the building structure by meansof hanger rods or clamps to walls as herein specified.

D. Where limited space is available above the ceilings and below concrete beams or otherdeep projections, pipe and conduit shall be sleeved through the projection where it crosses,in a manner to provide maximum above-floor clearance. Sleeves shall be as specified oras required.

E. All pipe, conduits, etc., shall be cut accurately to measurements established at the buildingand shall be worked into place without springing or forcing. All ducts, pipes and conduitsrun, exposed in machinery and equipment rooms, shall be installed parallel to the buildingplans, except as otherwise shown. Conduits in furred ceilings and in other concealedspaces may be run at angles to the construction but shall be neatly grouped and rackedindicating good workmanship. All conduit and pipe openings shall be kept closed until thesystems are closed with final connections.

F. There shall be no pipe joints nearer than 12 in. to a wall, ceiling, or floor penetration, unlesspipe joint is the welded type joint.

G. The Contractor shall study all construction documents and carefully lay out all work inadvance of fabrication and erection in order to meet the requirements of the extremelylimited spaces. Where conflicts occur, the Contractor shall meet with all involved tradesand the Architect and resolve the conflict, prior to erection of any work, in the area involved.

3.2 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cut and patch openings through walls, floors, etc., resulting from work in existingconstruction or by failure to provide proper openings or recesses in new construction.

B. Openings cut through concrete and masonry shall be made with masonry saws and/or coredrills at locations acceptable to the Architect. Impact-type equipment will not be used,except where specifically acceptable to the Architect. Openings in Precast concrete slabsfor pipes, conduits, outlet boxes, etc., shall be core drilled or cast to exact size.

C. All openings shall be restored to "as-new" condition under the appropriate SpecificationSection for the materials involved, and shall match remaining surrounding materials and/orfinishes.

D. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide and install lintels or other structuralsupports to protect the remaining masonry. Adequate supports shall be provided during thecutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All


structural members, supports, etc., shall be of the proper size and shape, and shall beinstalled in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

E. All fire protection work in areas containing plaster shall be completed prior to the applicationof the finish plaster coat. Cutting of finish plaster coat will not be permitted.

F. No cutting, boring, or excavating, which will weaken the structure, shall be undertaken.

3.3 ROOF PENETRATIONS

A. Pipe and duct sleeves and flashings compatible with the roofing installation shall beprovided for roof penetrations. Manufacturer of roofing materials shall approve methodsand materials. Pitch pans are not acceptable.

B. Roof penetrations through metal roofs by the Plumbing or Mechanical Contractor will berequired to have written approval by the Roofing Contractor.

C. Pitch pans are not acceptable.

3.4 ROOF PIPING SUPPORTS

A. Single run pipe 2-1/2 in. O.D. and less, shall have Type SS-8RL as manufactured byPortable Pipe Hangers, Inc., or an approved equal, spaced at a maximum 8 ft. o.c. andinstalled on roof pads if required by Roofing Manufacturer. All conduits shall be held inplace with clips on bars. Coordinate exact locations of supports with Roofing Contractor. Do not use wood blocking under supports.

B. Multiple parallel runs, or piping and conduits larger than 2-1/2 in. O.D. shall have TypePP-10 with channel as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc., spaced at amaximum 8 in. o.c. and installed on roof pads if required by Roofing Manufacturer. Allconduits shall be held in place with clips on bars. Coordinate exact locations of supportswith Roofing Contractor. Do not use wood blocking under supports.

3.5 FABRICATION OF PIPE

A. All the various piping systems shall be made up straight and true and run at proper gradesto permit proper flow of the contained material. Lines shall also be graded for properdrainage.

B. Piping shall follow as closely as possible the routes shown on plans, but shall take intoconsideration conditions to be met at the site.

C. Should any unforeseen conditions arise, lines shall be changed or rerouted as requiredafter approval has been obtained.

D. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction and so as toprevent excessive strain and stress in the piping, in connections, and in equipment to whichlines are connected.

E. All piping shall be clean when it is installed. Before installation it shall be checked,upended, swabbed, if necessary, and all rust or dirt from storage shall be removed. Pipe


shall not be permitted to lie on the ground during storage. Pipe ends shall be sealed duringstorage.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING

A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining theequipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment,valves, piping, etc., by marking them.

B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment ofengraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16 in. thick,3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2in. high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of theitem, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include, but not be limited to, the following:

1. Domestic Water Heaters

2. Motor controllers

3. Miscellaneous similar and/or related items.

C. The Contractor shall install identification tags to be affixed to those valves that havefunctions that are not obvious. For example, it would not be expected that valves at apressure reducing station in a machine room would be tagged. The valve identificationtags shall be brass discs, 2 in. in diameter. Each tag shall be attached to its valve withcopper clad annealed iron wire or other approved material.

3.7 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. The Contractor shall, during the progress of the work and upon its completion, test his workand make all tests as required by the specifications, state, municipal and other authoritieshaving jurisdiction of the work. Piping pressure tests shall be made before pipe isconcealed or covered. Tests shall be made in the presence of authorities requiring tests. The Contractor shall pay all costs, inspection charges and fees required for the tests of hiswork.

B. The Contractor shall provide all apparatus, temporary piping connection, etc., required fortests. The Contractor shall take all due precautions to prevent damage to the building or itscontents incurred by such tests. The Contractor shall repair and make good at his ownexpense any damage caused by failures or leaks during the tests.

C. Leaks, defects or deficiencies shall be repaired and/or replaced, and tests shall berepeated until the test requirements are complied with fully.

D. All equipment shall be placed in operation and tested for proper automatic control beforethe final balancing of the system is started.

E. All tests shall have pertinent data logged by the Contractor at the time of testing. Data shallinclude date, time, personnel, description, and extent of system tested, test condition, testresults, specified results, and any other pertinent data. Data shall be delivered to theArchitect.


3.8 COOPERATION AND CLEANUP

A. It shall be the responsibility of each trade to cooperate fully with the other trades on the jobto help keep the job site in a clean and safe condition. At the end of each day's work, eachtrade shall properly store all of his tools, equipment and materials and shall clean his debrisfrom the job. Upon the completion of the job, each trade shall immediately remove all of histools, equipment, any surplus materials and all debris caused by his portion of the work.

3.9 CLEANING AND PAINTING

A. All equipment, piping, ductwork, grills, insulation, etc., in finished areas furnished andinstalled by the Contractor shall be painted. Finished areas include mechanical rooms,boiler rooms, and outside the building as well as occupied areas inside the building. Finalpainting is to be done by the General Contractor. This Contractor shall thoroughly clean allpart of materials and equipment of cement, plaster, and other materials, and all oil andgrease spots shall be removed. Such surfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks andcorners scraped out. Exposed metal work shall be carefully brushed down with steelbrushes to remove rust and other spots and left smooth and clean.

B. This Contractor shall thoroughly clean the finish on all parts of the materials and equipmentwith factory applied finishes. Exposed parts in equipment rooms, above crawl space slabs,and all other spaces except sealed chases and attics shall be thoroughly cleaned ofcement, plaster and other materials, and all oil and grease spots shall be removed. Suchsurfaces shall be carefully wiped and all cracks and corners scraped out. If the finish hasbeen damaged, the Contractor shall re-paint to the satisfaction of the Architect.

C. All canvas finishes shall be painted with one sizing coat if not already sized, containing amildew resistant additive and Arabol adhesive prior to any other specified finish paint.

D. No nameplates on equipment shall be painted, and suitable protection shall be afforded tothe plates to prevent their being rendered illegible during painting operation.

3.10 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS OF PLUMBING WORK

A. The extent of electrical provisions to be provided as plumbing work is indicated in othersections of the specifications, on the drawings and as further specified in this section.

B. Starters, Controllers: In general, plumbing includes furnishing combination starters.Controllers are specifically included as electrical work when mounted in motor controlcenters. Electrical work includes installation, mounting and wiring of starters andcontrollers that are furnished as mechanical work. Free standing, large motor controllersshall be set in place, on pads, as plumbing work.

C. Electrical heating equipment shall be furnished complete with internal or integral fusing andsubdivision of loads to comply with the NEC.

D. Wherever possible, match the elements of the electrical provisions of plumbing work withsimilar elements of the electrical work specified in electrical sections of the specifications.

E. Standards:


1. For electrical equipment and products, comply with applicable NEMA standards, andrefer to NEMA standards to definitions of terminology herein.

2. Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA No. 70) for installation requirements.

3. Comply with National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) "Standard ofInstallation".

3.11 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Unless noted otherwise in the Supplementary General Conditions; provide temporaryfacilities.

3.12 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. All equipment shall be furnished and installed complete and ready for use.

B. Others shall furnish certain kitchen equipment. Contractor shall be responsible forfurnishing and installing all items as required to make kitchen equipment completeoperating systems. The Contractor shall furnish and install all auxiliary piping, valves,controls, control wiring, conduit, alarms, etc., required. All necessary devices, controlwiring, conduit, etc., will not necessarily be shown on the drawings.

3.13 OWNER FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

A. The Contractor’s responsibility shall include receiving and installing all Owner furnishedequipment.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING DEMOLITION 22 05 06

SECTION 22 05 06

PLUMBING DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Demolition of:

1. Plumbing fixtures and trim, specialties, equipment and associated piping.

2. Hanger and support devices.

3. All other appliances or devices associated with equipment or devices to be removed.

B. Demolition of all power wiring and conduit from each mechanical item to be removed backto the point of supply.


A. Perform all demolition and removal work necessary to arrive at the arrangement shown onthe Contract Drawings.

B. Perform all operations in such a method to cause minimum damage to items to berelocated, salvaged, or to remain intact and in use.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Perform site repair and removal of salvaged items at times approved by the Owner. Accomplish repair and removal of items in a continuous and diligent manner in order to limitinterference with Owner's on-going operations.

B. Drawings may not indicate and specifications may not identify every item required to bemoved or removed.

C. Before submitting bids, visit and examine the site of the work and become familiar with thescope of the work and the details of the demolition work to be accomplished.

D. Submittal of a bid will be evidence that such an examination has been made and thevarious details noted.

E. Claims for extra compensation because of additional labor, materials, or equipmentrequired because of difficulties encountered, will not be recognized unless items wereconcealed at time of inspection of the Contract Documents. Bring all such items to theattention of the Owner's Representative and the Engineer for their disposition beforecontinuing with the work.

F. Execute demolition work in a manner to protect adjacent equipment and other existingitems against damage.

G. Provide and erect lights, barricades, warning signs, and other items as required forprotection of the Owner's employees, building occupants, and the public.


H. Maintain barricades in good condition throughout the project to substantial completion.

I. Control the dust resulting from demolition to prevent it from spreading the occupied areasof the building and to avoid creating a nuisance in the immediate surrounding area.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for all building elements, all items which are to remain, all occupants andall workers at all times, and in accordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.2 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FROM THE WEATHER

A. Maintain weather protection for the space(s) being worked in at all times, and inaccordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Perform demolition in accordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.4 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS

A. Dispose of all demolition items and materials in a legal off-site location.

3.5 RELOCATION AND REUSE OF MECHANICAL ITEMS

A. Relocate items indicated on the Contract Drawings as required to accommodate the newconstruction. Remove, relocate and reconnect equipment and accessories that are to bereused.

B. Coordinate the work with the Electrical Contractor. Determine which items and equipmentare to remain, to be relocated or to be removed. Perform the work consistent with thescope of the project.

C. Transport and store materials removed and designated for relocation as directed by theOwner's Representative.

D. Remove all salvage items not be reused or delivered to the Owner, from the property at theend of each workday.

E. Maintain full water, drain, electrical service, etc., to all equipment and apparatus thatremains in service in the building.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 23 00 10 "BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS".


3.7 REMOVAL OF WATER

A. Be responsible for the removal of water in areas in which scheduled work is to beperformed.

1. Remove water by pumping, siphoning, absorbent mopping, or compressed airbrooming.

2. Do not use any method of removal that will cause damage to new or reused adjacentequipment or materials.

3.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule demolition in strict compliance with the Owner's instructions.

3.9 DISCONNECTION AND RECONNECTION OF UTILITIES

A. Do not disconnect or reconnect any utilities until notifying the Owner's Representative.

B. Notify the Electrical Contractor when requiring Electrical Disconnect or Reconnect.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 22 05 12

SECTION 22 05 12

PLUMBING AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Refer to Section 26 05 10 - General Requirements for Electrical Work.

B. Refer to Section 21 00 10 - General Requirements for Fire Protection Work

C. Refer to Section 22 00 10 - Basic Plumbing Requirements.

D. Refer to Section 23 00 10 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section describes the coordination between the Fire Protection, Plumbing, Mechanicaland Electrical portions of the work.

B. This Section is included under the Division 21 portion of the Specifications as Section 21 0512, under the Division 22 portion of the Specifications as Section 22 05 12, under theDivision 23 portion of the Specifications as Section 23 05 12, and under the Division 26portion of the Specifications as Section 26 05 12.

1.3 WORK INCLUDED

A. Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated, motors and controls shall be furnished, set inplace and wired in accordance with the following schedule. This schedule may includeequipment and systems that are not required for this project. Only the equipment andsystems that are required on the drawings and/or specified elsewhere will be required bythis section:

ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION

1. Equipment Motors 21/22/23 21/22/23 262. Magnetic Motor Starters

a. Automatically controlled, with orwithout HOA switches

21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

b. Automatically controlled, with orwithout HOA switches and furnishedas part of factory wired equipment

21/22/23 22/23 Notes 1,3,5

c. Manually controlled 21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5d. Manually controlled and furnishedas part of factory wired equipment

21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5

e. Furnished in Motor Control Centers 26 26 Notes 1,3,53. Variable Speed (Frequency) AC

Drives22/23 26 Notes 1,4,5


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION

4. Line voltage thermostats, time clocks,etc., not connected to control panelsystems

23 26 23

5. Electric thermostats, time clocks,remote bulb thermostats, motorizedvalves, float controls, etc. which arean integral part or directly attached toducts, pipes, etc.

22/23 22/23 22/23

6. Temperature control panels and timeswitches mounted on temperaturecontrol panels

23 23 23

7. Motorized valves, motorizeddampers, solenoid valves, EP and PEswitches, etc.

23 23 Note 1

8. Alarm bells furnished with equipmentinstalled by Division 22 or 23

22/23 22/23 22/23

9. Wiring to obtain power for controlcircuits, including circuit breaker

21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23

10. Low voltage controls 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/2311. Fire protection system (sprinkler)

controls21 21 Note 8

12. Fire and smoke detectors installed onmechanical units and in ductwork

28 23 Note 8

13. All relays required for fan shutdown,motorized dampers, smoke controldevices, and other items integral withHVAC equipment to provideoperation and control of HVACequipment

23 23 Note 1

14. Smoke dampers, and combinationfire/smoke dampers

23 23 Note 7

15. Boiler and water heater controls,boiler burner controls panels

22/23 22/23 22/23

16. Pushbutton stations, pilot lights 22/23 22/23 22/2317. Heat Tape 21/22/23 21/22/23 2618. Disconnect switches, manual

operating switches furnished as apart of the equipment

21/22/23 21/22/23 Notes 1,5

19. Disconnect switches, manualoperating switches furnishedseparate from equipment

26 26 26

20. Multispeed switches 23 23 2621. Thermal overloads 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/2322. Control relays, transformers 21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/2323. Refrigeration cycle, cooling tower and

controls23 23 23

24. Tamper switches for fire protection(sprinkler) system

21 21 28

25. Flow and/or pressure switches for fireprotection (sprinkler) system

21 21 28

26. Fire and jockey pump controllers andautomatic transfer switch

21 21 Note 6


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION

27. Alarm bells or horns for fire protection(sprinkler) system

21 21 28

28. Generator (underground) fuel tank 22 22 --29. Generator fuel level indicator 22 22 2630. Generator fuel piping from tank to

generator22 22 --

31. Underground fuel tank leak detectionand monitoring system

22 22 22

NOTES: (1) Power wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13 of the specifications shall beprovided under Division 26; control wiring as defined in Section 26 29 13of the specifications shall be provided under Division 21/22/23.

(2) Wiring from alarm contacts to alarm systems provided by Division 26,wiring from auxiliary contacts to air handling system controls provided byDivision 23. Division 26 shall provide power to smoke detector. Smokedetectors required for all air handling systems 2000 CFM or greater. Refer to other Division 23 specifications, Division 26 and Drawings formore specific requirements.

(3) For requirements for Magnetic Motor Starters, refer to Section 23 89 65 -MOTOR CONTROLLERS.

(4) For requirements for Variable Speed (Frequency) AC drives, refer toSection 23 89 65 - MOTOR CONTROLLERS.

(5) Disconnect switches, operating switches, starters and other similar itemsthat are factory-mounted, as a part of complete assembly, shall complywith applicable provisions of the National Electric Code. All suchdisconnect switches shall be fused.

(6) Power wiring from energy source to controllers and automatic transferswitch provide shall be provided under Division 26. Interconnection powerand control wiring from controllers and automatic transfer switch to pumpsshall be provided under Division 21, 22 or 23 and conforming to Division26 specifications. Control wiring from automatic transfer switch togenerator starter shall be provided under Division 26.

(7) Division 26 will provide power to all smoke and combination fire/smokedampers, and Division 28 will provide control for all such dampers usingarea smoke detectors.

(8) Wiring for sprinkler system controls to be provided by Division 21. Wiringfrom devices to Fire Alarm System to be provided by Division 28.

B. CONNECTIONS: Make all connections to controls that are directly attached to ducts,piping and mechanical equipment with flexible connections.

C. PRECEDENCE

1. In general, piping systems that require a stated grade for proper operation shall haveprecedence over other systems.

2. Precedence for pipe, conduit and duct systems shall be as follows.a. Building linesb. Structural membersc. Soil and drain pipingd. Vent piping


e. Steam pipingf. Condensate pipingg. Refrigerant pipingh. Electrical bus ducti. Supply ductworkj. Return ductworkk. Exhaust ductworkl. Chilled water and heating water pipingm. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Pipingn. Natural gas pipingo. Domestic hot and cold water pipingp. Electrical conduit

3. Lighting Fixtures shall have precedence over air grilles and diffusers.

D. FINAL INSPECTION AND REPORT

1. At the completion of the work, there shall be a meeting of the Fire Protection,Plumbing, Mechanical, Electrical Fire Alarm and Temperature Control Contractors,representatives of mechanical and electrical equipment manufactures whoseequipment was actually installed on the project, and similarly-involved individuals, whoshall thoroughly inspect all systems, and who shall mutually agree that all equipmenthas been properly wired and installed, and that all temperature and safety controls areproperly functioning. A written report of this meeting, listing those in attendance, andthe companies that they represent, shall be filed with the Owner and Architect orEngineer.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING METERS AND GAUGES 22 05 19

SECTION 22 05 19

PLUMBING METERS AND GAUGES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on Drawings and/orspecified in other Division 22 sections.

B. Types of meters and gauges specified in this section include the following:

1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings.a. Glass Thermometers.b. Thermometer Wells.c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs.

2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings.a. Pressure Gauges.b. Pressure Gauge Cocks.c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs.

C. Gauges furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as part ofequipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of meters andgauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters andgauges.

2. ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and InstrumentSociety of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation ofmeters and gauges.

C. Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operatingconditions, are certified by manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installationinstructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibratedperformance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showingmanufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter andgauge.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated,designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 in.long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180° adjustment in verticalplane, 360° adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Glycerin filled, magnifying lens, 1 percent scale range accuracy, shockmounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

G. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Hot Water: 30° - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions (0° - 160°C) with 2°C scale divisions).

H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers ofone of the following, or approved equal.

1. Ernst Gage Co.

2. Marshalltown Instruments, Inc.

3. Trerice (H.O.) Co.

4. Weiss Instruments, Inc.

5. Weksler

2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure ratedto match piping system design pressure. Provide 2-in. extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.3 TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F(93°C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/4 in. NPS fitting, withself-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 in. O.D.probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screwcap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.


B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gaugeconnector plugs of one of the following, or approved equal:

1. Peterson Equipment Co.

2. Watts Regulator Co.

2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. General: Provide liquid filled pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and rangesindicated, designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type,bottom connection.

C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, liquid filled 4+ in. diameter.

D. Connector: Brass with 1/4 in. male NPT. Provide protective siphon when used for steamservice.

E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

F. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Water: 0 - 100 psi.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one ofthe following, or approved equal:

1. Ametek/U.S. Gauge.

2. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal.




2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees onpiping systems. Construct gauge cock of brass with 1/4 in. female NPT on each end, and"T" handle brass plug.

B. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.


3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES

A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easilyread by observer standing on floor.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated:

1. At inlet and outlet of each tank type water heater.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fillwell with oil or graphite, secure cap.

D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipeat most readable position. Secure cap.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES

A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe atmost readable position.


1. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve.

C. Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install siphon for steampressure gauges.

3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replacecracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer'stouch-up paint.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 22 05 29

SECTION 22 05 29

PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on Drawings and/orspecified in other Division 22 sections.

B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:

1. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, and anchors.

C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified aspart of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports andanchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.


1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to productmaterials and installation of supports and anchors.

2. MSS Standard Compliance:a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture

comply with MSS SP-58.b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data and maintenance data as required under provisions of Division 01 andSection 22 00 10.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installationinstructions for each type of support and anchor.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support andanchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; inaccordance with requirements of Division 01.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated horizontal-pipinghangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer foreach piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for barepiping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

B. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.

C. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 2.

D. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3.

E. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.

F. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5.

G. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6.

H. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7.

I. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9.

J. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10.

K. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11.

L. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12.

M. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24.

N. Clips: MSS Type 26.

O. Pipe Slides and Slide Plates: MSS Type 35, including one of the following plate types:

1. Plate: Unguided type.

2. Plate: Guided type.

3. Plate: Hold-down clamp type.

P. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base-support and cast-iron floorflange.

Q. Pipe Stanchion Saddles: MSS Type 37, including steel pipe base support and cast-ironfloor flange.


R. Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 38, including steel pipe base support andcast-iron floor flange.

S. Single Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 41.

T. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43.

U. Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 44.

V. Pipe Rolls and Plates: MSS Type 45.

W. Adjustable Pipe Roll Stands: MSS Type 46.

2.2 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachmentscomplying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer tosuit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturerfor each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Providecopper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.

C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.

D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.

E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.

F. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.

2.3 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building attachmentscomplying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer tosuit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer'spublished product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems.

B. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.

C. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.

D. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.

E. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22.

F. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.


G. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25.

H. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.

I. Steel Beam Clamps W/Eye Nut: MSS Type 28.

J. Linked Steel Clamps W/Eye Nut: MSS Type 29.

K. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.

L. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:

1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, suspending 750 lbs. max.

2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, suspending 1500 lbs. max.

3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, suspending 3000 lbs. max.

M. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34.

N. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57.

O. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58.

2.4 CONCRETE INSERTS

A. Drill-In Spot Type: Steel, attached wedge, lock washer and nut. Size inserts to suitthreaded hanger rod.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:a. Hilti "Kwik Bolt"b. Ramset "Wedge Anchor"c. Rawl "Stud"

2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangersand supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exactfit to mate with pipe insulation.

B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matchingadjoining insulation.

C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to preventcrushing of insulation.

D. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of high density, 125-psi compressivestrength, and water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provideassembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hangershields of one of the following:a. Elcen Metal Products Co.


b. Pipe Shields, Inc.

2.6 MANUFACTURERS OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supports ofone of the following:

1. B-Line Systems Inc.

2. ITT Grinnell Corp.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformlygraded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement andhydration.

D. Auxiliary Steel: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel inaccordance with AWS standards.

E. Pipe Guides: Provide factory-fabricated guides, of cast semi-steel or heavy fabricatedsteel, consisting of bolted two-section outer cylinder and base with two-section guidingspider bolted tight to pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), andcylinder. Provide guides of length recommended by manufacturer to allow indicated travel.

2.8 SLEEVES, INSETS AND FASTENINGS

A. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall beprotected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the localcode. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in anapproved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-ratedassemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Donot proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required buildingstructural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correctinadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and otherbuilding structural attachments.


B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meetat project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspectionand testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordinationwith work of this section and Engineer for purpose of reviewing material selections andprocedures to be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirementsspecified.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel forproper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated inMSS SP-69. Install additional at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,strainers, expansion joints, and at all changes in direction of piping. Install concrete insertsbefore concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete withcompressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars throughopenings at top of inserts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properlyfrom building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Install additional at concentrated loads,including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at all changes in directionof piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported togetheron trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacingscomplying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together bytrapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports forsmaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do notsupport piping from other piping.

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washersand other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs,install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

C. Support fire-water piping independently of other piping.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports that arecopper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.

E. Support and laterally brace vertical pipe runs at every floor level and at intervals not toexceed 20 ft. 0 in. Support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings orlugs welded to the pipe.

F. Provisions for Movement:

1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and topermit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loadingand stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and sothat maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are notexceeded.


G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projectingthrough insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.

2. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers for piping 2-1/2 in. and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protectionsaddle, or high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2 in. andless shall be provided with pipe covering shields. On cold or chilled water pipingprovide vapor barrier through hanger.

3. Do NOT utilize "pipe size" hangers with insulation placed over the pipe and hanger.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted byANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and tostructure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance withexpansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces tomaximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principalpipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Makeprovisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion andcontraction of piping.

3.6 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung fromstructure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Providefactory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

B. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 07;not work of this section.


A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.

B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment toproper level and elevations.

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces withmanufacturer's touch-up paint.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION 22 05 53

SECTION 22 05 53

PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on Drawingsand/or specified in other Division 22 sections.

B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Painted Identification Materials.

2. Plastic Pipe Markers.

3. Plastic Tape.

4. Valve Tags.

5. Valve Schedule Frames.

6. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.

7. Plastic Equipment Markers.

8. Plasticized Tags.

C. Plumbing identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified aspart of equipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.

D. Refer to other Division 22 sections for identification requirements at central-stationmechanical control center; not work of this section.

E. Refer to Division 21, 23 and 26 sections for identification requirements of fire protection,mechanical and electrical work; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identificationdevices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.


1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions foreach identification material and device required.

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on8-1/2 in. x 11 in. bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation


(as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (ifany). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, byspecial "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copiesfor Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 01.

C. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals; inaccordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identificationmaterials of one of the following:

1. Allen Systems, Inc.

2. Brady (WHO) Co.; Signmark Div.

3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.

4. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required foreach application as referenced in other Division 22 sections. Where more than single typeis specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection foreach product category.

2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwiseindicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on,color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1 in. thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipemarker to be installed on un-insulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2 in. beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.

C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 in. (including insulation if any), providefull-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened by one of thefollowing methods:

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.

2. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

D. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature that best describes pipingsystem in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with name as shownor specified.


E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, andabbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrallywith piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separateunit of plastic.

2.5 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved pipingsystem abbreviation in 1/4 in. high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 in. high, andwith 5/32 in. hole for fastener.

1. Provide 1+ in. diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide size and shape as specified or scheduled for each piping system.

3. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.

B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link orbeaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags tovalves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

2.6 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws forremovable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extrudedaluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.7 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, inthe sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of thesizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwiseindicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessarybecause of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/16 in. for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 in. length; 1/8 in. for larger units.

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesivewhere screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.8 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanicalidentification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, asrecommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification andoperation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown andspecified, provide identification that indicates individual system number as well asservice (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require insulation,painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior toinstallation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.2 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated toreceive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:

1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in thissection. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

2. In addition to applying pipe markers to applicable piping, the outer surface of all theassociated piping shall be painted the background color as indicated in paragraph Cbelow.

B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view inoccupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels,plenums) and exterior nonconcealed locations.

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark eachpipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enternon-accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealedpiping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 ft. along each piping run, exceptreduce spacing to 25 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spacedmarkers.

C. Piping Identification:

System Background Color Text ColorDomestic Cold Water Safety Green WhiteDomestic Hot Water Safety Orange BlackNatural Gas Safety Yellow Black

3.3 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system;exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture


faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbingfixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures andunits. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

1. Tagging Schedule: Comply with requirements of "Valve Tagging Schedule" at end ofthis section.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if nototherwise indicated, where directed by Engineer.

1. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valveschedule in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to beoperated in conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.

3.4 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or neareach major item of plumbing equipment and each operational device, as specified herein ifnot otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following generalcategories of equipment and operational devices:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units suchas gas outlets.

2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.

3. Natural gas water heaters.

B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 in. for distances up to 6 ft. 0 in., and proportionately largerlettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principallettering.

C. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish betweenmultiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergencyprecautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

1. Operational valves and similar minor equipment items located in non-occupied spaces(including machine rooms) may, at Installer's option, be identified by installation ofplasticize tags in lieu of engraved plastic signs.


A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device, which has become visuallyblocked by work of this division or other divisions.

B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.

3.6 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required,including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system,additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engravingblanks of assorted sizes.


1. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion ofstenciling and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock ofstenciling paints and applicators.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 07 16

SECTION 22 07 16

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of mechanical insulation required by this section is indicated on Drawings andschedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of mechanical insulation specified in this section include the following:

1. Piping System Insulation:a. Fiberglass.

2. Equipment Insulation:a. Fiberglass.b. Flexible Unicellular.

C. Refer to Section 22 05 29 "PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS" for protectionsaddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Section 22 05 53 "PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION" for installation of identificationdevices for piping, ductwork, and equipment; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of mechanicalinsulation products, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactoryuse in similar service for not less than 3 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 5 years successful installation experience onprojects with mechanical insulations similar to that required for this project.

C. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical (insulating material, jackets,coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, andsmoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame-spread index of 75 andsmoke developed index of 150.

2. Exception: Industrial mechanical insulation that will not affect life safety egress ofbuilding may have flame-spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions foreach type of mechanical insulation. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's productnumber, k-value, thickness, and furnished accessories for each mechanical systemrequiring insulation.

B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and replacement material lists for each typeof mechanical insulation. Include this data and product data in maintenance manual.


1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives, and coatings to site in containers withmanufacturer's stamp or label, affixed showing fire hazard indexes of products.

B. Protect insulation against dirt, water, and chemical and mechanical damage. Do not installdamaged or wet insulation; remove from project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of thefollowing:

1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.

2. Babcock & Wilcox; Insulating Products Div.

3. Manson.

4. Knauf Fiber Glass.

5. Johns Manville Products Corp.

6. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corp.

7. Pittsburgh Corning Corp.

8. Rubatex Corp.

9. Thermacor Process, Inc. (CT1 9501)

10. Pabco

11. IMCOA

12. Premier Refractories and Chemicals, Inc.

13. Kingspan Corporation Inc.

14. Unifrax Corporation

2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I (Vapor Barrier) for piping withtemperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type Imay be used for all piping at Installer’s option.

1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastenedas per manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proofconstruction.

C. Staples, Bands, Wires and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer forapplications indicated.


D. Adhesives, Sealers and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturerfor applications indicated.

2.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Fiberglass Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type 1, Class B-4.

B. Flexible Unicellular Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type II.

C. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketingmaterial, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option,except as otherwise indicated.

D. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics andprotective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

1. Encase exterior equipment insulation with aluminum jacket with weatherproofconstruction, as specified.

E. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, cornerangles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applicationsindicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which mechanical insulation is to be installed. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

B. Thickness of insulation shall be as recommended by the manufacturer for the temperaturesand pipe sizes involved, and in accordance with standards of T.I.M.A.

3.2 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on chrome-plated exposed piping (except forhandicapped fixtures), air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, balance cocks, flowregulators, drain lines from water coolers, drainage piping located in crawl spaces ortunnels, buried piping, fire protection piping, and pre-insulated equipment.

B. Cold Piping:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold plumbing piping systems:a. Potable cold water piping.b. Interior horizontal above-ground storm water piping from roof drains.c. Plumbing vents within 6 linear ft. of roof outlet.d. Condensate drains from HVAC units, refrigerated equipment, etc., including traps

and lateral lines concealed above ceilings.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1 in. thickness.


C. Hot Piping:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot plumbing piping systems:a. Potable hot water piping.b. Hot drain piping (where indicated).

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass (Above Ground Only): 1 in. thickness.

3.3 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment:a. Hot water expansion tanks.

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 2 in. thick.b. Flexible Unicellular: 1 in. thick. Do not use for equipment operating above 180°F

(82°C).

3.4 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION

A. General: Install insulation products in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions,and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that insulation serves itsintended purpose.

B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting,testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run ofpiping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not usecut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together toensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to preventpuncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness andcomposition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut orjob fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar pipingpenetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3 in. widevapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vaporbarrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape or band.


I. Do NOT insulate over pipe hangers. If pipe hangers for piping to be insulated are notadequately sized for insulation to pass through the hanger, notify the General Contractorand Architect.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer'swritten instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure thatinsulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints andexcessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent punctureand other damage.

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot.

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction,where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.

F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, trowelled in workmanlike manner,leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges anddepressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness toremove surface irregularities.

G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lapseams at least 2 in. Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.

H. Do not insulate boiler manholes, hand-holes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer'snameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.

I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment that must be openedperiodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames andaccessories.

3.6 EXISTING INSULATION REPAIR

A. Repair damaged sections of existing mechanical insulation, both previously damaged ordamaged during this construction period. Use insulation of same thickness as existinginsulation, install new jacket lapping and sealed over existing.

3.7 PROTECTION AND REPLACEMENT

A. Replace damaged insulation that cannot be repaired satisfactorily, including units withvapor barrier damage and moisture-saturated units.


B. Protection: Insulation Installer shall advise Contractor of required protection for insulationwork during remainder of construction period, to avoid damage and deterioration.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING PIPING 22 10 00

SECTION 22 10 00

PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of Plumbing Piping Work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and byrequirements of this section.

B. Types of Plumbing Piping systems specified in this section include the following:

1. Domestic water system.

2. Miscellaneous Drain Lines

3. Natural gas system.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings.

B. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.

C. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS 300.

D. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.

E. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint DrainageFittings - DWV.

F. ANSI/ASME Sec. 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.

G. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.

H. ANSI/ASTM C443 - Joints for Circular Concrete Sewer and Culvert Pipe, Using RubberGaskets.

I. ANSI/ASTM D2466 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40.

J. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

K. AWS D10.12 - Recommended Practices and Procedures for Welding Plain Carbon SteelPipe.

L. AWS D10.9 - Qualifications and Procedures for Piping and Tubing Welding.

M. AWS B3.0 - Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification.

N. ANSI/AWWA C105 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile Iron Piping for Water and OtherLiquids.


O. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3 in. through 48 in., for Water andOther Liquids.

P. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray-Iron Pressure Pipeand Fittings.

Q. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-LinedMolds, for Water or Other Liquids.

R. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

S. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.

T. ASTM A74 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

U. ASTM A120 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated (Galvanized), Welded andSeamless, for Ordinary Uses.

V. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate andElevated Temperatures.

W. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.

X. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).

Y. ASTM C14 - Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain, and Culvert Pipe.

Z. ASTM C425 - Compression Joints for Vitrified Clay Pipe and Fittings.

AA. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

AB. ASTM C 1540 - Heavy Duty Shielded Hubless Couplings

AC. ASTM D1785 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80 and 120.

AD. ASTM D2235 - Solvent Cement for Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Plastic Pipeand Fittings.

AE. ASTM D2241 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR).

AF. ASTM D2321 - Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and OtherGravity- flow Applications.

AG. ASTM D2513 - Thermoplastic Gas Pressure Pipe, Tubing and Fittings.

AH. ASTM D2665 - Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings.

AI. ASTM D2680 - Acrylonitrile - Butadiene - Styrene (ABS) Composite-Sewer Piping.


AJ. ASTM D2683 - Socket-Type Polyethylene Fittings for Outside Diameter-ControlledPolyethylene Pipe.

AK. ASTM D2751 - Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

AL. ASTM D2855 - Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVS) Pipe andFittings.

AM. ASTM D3033 - Type PSP Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

AN. ASTM D3034 - Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings.

AO. ASTM F477 - Electrometric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.

AP. ASTM F876 - Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing.

AQ. ASTM F877 - Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) plastic hot and cold water distributionsystems.

AR. ASTM F1807 - Specification for metal insert fittings utilizing a copper crimp ring for SDR9Cross-linked Polyethylene (PEX) tubing.

AS. AWS A5.8 - Brazing Filler Metal.

AT. AWWA C601 - Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Waste Water.

AU. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.

AV. CISPI 310 - Couplings for Use with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.

AW. ASTM D2564 - Solvent Cements for Poly (vinyl) (chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings.

AX. NFPA 24 - Installation of private fire service mains and their Appurtenances, latest edition.

AY. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, latest edition.


A. Plumbing Certification: Persons performing plumbing work shall have a current StatePlumbing License.

B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.

C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and AWS 10.12.

D. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec. 9 or AWS D1.1, AWS D10.9,and AWS B3.0, as applicable.

E. Pipe and fittings shall be marked with the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil PipeInstitute or receive prior approval of the engineer.


F. [All adhesives, sealants and sealant primers shall contain low VOC (Volatile OrganicCompounds), as outlined in the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)Rule #1168. The design intent for this project is to obtain LEED Credit 4.1, which requiresthat all adhesives, sealants and sealant primers comply with the SCAQMD Rule #1168.]

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to the most recent editions of the applicable City codes and ordinances and NFPA54.

B. Piping materials specified herein are acceptable products to the Engineer, but all are notnecessarily acceptable to applicable local codes and ordinances. It is the responsibility ofthe Contractor to provide materials, from the options listed herein, that are acceptable toboth the Engineer and applicable local codes and ordinances.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data on pipe materials, fittings, valves and accessories in accordance withDivision 01 and Section 22 00 10.

B. Submit certificates as listed below to Architect in accordance with Division 01 and Section22 00 10.

1. Test Certificates of Approval for Piping Systems.

2. Flushing Certificates of Approval for Piping Systems.

3. Disinfection Certificates of Approval for Domestic Water Piping Systems.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WATER PIPING

A. Water piping, above grade.

1. Copper Tubing: For 4 in. diameter and less, ASTM B88, Type "L", hard drawn. Fittings:ANSI/ASME B16.18, cast brass, or ANSI/ASME B16.22, wrought copper. Joints:ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 95TA.

2. Mechanically pressed copper fittings are acceptable for pipe sizes 1/2 in. through 4 in.diameter. Operating pressure: 200 PSI CWP Max, Temperature range: -20°F to250°F. Fittings shall conform with ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22 or ASME B16.26, andperformance criteria of IAPMO PS-117 or ASME B16.51. Fittings shall utilize a factoryinstalled EPDM sealing element and be listed by NSF 61. The installer shall be trainedand certified by the fitting manufacturer. Copper press fittings shall be installed usingthe proper tool, actuator, jaws and rings as instructed by the press fittingmanufacturer. Acceptable products are Viega ProPress or Mueller IndustriesStreamline PRS.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DRAIN PIPING

A. Condensate Drain Piping:


1. Copper pipe; ASTM B306, DWV fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.3, cast bronze, orAWSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32, solder, Grade 50B.

2. Mechanically pressed copper fittings are acceptable for pipe sizes 1/2 in. through 4 in.diameter. Operating pressure: 200 PSI CWP Max, Temperature range: -20°F to250°F. Fittings shall conform with ASME B16.18, ASME B16.22 or ASME B16.26, andperformance criteria of IAPMO PS-117 or ASME B16.51. Fittings shall utilize a factoryinstalled EPDM sealing element. The installer shall be trained and certified by thefitting manufacturer. Copper press fittings shall be installed using the proper tool,actuator, jaws and rings as instructed by the press fitting manufacturer. Acceptableproducts are Viega ProPress or Mueller Industries Streamline PRS.

2.3 NATURAL GAS PIPING

A. Natural gas piping, above grade.

1. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A120, Schedule 40 black. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3,malleable iron, or ASTM A234, forged steel welding type. Joints: Screwed for pipetwo in. and under; ANSI/AWS D1.1, welded, for pipe over two in.

2.4 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 in. and under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping;bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 2 in.: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flangesfor copper piping; gaskets suitable for intended service – NO ASBESTOS GASKETMATERIAL ALLOWED.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solderend, and water impervious isolation barrier.

2.5 BALL VALVES

A. Ball valves: For water, natural gas, and compressed air shut-off and throttling.

1. Ball valves 2 in. and less: Rated 175 lb. minimum water, oil, air and gas pressure,brass or bronze construction, seat material as recommended by manufacturer formaterial conveying, lever handle, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valvesshall be provided with memory stops (for establishing any setpoint from 0-100% flow).a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Crane 9302, 93222) Jomar T-100-SS3) ITT Grinnell 3500, 3500SJ4) Milwaukee BA-200, BA-2505) Watts B-6000, B-60016) Nibco T-580, & S-500

2.6 PLUG VALVES

A. Plug valves 2 in. and less: Rated 150 lb. minimum gas and air pressure, cast iron body,non-lubricated, resilient plug seal for natural gas, lever handle, threaded or flangedconnections.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:


a. DeZurik PEC

2.7 CHECK VALVES

A. Swing check valves: For water, air, and pumped waste and drain.

1. Check Valves 2 in. and less: MSS SP-80 rated 175 lb. minimum water and airpressure, brass or bronze construction, renewable seat, bronze disc, threaded orsoldered connections.a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Nibco T-4132) Crane 1373) Jomar T/S-5114) Stockham B-3215) Milwaukee 508

2.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. Pressure reducing valves: For water.

1. Pressure Reducing Valve: Rated 175 lb minimum water pressure, brass or bronzeconstruction, adjustable pressure range threaded connections for 2 in. and less orflanged connections for 2-1/2 in. or larger.a. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1) Armstrong2) Watts

2.9 GAS PRESSURE REGULATOR

A. Gas Pressure Regulator: Cast iron body, flanged connections, internal relief valve,adjustable spring range setting. See Drawings for size and pressure setting. Relief ventshall be piped to outside.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers:a. Fisherb. Americanc. Spragued. Rockwell

2.10 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Provide piping specialties in accordance with Section 22 11 19.

2.11 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide supports and anchors in accordance with Section 22 05 29.

2.12 PLUMBING METERS AND GAUGES

A. Provide meters and gauges in accordance with Section 22 05 19.

2.13 PLUMBING INSULATION

A. Provide mechanical insulation in accordance with Section 22 07 16.


2.14 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide mechanical identification of all piping systems and valves in accordance withSection 22 05 53.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

E. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient.

F. Install piping to conserve building space and not interfere with use of space.

G. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall beprotected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the localcode. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in anapproved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-ratedassemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.

H. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

I. Exposed piping, valves, fittings, escutcheons, trim, etc., serving plumbing fixtures infinished areas, shall be polished chromium plated. Exposed piping, valves, fittings,escutcheons, trim, etc., serving plumbing equipment, kitchen equipment, or otherequipment located in finished areas, shall be chrome plated, or when not available withchrome plating, they shall be painted with chromium paint.

J. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, orconnected equipment.

K. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

L. Provide access where valves and equipment are not accessible. Coordinate size andlocation of access doors with applicable Section.

M. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.

N. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories not prefinished, ready for finish painting.

O. Install piping parallel with or at right angles to walls unless otherwise shown on Drawings.


P. Conceal piping above ceilings, in walls or chases etc., unless otherwise shown or noted onDrawings.

Q. Joints in soft copper piping below slab will not be allowed.

R. Soft copper shall not be routed through areas with exposed ceilings except in mechanicalrooms.

S. Bending of rigid piping is not permitted; only ells shall be utilized for a change in direction.

T. Temporarily plug or cap open ends of pipe at the end of each workday.

U. Establish invert elevations for drainage piping. Minimum slopes for drainage are 1/4 in. perfoot for 3 in. diameter and less and 1/8 in. per ft. for 4 in. diameter pipe and greater.

V. Install bell and spigot pipe with bell end upstream.

W. Install vented U-type drain trap on all draw-thru cooling coil drain pans.

X. All sanitary waste stacks and storm drain down spouts 4 in. diameter and larger withvertical drops over 30 ft. 0 in. shall be provided with joint restraint on the horizontal branchor offset below the vertical drop. Threaded joints, grooved joints or a combination of pipeclamps and tie-rods as required in NFPA 24 shall accomplish joint restraint. Thrust blocksshall accomplish joint restraint below ground as required in NFPA 24. Vertical joint restraintshall be provided from the 90° ell at the bottom of the vertical drop through every joint up tothe riser clamp at the floor penetration of the floor above. Horizontal joint restraint shall beprovided from that same 90° ell through every joint on the horizontal branch.

Y. Materials exposed within ducts or plenums (ceiling spaces used as supply or return airplenums) shall have a flame-spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developedrating of not more than 50 when tested in accordance with the test for Surface BurningCharacteristics of Materials, U.B.C. Standard No. 42-1. Do not install any PVC piping inany Return Air Plenums.

Z. Fuel-gas lines and waste cleanouts shall not be located within an air supply plenum.

AA. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers forpiping 2-1/2 in. and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protection saddle, or highcompressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2 in. and less shall be providedwith pipe covering shields. On cold or chilled water piping provide vapor barrier throughhanger.

AB. Domestic water service piping below building shall be provided with both tie-rod and thrustblock restraint in accordance with NFPA 24. Tie-rod restraint shall be provided verticallyfrom the below floor elbow at the base of the riser out to the first hub beyond 5 ft. 0 in. frombuilding. (See NFPA 24-1995 figure A-8-6.2 (b)). Thrust block restraint shall be providedon the below floor elbow at the base of the riser. Area of bearing face of concrete thrustblock shall be 32 sq. ft.

AC. Support vertical piping at every floor.


AD. Gas piping connections to equipment will be rigid pipe with dirt leg and union. Flexible gaswhips will not be allowed.

AE. A pressure reducing valve station shall be furnished and installed on incoming domesticcold water lines with pressure exceeding 80 psi. Furnish valve station with separatestrainer.

3.2 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Threaded Connections

1. Threaded joints shall be in accordance with ANSI B1.20.1. Threaded joints shall bemade up Teflon tape or lead free pipe joint compound applied to the male thread only. Should a joint be loosened after being made up, it shall not be made up a second timeunless the threads are cleaned and new compound applied.

2. All steel piping which is assembled with screwed joints shall have exposed threadsthoroughly primed with a coat of lead free rust resistant paint. Paint immediately afterinstallation. This shall apply to both piping that is to be covered as well as uncovered.

B. Soldered Connections

1. Soldered joints shall be in accordance with ASTM B32. Flux shall be nonacid type. Remove composition discs from solder end valves during soldering. Pipe ends,fittings and valves shall be properly cleaned before soldering and wiped clean toremove flux and excess solder after soldering.

C. Welded Connections

1. Welded joints shall be in accordance with AWS D10.12-79. The oxyacetylene orelectric process shall make all joints.

2. Nipples or half couplings welded into the mains will not be accepted. Welded branchconnections shall be used to tap mains only where the mains are at least two pipesizes larger than the branch.

3. All openings cut into pipe for welded outlets shall be accurately made, to give matchedintersections. For welded branch outlet fittings, the opening shall be cut before thefittings welded.

4. Long radius type ells shall be on all bends in welded pipelines. No field fabricated orfactory segmentally fabricated fittings shall be allowed.

5. Welds on piping shall be cleaned and primed with corrosion resistant paint beforeinsulation is applied or installation is complete.

D. Copper Press Connections:

1. Mechanical copper press fittings shall be made in strict accordance with themanufacturer's installation instructions.a. The tubing shall be fully inserted into the fitting and the tubing marked at the

shoulder of the fitting. The fitting alignment shall be checked against the mark onthe tubing to assure the tubing is fully engaged (inserted) in the fitting. The jointsshall be pressed using the tool(s) approved by the manufacturer.


3.3 FLANGES AND UNIONS

A. Provide flanges and unions at all final connections to equipment, and traps. Arrange pipingand piping connections so that equipment being served may be serviced or totally removedwithout disturbing piping beyond final connections and associated shut-off valves.

B. All flanged connections shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.5 for steel flanges and ANSIB16.1 for cast iron flanges.

C. Bolting shall be in accordance with ASTM A307 Grade B with bolts and nuts in accordancewith ANSI B18.2.1 and ANSI B18.2.2.

D. Tighten flange bolts in sequence 180° directly opposite each to equal tension.

E. Flanges and unions shall be made of same material or compatible material as pipingsystems in which they are installed.

3.4 VALVES

A. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not below horizontal.

B. Horizontal swing check valves shall be installed in a true horizontal position. Vertical liftcheck valves shall be installed in a true vertical position.

C. Install ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, parts of systems, or vertical risers.

D. Install ball valves for throttling, bypass or manual flow control services.

E. Throttling or balancing valves shall be provided with memory stops.

3.5 PRESSURE REDUCING OR REGULATING VALVES

A. Pressure reducing or regulating valves shall be provided with pressure gauges on inlet andoutlet side of valve.

B. Adjust pressure reducing or regulating valves for proper outlet pressure and provide valvetag attached to valve body indicating required pressure setting.

C. Gas pressure regulators shall be vented full size or minimum 1/2 in. diameter separately tothe outside of the building. Vent outlet shall be a brass 90° cell turned down and coveredwith brass screen secured to ell with brass wire.

D. Provide shut-off valve ahead of each pressure reducing or regulating valve.

3.6 TESTING

A. General: Furnish pumps, gauges, equipment and personnel required, and test asnecessary to demonstrate the integrity of the finished installation.


B. Water Lines: Hydrostatically test and make tight at 150 psi. Retain for four hours. Repairall leaking joints and retest.

C. Natural Gas: Pneumatically test and make tight at 1-1/2 times the normal operatingpressure and not less than 5 psi. Retain for four hours. Repair all leaking joints and retest.

D. Tests and test procedures shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

E. After completion and approval of testing, submit "Test Certificates of Approval" for Waterand Drain piping systems stating that all test results are satisfactory. Certificates ofapproval must be signed by Contractor and Engineer.

3.7 FLUSHING

A. General: After piping systems have been tested and approved, systems shall be flushed. Furnish compressors, pumps, equipment, personnel, etc. required to flush piping systems.

B. Water Lines: Flush piping with water until water flows clear for a minimum of 60 secondsper 100 linear ft. of piping being flushed at a velocity of 9 ft. per second.

C. Natural Gas, and Compressed Air: Flush piping with air until air flows clear for a minimumof 60 seconds per 100 linear ft. of piping being flushed at 25 CFM per 1 in. diameter ofpipe.

D. All strainers and filters shall be cleaned and replaced prior to start-up.

E. Flushing and flushing procedures shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

F. After completion and approval of flushing, submit "Flushing Certificates of Approval" forwater and natural gas piping systems stating that all flushing results are satisfactory. Certificates of approval must be signed by Contractor and Engineer.

3.8 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

B. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system toobtain 50-to 80 mg/L residual.

C. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum5 remote outlets.

D. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

E. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

F. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

G. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 5 remote outlets and from waterentry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C601.


H. Disinfection and disinfection procedures shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

I. After disinfection is completed, submit "Disinfection Certificate of Approval" for domesticwater piping systems to the Engineer stating that all test results are satisfactory. Certificateof Approval must be signed by Contractor and Engineer. Certificate shall show the date,time and residual of each of the following tests:

1. Initial disinfection residual (50 PPM minimum) - 5 samples.

2. Final disinfection residual (25 PPM minimum) - 5 samples.

3. After flushing residual (5 PPM maximum) - 5 samples.

4. Analyze in accordance AWWA C601 - 5 samples.

3.9 CLOSING IN UNINSPECTED WORK

A. Do not cover up or enclose work until it has been properly and completely inspected andapproved. Should any of the work be covered up or enclosed prior to all requiredinspections and approvals, uncover the work as required. After it has been completelyinspected and approved, make all repairs and replacements as necessary to thesatisfaction of the Engineer and Owner's Representative. Repairs and replacements shallbe at no additional cost to the Owner.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING SPECIALTIES 22 10 01

SECTION 22 10 01

PLUMBING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION OF WORK

A. Extent of Plumbing Specialties Work required by this section is indicated on Drawings andby requirements of this section.

B. Types of Plumbing Specialties specified in this section include the following:

1. Backflow preventers.

2. Vacuum breakers.

3. Water hammer arrestors.

4. Dirt legs.

5. Expansion tanks

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASSE 1015 - Backflow Preventers, Double Check Principle.

B. ANSI/ASSE 1011 - Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers.

C. ANSI/ASSE 1013 - Backflow Preventers, Reduced Pressure Principle.

D. ANSI/ASSE 1019 - Wall Hydrants, Frost Proof Automatic Draining Anti-Backflow Types.

E. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains and Area Drains.

F. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.

G. ANSI A112.26.1 - Water Hammer Arresters.

H. PDI WH-201 Water Hammer Arresters.

I. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, latest edition.


A. Conformance with applicable state and local codes and ordinances.

B. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturerthroughout.

C. Plumbing Certification: Persons performing plumbing work shall have a current StatePlumbing License.



A. Conform to applicable City codes and ordinances and NFPA 54.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data in accordance with Division 01 and Section 23 00 10.

B. Include component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

C. Submit Certificates as listed below to Engineer in accordance with Division 01 and Section23 00 10.

1. Certificate of Approval - First Heat Tracing System Megohmeter Test.

2. Certificate of Approval - Second Heat Tracing System Megohmeter Test.

3. Certificates of Approval - Backflow Preventers.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Reduced Pressure

1. Reduced pressure backflow preventer 2 in. and smaller: ANSI/ASSE 1013; completeunit of two independently acting check valves together with an automatically operatingpressure relief valve, two ball valves, strainer, and four test cocks, bronze or iron bodywith bronze internal parts, 150 psi working pressure, and shall comply with AWWAStandard C506.a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Apollo RP 4A2) Watts 0093) Wilkins 975XLMS4) Hersey FRP-II5) Febco 825Y

B. Backflow Preventer Test Kits

1. Reduced Pressure Principle Test Kit: Gauge test valves, hoses, adaptors, securingstrap, instruction guide and lightweight case.a. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model:

1) Apollo 40-200-TK5U2) Watts TK-9-A

2.2 VACUUM BREAKER

A. Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers

1. Atmospheric type vacuum breaker (AVB): ASSE 1001, ANSI 112.1.1; brass body andinternal parts, silicone rubber disc, polished chrome plated finish, and threadedconnections.a. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model:

1) Watts 288A


B. Pressure Vacuum Breakers

1. Pressure type vacuum breaker (PVB): ASSE 1020; 150 psi rated, brass or stainlesssteel construction, silicone rubber disc, ball valve shut-offs, test cocks, and threadedconnections. Chrome plated when exposed in finished areas.a. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model:

1) Watts 800

2.3 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS

A. Water Hammer Arrestors (WHA): ANSI A112.26.1, ASSE 1010, and PDI WH-201;permanently sealed expanding chamber type or bellows type. Sizing symbols indicated onDrawings refer to Plumbing and Drainage Institute “Standard PDI-WH201” establishedstandard classifications. Air chambers are not allowed.

1. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:a. Expanding Chamber Type

1) PPP “SC” Series2) Sioux Chief "Hydra-Rester" Series3) Watts Series 15

b. Bellows Type1) Josam 75000-S2) J.R. Smith 50003) Tyler/Wade "SHOKSTOP" Series4) Watts Series 150A5) Zurn Z-1700

2.4 DIRT LEGS

A. Dirt Legs: At each gas connection to apiece of mechanical or plumbing equipment, furnishand install a dirt leg (full size of run out), a 100% shut-off plug valve and union. Do not useflexible gas whips for final connections to equipment.

2.5 EXPANSION TANKS

A. Expansion Tanks: Factory fabricated expansion tanks shall be furnished with eachstorage-type water heater. Water heaters with 200,000 BTU and larger input capacities orlarger than 119 gallons storage shall be furnished with ASME coded expansion tanks.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate cutting of roof construction to receive drains to required invert elevations.

3.2 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION

A. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to permit intendedperformance.

B. Relief valve discharge drain from reduced pressure backflow preventers shall be piped fulloutlet size down to nearest floor drain. Drain line shall terminate above floor drain with airgap.


C. One backflow preventer test kit shall be provided for each type of backflow preventer(Reduced Pressure Principle or Double Check Principle) provided by the ContractDocuments.

3.3 TESTING

A. Backflow preventers shall be tested for proper operation by the backflow preventerManufacturer's Representative. The test shall be performed prior to initial start-up.Manufacturer's Representative shall submit certificates of approval to the Engineer.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 11 19

SECTION 22 11 19

PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of piping specialties work required by this section is indicated on Drawings andschedules and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of piping specialties specified in this section include the following:

1. Pipe Escutcheons.

2. Pipeline Strainers.

3. Dielectric Unions.

4. Mechanical Penetration Seals.

5. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals.

6. Drip Pans.

7. Pipe Sleeves.

8. Penetration Seals.

C. Piping specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, are specified as part ofequipment assembly in other Division 22 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialtiesof types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar servicefor not less than 5 years.


1. FCI Compliance: Test and rate "Y" type strainers in accordance with FCI 73-1"Pressure Rating Standard for "Y" Type Strainers". Test and rate other type strainersin accordance with FCI 78-1 "Pressure Rating Standard for Pipeline Strainers Otherthan "Y" Type".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installationinstructions, and dimensioned Drawings for each type of manufactured piping specialty.Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type and size of pipeline strainer. Submitschedule showing manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for eachrequired piping specialty.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabricated specialties, indicating details of fabrication,materials, and method of support.


C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type ofmanufactured piping specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop Drawings inmaintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Provide factory-fabricated piping specialties recommended by manufacturer foruse in service indicated. Provide piping specialties of types and pressure ratings indicatedfor each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined by Installer tocomply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, and connections, whichproperly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Where more than one type isindicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. General: Provide pipe escutcheons as specified herein with inside diameter tightly fittingpipe outside diameter, or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is insulated. Select outsidediameter of escutcheon to completely cover pipe penetration hole in floors, walls, orceilings; and pipe sleeve extension, if any. Furnish pipe escutcheons with nickel or chromefinish for occupied areas, prime paint finish for unoccupied areas.

B. Pipe Escutcheons for Moist Areas: Exterior use and interior use including mechanicalrooms and any room with water or floor type drains. For waterproof floors, and areaswhere water and condensation can be expected to accumulate, provide cast brass or sheetbrass escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

C. Pipe Escutcheons for Dry Areas: Provide sheet steel escutcheons, solid or split hinged.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pipe escutcheons of oneof the following or approved equal:

1. Chicago Specialty Mfg. Co.

2. Producers Specialty & Mfg. Corp.

3. Sanitary-Dash Mfg. Co.

2.3 LOW PRESSURE Y-TYPE PIPELINE STRAINERS

A. General: Provide strainers full line size of connecting piping, with ends matching pipingsystem materials. Select strainers for 125 psi working pressure, with Type 304 stainlesssteel screens, with 3/64 in. perforations @ 233 per sq. in.

B. Threaded Ends, 2 in. and Smaller: Cast-iron body, screwed screen retainer with centeredblow down fitted with pipe plug.

C. Threaded Ends, 2+ in. and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-centerblow down fitted with pipe plug.

D. Flanged Ends, 2+ in. and Larger: Cast-iron body, bolted screen retainer with off-centerblow down fitted with pipe plug.


E. Butt Welded Ends, 2+ in. and Larger: Schedule 40 cast carbon steel body, bolted screenretainer with off-center blow down fitted with pipe plug.

F. Grooved Ends, 2+ in. and Larger: Tee pattern, ductile-iron or malleable-iron body andaccess end cap, access coupling with EDPM gasket.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide low pressure Y-typestrainers of one of the following or approved equal:

1. Armstrong Machine Works.

2. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

3. Metraflex Co.

4. R-P&C Valve; Div. White Consolidated Industries, Inc.

5. Spirax Sarco.

6. Trane Co.

7. Victaulic Co. of America.


2.4 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. General: Provide standard products recommended by manufacturer for use in serviceindicated, which effectively isolate ferrous from non-ferrous piping (electrical conductance),prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dielectric unions of one ofthe following or approved equal:

1. B & K Industries, Inc.

2. Capital Mfg. Co.; Div. of Harsco Corp.

3. Eclipse, Inc.

4. Epco Sales, Inc.

5. Perfection Corp.

6. Rockford-Eclipse Div.

2.5 PENETRATION SEALS

A. Caulked Seals: Provide seals for penetrations through interior walls of one of the following:

1. Mineral Wool or Oakum: Caulked watertight between sleeve and pipe.

B. Mechanical Seals:

1. General: Modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber linksshaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve, connected withbolts and pressure plates which cause rubber sealing elements to expand whentightened, providing watertight seal and electrical insulation.


2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical sleeveseals of one of the following or approved equal.a. Thunderline Corp.

C. Fire Barrier Seals:

1. Provide seals for any opening through smoke or fire-rated walls, and all above gradefloors, used as passage for mechanical components such as piping or ductwork.

2. Cracks, Voids, or Holes Up to 4 in. Diameter: Use putty or caulking, one-pieceintumescent elastomer, non-corrosive to metal, compatible with synthetic cablejackets, and capable of expanding 10 times when exposed to flame or heat, UL-listed.

3. Openings 4 in. or Greater: Use sealing system capable of passing 3-hour fire test inaccordance with ASTM E-814, consisting of wall wrap or liner, partitions, and end capscapable of expanding when exposed to temperatures of 250 to 350°F UL-listed.

4. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire barrierpenetration seals of one of the following or approved equal.a. Electro Products Div./3M.b. Nelson; Unit of General Signal.

2.6 DRIP PANS

A. General: Provide drip pans fabricated from 20 gauge corrosion-resistant sheet metal withwatertight joints, and with edges turned up 2+ in. Reinforce top, either by structural anglesor by rolling top over 1/8 in. steel rod. Provide hole, gasket, and flange at low point forwatertight joint and 1 in. drain line connection.

2.7 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide pipe sleeves of one of the following:

1. Sheet-Metal: Fabricate from galvanized sheet metal; round tube closed with snap lockjoint, welded spiral seams, or welded longitudinal joint. Fabricate from the followinggauges: 3 in. and smaller, 20 gauge; 4 in. to 6 in. 16 gauge; over 6 in., 14 gauge.

2. Steel-Pipe: Fabricate from Schedule 10 (minimum) steel pipe; remove burrs.

3. Floor sleeves shall be provided with water stop around perimeter of sleeve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Escutcheons: Install pipe escutcheons on each pipe penetration through floors, walls,partitions, and ceilings where penetration is exposed to view; and on exterior of building.Secure escutcheon to pipe or insulation so escutcheon covers penetration hole, and is flushwith adjoining surface.

B. Y-Type Strainers: Install Y-type strainers full size of pipeline, in accordance withmanufacturer's installation instructions. Install pipe nipple and shutoff valve in strainer blowdown connection, full size of connection, except for strainers 2 in. and smaller installedahead of control valves feeding individual terminals. Where indicated, provide drain linefrom shutoff valve to plumbing drain, full size of blow down connection.


1. Locate Y-type strainers in supply line ahead of the following equipment, and elsewhereas indicated, if integral strainer is not included in equipment:a. Pumps.b. Steam traps serving steam main drips.c. Temperature control valves.d. Pressure reducing valves.e. Temperature or pressure regulating valves.

C. Dielectric Unions: Install at each piping joint between ferrous and non-ferrous piping.Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Mechanical Penetration Seals: Loosely assemble rubber links around pipe with bolts andpressure plates located under each bolt head and nut. Push into sleeve and center. Tighten bolts until links have expanded to form watertight seal.

E. Fire Barrier Penetration Seals: Fill opening with sealing compound. Adhere tomanufacturer's installation instructions.

F. Drip Pans: Locate drip pans under piping passing over or within 3 ft. horizontally ofelectrical equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Hang from structure with rods andbuilding attachments, weld rods to sides of drip pan. Brace to prevent sagging or swaying. Connect 1 in. drain line to drain connection, and run to nearest plumbing drain or elsewhereas indicated.

G. Pipe Penetrations: Sleeve new construction or core drill existing construction pipepenetrations as specified below where piping passes through walls, floors, and roofs. Donot penetrate structural members, except as detailed on Drawings, or as reviewed byEngineer. Install penetrations accurately centered on pipe runs. Size penetrations so thatpiping and insulation (if any) will have free movement in sleeve, including allowance forthermal expansion; but not less than two pipe sizes larger than piping run. Whereinsulation includes vapor-barrier jacket, provide penetration with sufficient clearance forinstallation. When sleeves are required, install length of sleeve equal to thickness ofconstruction penetrated, and finish flush to surface; except floor sleeves. Extend floorsleeves two inches above finished floor. Provide temporary support of sleeves duringplacement of concrete and other work around sleeves, and provide temporary closure toprevent concrete and other materials from entering sleeve. Pipe penetrations shall be asfollows:

1. Existing Floors Above Grade: Provide core-drilled penetrations for all piping.

2. New and Existing Walls: Provide sleeved or core drilled penetrations for all piping.

3. Roof penetrations through metal roofs by the Plumbing or Mechanical Contractor willbe required to have written approval by the Roofing Contractor.

H. Pipe Sleeves: Install in accordance with the following:

1. Install sheet metal on steel pipe sleeves in interior walls.

2. Install steel pipe sleeves in interior floors above grade.

3. Install galvanized steel pipe sleeves in floors on grade and in exterior walls abovegrade and below grade.

I. Penetration Seals:


1. Install mineral wool/oakum seals as follows:a. In interior walls where piping passes from one space to another, where any one

of the spaces the piping penetration is not concealed by a ceiling. Caulkpenetration watertight.

2. Install mechanical seals in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations asfollows:a. In interior floors on grade.b. In interior floors above grade, use three-hour fire rated type only.c. In exterior walls above grade and below grade.d. In all roof penetrations except vent piping, flue piping, roof or overflow drain

piping or any other piping as otherwise detailed on Drawing.

3. Install fire barrier seals in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations asfollows:a. In all floors above grade, roofs and fire rated walls.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 22 30 00

SECTION 22 30 00

PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of Plumbing Equipment Work required by this section is indicated on Drawings andSchedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of Plumbing Equipment specified in this section include the following:

1. Domestic water heaters and accessories.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels.

B. ANSI/NFPA 30 - Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code, latest edition.

C. ANSI/NFPA 31 - Installation of Oil Burning Equipment, latest edition.

D. ANSI/NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code, latest edition.

E. ANSI/NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gas Code, latest edition.

F. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, latest edition.

G. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water heaters.

H. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water heaters.


A. Plumbing Certification: Persons performing plumbing work shall have a current StatePlumbing license.

B. Ensure products and installation of specified products are in conformance withrecommendations and requirements of the following organizations:

1. Canadian Standards Association (CSA).

2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).

3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).

4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).

5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).

6. Underwriters Laboratories (UL).


C. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding andcavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation; operate within 25 percentof midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

D. Inspection and certification of water heaters rated 200,000 BTU/HR or over is by Department of Labor and Standards, Boiler Division. Contractor shall have heatersinspected before Owner acceptance of facility and provide the inspection certificatemounted and framed under glass adjacent to the heater.


A. Conform to applicable City codes and ordinances.

B. Conform to CSA and UL requirements for water heaters.

C. Conform to ANSI/ASME Section 8D for manufacture of pressure vessels for heatexchangers.

D. Conform to the Texas Department of Labor and Standards; Boiler Division for waterheaters rated over 200,000 BTUH.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 0010.

B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections toother equipment and piping.

C. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,tapings, and drains.

D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions of all equipment and accessories inaccordance with Division 01 and Section 22 00 10.

E. Submit certificates as listed below to Engineer in accordance with Division 01 and Section22 00 10.

1. ASME Coded Tank Certificate - Pressure Vessels.

2. Test Certificates of Approval for plumbing equipment.

3. Demonstration Certificates of Completion for all plumbing equipment.

1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Division 01 and Section 22 0010.

B. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers andavailability, and service depot location and telephone number.


C. Include operation, maintenance, and inspection requirements as required by the TexasDepartment of Labor and Standards, Boiler Division.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer's non-prorated warranty for domestic water heaters inaccordance with Division 01 and Section 22 00 10.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS AND ACCESSORIES

A. Gas Water Heaters (Direct Fired)

1. Domestic water heater: ASHRAE 90.1-2013 energy efficient, standard or lowboyheight vertical natural gas type, interior-lined tank, anode protection, drain valve, safetyrelief valve, high-temperature cut-off, individual thermostats, insulated tank, and ULand AGA approved.a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) State SSV Series2) AO Smith GCRL Series3) Rheem (30-50 gal.)21V4) Rheem (75-100 gal.)295) Lochinvar ET or ES Series

2.2 WATER HEATING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES:

A. Expansion Tank for Water Heater: Bladder type, full acceptance, fabricated steel shellconstructed and stamped per ASME VIII, heavy duty butyl FDA approved removablebladder, 125 psig working pressure, 240°F operating temperature. Tank head shall begalvanized. Pre-charge tank to static pressure of system.

1. Acceptable Manufacturer and Model:a. Elbi DTS Seriesb. Amtrol STC Seriesc. Watts DET Seriesd. Taco CA Series


A. Provide piping specialties in accordance with Section 22 11 19.

2.4 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

A. Provide supports and anchors in accordance with Section 22 05 29.

2.5 PLUMBING METERS AND GAUGES

A. Provide meters and gauges in accordance with Section 22 05 19.


2.6 PLUMBING INSULATION

A. Provide mechanical insulation in accordance with Section 22 07 16.

2.7 PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION

A. Provide mechanical identification of all equipment in accordance with Section 22 05 53.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing equipment and accessories in accordance with manufacturer'srecommendations.

B. Coordinate with heating hot water, electrical work, and gas venting to achieve operationalsystem.

C. Pipe relief valves and drains to nearest floor drain. Provide 1 in. air gap.

D. Install plumbing equipment plumb and square to wall on a 4 in. thick reinforced concretehousekeeping pad.

E. Provide all interconnecting electrical power and control wiring from control panel toequipment and accessories for a complete operable system. All exposed wiring shall be inconduit.

F. Secure control panels and float switches to walls and brackets for proper operation.

G. Coordinate exact location of water heater to insure all required clearances are maintained.

3.2 TESTING

A. Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative shall test water heaters including allassociated accessories and controls to ensure proper operation.

B. Contractor shall test water heaters including all associated accessories and controls toensure proper operation.

C. Tests shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

D. After completion and approval of testing, submit "Test Certificate of Approval" for waterheaters including all associated accessories and controls stating that all test results aresatisfactory. Certificates of Approval must be signed by the Contractor and Engineer.

3.3 DEMONSTRATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Prior to final acceptance, Contractor and Manufacturer's Representative of Domestic WaterHeaters, each shall provide a minimum of 4 hours (or as long as required by the Owner) todemonstrate to the Owner the proper operation of the equipment.


B. After completion and approval of demonstrations, submit "Demonstration Certificate ofCompletion" for domestic water heaters including all associated accessories and controlsstating that the demonstration of all equipment is satisfactory. Certificates must be signedby the Manufacturer's Representative, Contractor, and Engineer.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 23 00 10

SECTION 23 00 10

BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations, and includesrequirements common to all sections of Division 23. It expands and supplements therequirements specified in Sections of Division 01.

1.2 CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS

A. All work shall conform to all applicable provisions of all local, state and national authoritieshaving lawful jurisdiction over the work.

B. Standards shall include those of the National Fire Protection Association, Underwriter’sLaboratories, International Plumbing, Mechanical and Fire Codes, International EnergyCode and Supplements, National Electric Code, standards of local Public Utilities, andsimilar authorities.

C. The above requirement shall include the Mechanical, Plumbing and Fire Codes andOrdinances of all authorities having jurisdiction in effect as of the date of the Contractdocuments.

D. All equipment provided and all installation methods shall meet all applicable requirementsof the Fort Worth Energy Code and all supplements.

E. Code-required features shall be incorporated into the finished work, whether specificallyshown on the Drawings or not, and with costs included in the bid.

F. Bidders shall promptly notify the Engineer of any ambiguity, inconsistency, error, or possiblecode violation that may become apparent during the bid period. The Engineer will provide awritten interpretation.

G. Verbal interpretations will not be considered as binding.

1.3 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Install equipment, materials and piping systems to provide required access for servicing,maintenance, and general inspection. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipmentand devices requiring access with final location of required access panels and doors. Allowample space for removal of all parts that require replacement or servicing. Piping systemsshall not block service access of any nature, such as filter removal, equipment accesspanels, cleaning of tubes, and similar items.

B. Requirements for access panel sizing or distance from provided access panel shall be asfollows:

1. Minimum of 16 in. x 16 in. size when the item requiring access is less than 18 in.(radius) from center of access panel.


2. Minimum of 24 in. x 24 in. size when the item requiring access is less than 5 ft. 0 in.and greater than 18 in. (radius) from center of access panel.

3. Minimum of 36 in. x 24 in. size when the item requiring access is greater than 5ft. 0 in.from center.

C. Locations: Provide access panels and/or doors for the following equipment, and in otherlocations as may be noted on the plans, or specified:

Fire/Smoke Dampers Fire DampersControl Dampers Smoke DampersManual Valves Control ValvesStrainers Drain ValvesUnions Heat Trace Cable Junction BoxesFlow Switches Air Terminal UnitsPressure-Reducing Valves Fire Protection Aux. DrainsTrap Primers

D. Extend all grease fittings to an accessible location.

E. Unions and similar fittings shall not be concealed within permanent walls, or any otherinaccessible location.

F. Provide access doors in accordance with requirements of Division 08.

1.4 ROUGH-IN

A. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of theactual equipment to be connected.

B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 02 through 26 for rough-in requirements.

1.5 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other buildingcomponents.

B. Verify all dimensions by field measurements.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components to allow formechanical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in poured inplace concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

E. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall beprotected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the localcode. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in anapproved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-ratedassemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.


F. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipmentfor efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiringpositioning prior to closing-in the building.

G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate theinstallation of mechanical equipment and materials.

H. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical services andoverhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

I. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or replacement ofequipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease ofdisconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations.

J. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment above ceilings withsuspension system, light fixtures, and other installations.

K. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overheadutilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchisedservice companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for eachservice.

L. All materials, equipment and apparatus installed on the project shall be installed in strictaccordance with the manufacturer’s printed instructions. Where specifically noted, themanufacturer, or his authorized representative, shall certify, in writing, to the Owner andEngineer, that the installation has been made in accordance with such printedrequirements.

M. Roof Penetrations:

1. Provide special pre-fabricated penetration-type fittings for all pipes, ducts, flue pipes,etc. which pass through the roof. Such pre-fabricated fittings shall be asmanufactured by Thycurb, or approved equal.

2. Roof penetrations through metal roofs by the Plumbing or Mechanical Contractor willbe required to have written approval by the Roofing Contractor.

3. All such fittings shall be properly flashed and counter flashed to conform to therequirements of the roofing system, or as may be approved in writing by the Engineer.

4. No roof openings shall be left open overnight, but shall be provided with temporarycovers until the installation is completed, and water tightness assured.

5. Pitch pockets are not acceptable.

N. Pipe runs exposed on the roof shall be supported as described in Section 23 05 29 of thesespecifications.

1.6 MECHANICAL COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Prepare and submit a set of coordination Drawings showing major elements, components,and systems of mechanical equipment and materials in relationship with other buildingcomponents. Prepare Drawings to an accurate scale of 1/4 in. = 1 ft. 0 in. or larger. Indicate the locations of all equipment and materials, including clearances for installing and


maintaining insulation, servicing and maintaining equipment, valve stem movement, andsimilar requirements. Indicate movement and positioning of large equipment into thebuilding during construction.

B. Prepare floor plans, reflected ceiling plans, elevations, sections, and details to conclusivelycoordinate and integrate all installations. Indicate locations where space is limited, andwhere sequencing and coordination of installations are of importance to the efficient flow ofthe Work, including (but not necessarily limited to) the following:

1. Mechanical equipment room layouts.

2. Specific equipment installations, including:a. Condensers.b. Boilers.c. Pumps and compressors.d. Tanks and heat exchangers.e. Air handling units.

3. Work in pipe spaces, chases, trenches, and tunnels.

4. Exterior wall penetrations.

5. Ceiling plenums which contain piping, ductwork, or equipment in congestedarrangement.

6. Installations in mechanical riser shafts, at typical sections and crucial offsets andjunctures.

7. Numbered valve location diagrams.

8. Manifold piping for multiple equipment units.

9. Smoke pipes and breechings at stacks.

C. Precedence:

1. In general, piping systems that have a stated grade for proper operation shall haveprecedence over other systems.

2. Precedence for pipe and duct systems shall be as follows:a. Building linesb. Structural membersc. Soil and drain pipingd. Vent pipinge. Steam pipingf. Condensate pipingg. Refrigerant pipingh. Electrical bus ducti. Supply ductworkj. Return ductworkk. Exhaust ductworkl. Chilled water and heating water pipingm. Automatic Fire Protection Sprinkler Pipingn. Natural gas pipingo. Domestic hot and cold water pipingp. Electrical conduit

NOTE: Lighting fixtures shall have precedence over air grilles and diffusers.



A. This Article specifies the cutting and patching of mechanical equipment, components, andmaterials to include removal and legal disposal of selected materials, components, andequipment.

B. Refer to the Division 01 Section: "EXECUTION" for general requirements for cutting andpatching.

C. Refer to Division 26 Sections for requirements for cutting and patching for installation ofelectrical equipment, components, and materials.

D. Do not endanger or damage installed Work through procedures and processes of cuttingand patching. NO STRUCTURAL MEMBER MAY BE CUT WITHOUT THE WRITTENAPPROVAL OF THE ENGINEER.

E. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work, because of damage caused as a resultof mechanical installations.

F. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching Work that isnecessitated by ill-timed, defective, or non-conforming installations.

G. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work;

2. Remove and replace defective Work;

3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the ContractDocuments;

4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing;

5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures;

6. Upon written instructions from the Engineer, uncover and restore Work to provide forEngineer observation of concealed Work.

H. Refer to Section 23 05 06 "Mechanical Demolition" found elsewhere in these specifications.Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, andmaterials as indicated, including, but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heatingunits, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the newWork. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated orscheduled to be removed.

I. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spreadof dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

J. Locate, identify, and protect mechanical and electrical services passing through remodelingor demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained operational. Whentransit services must be interrupted, provide temporary services for the affected areas andnotify the Owner prior to changeover.


1.8 MECHANICAL SUBMITTALS

A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and Division 01Section: "SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES" for submittal definitions,requirements, and procedures.

B. Submittal of Shop Drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only whensubmitted by The Contractor. Data submitted from Subcontractors and material suppliersdirectly to the Engineer will not be processed.

C. Submit Shop Drawings, product data, and samples on items indicated in the individualsections.

D. Shop Drawings and submittal data shall not be used as requests or proposals for alternateequipment or materials. Refer to Item "Product Options and Substitutions" elsewhere inthis section.

E. THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION: All Packaged equipment shall be independently ThirdParty labeled as a system for its intended use by a Nationally Recognized TestingLaboratory (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulations 29CFR1910.303 and.399, as well as NFPA Pamphlet #70, National Electric Code (NEC), Article 90-7.

1.9 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Refer to the Instructions to Bidders and the Division 01 Section "PRODUCTS ANDSUBSTITUTION" for requirements in selecting products and requesting substitutions.

B. Standards for Materials:

1. These specifications indicate a standard for all materials incorporated into the work,with manufacturer's names and catalog numbers used to establish a grade and qualityof materials and equipment. The manufacturer listed on the equipment schedules, ornamed first in the specifications, is the one on whose equipment the layout is based. Other named manufacturers must meet the indicated performance and spacerequirements.

2. The "approved equal" clause used in these specifications is to permit the proposal ofunnamed manufacturer's products for the work, and the Engineer's decisionconcerning equal products is final.

3. Considerations as to determination of equal products include, but are not limited to,the following:

Materials Physical sizeWorkmanship WeightGauges of Materials AppearanceAvailable Local Service Personnel PerformancePrevious successful installations CapacityDelivery Schedules Required Equipment Clearances

C. Requests for substitutions for equipment, materials and apparatus listed in Division 23Sections must be submitted in writing a MINIMUM OF 10 DAYS prior to the scheduled biddate. Such requests must be accompanied by complete data to permit proper evaluation.


D. BIDS SHALL NOT BE BASED ON UN-APPROVED MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT, ORAPPARATUS. UNAPPROVED MATERIAL, EQUIPMENT OR APPARATUS WILL NOT BEACCEPTED.

E. Should electrical, water, drain, natural gas, structural support, or other similar requirementsfor alternate equipment, whether named in the specifications or approved as a substitution,be different from requirements for the products used in laying out the project, such changesshall be the responsibility of the Contractor, and shall not result in extra charges to theOwner or Engineer.

1.10 PRODUCTS

A. When two or more items of same material or equipment are required (plumbing fixtures,pumps, valves, air conditioning units, etc.) they shall be of the same manufacturer. Productmanufacturer uniformity does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, pipe, tube, fittings(except flanged and grooved types), sheet metal, wire, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder,fasteners, motors for dissimilar equipment units, and similar items used in work, except asotherwise indicated.

B. Provide products that are compatible within systems and other connected items.

1.11 NAMEPLATE DATA

A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power operatedmechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, model number, serialnumber, capacity, operating and power characteristics, labels of approval agencies (U/L,PDI, ARI, NFPA, etc.) and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in an accessiblelocation.

1.12 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, types, grades,compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct identifications; adequatelypackaged and protected to prevent damage during shipment, storage, and handling.

B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off-site storage is authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage.

C. Coordinate deliveries of mechanical materials and equipment to minimize construction sitecongestion. Limit each shipment of materials and equipment to the items and quantitiesneeded for the smooth and efficient flow of installations.

1.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES" for requirements. Thefollowing paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 01.

B. Mark Drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location both exteriorand interior; including locations of coils, dampers and other control devices, filters, boxes,and similar units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,dimensioned for column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping;concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; mains and branches of piping


systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located,and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansioncompensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.

C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders; actual equipmentand materials used.

1.14 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES" for procedures andrequirements for preparation and submittal of maintenance manuals.

B. In addition to the information required by Division 01 for Maintenance Data, include thefollowing information:

1. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations, performancecurves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercialnumbers of all replaceable parts.

2. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, routine andnormal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergencyinstructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

3. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting;disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

4. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules.

5. Maintenance brochures shall be clearly marked to indicate the actual equipmentmodel numbers, accessories, features, optional features, etc. furnished on this specificproject. All equipment brochures shall reference the identifying labels used on theproject Drawings.

C. Adjustment Features:

1. All items of any nature such as belt drives, damper motor linkages, pulleys, etc., andwhich may require adjustment shall incorporate suitable means for making suchadjustments without bending, springing, or otherwise deforming any part.

2. Adjustments shall not depend upon friction alone, but shall incorporate set-screws,key-ways, lock washers, etc., for positive settings.

1.15 WARRANTIES

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES" for procedures andsubmittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment specifications forwarranty requirements.

B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 23, into a separated set of vinylcovered, three ring binders, tabulated and indexed for easy reference.

C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include the name of the project, thedate of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or bond; and names,addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for filing a claim and obtaining warrantyservices.


1.16 PAINTING

A. Field painting of piping systems, etc., shall be accomplished under the direction of theOwner.

B. Protection of Factory-applied Finishes:

1. Factory-applied finishes on equipment and apparatus installed on the project shall becarefully protected.

2. At the conclusion of the work, and prior to final acceptance of the project, equipmentand apparatus shall be thoroughly cleaned of all construction dirt, oil and greasesmears, temporary labels, debris, paint droppings, etc.

3. Damaged factory finishes shall be restored to their original condition using procedures,materials and application techniques as set forth in Division 09 found elsewhere inthese specifications.

1.17 CLEANING

A. Refer to the Division 01 Section: "CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES" for general requirementsfor final cleaning.

B. Refer to Division 23 Section: "TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING" for requirementsfor cleaning filters, strainers, and mechanical systems prior to final acceptance.

C. Name Plates:

1. All nameplates shall be protected from damage during the construction process.

2. At the conclusion of the work, the nameplates shall be carefully cleaned and left in afully legible condition.

D. Removal of Rubbish: Each Contractor is responsible for the timely removal of rubbish andtrash generated by his work, such as empty cartons, containers, materials crates, etc. Particular attention is called to residue that may present a potential tripping or injury hazard.

1.18 MOTORS AND DRIVES

A. Motors:

1. General: Motors shall be U/L-approved, with copper windings, and with a minimumService Factor of 1.15. The nominal capacity shall exceed the brake horse-powerrequirements at duty schedules.

2. Motors 1/2 HP and smaller shall be 120-volt, single-phase with internal overloadprotection.

3. Motors 3/4 HP and larger shall be 208/230 or 460 -volt, 3-phase, unless scheduled ornoted otherwise, and shall have thermal over-load cutouts in each phase asrecommended by the motor manufacturer.

4. Motors shall be as manufactured by Century, General Electric, US Motors, Wagner,Westinghouse, or approved equal.

B. Drives:


1. Belts drives shall be rated for 150% of motor-rated horsepower.

2. Drive assemblies up to two (2) belts shall have adjustable motor sheaves with themid-point of the adjustment range at the RPM required for the specified performance.

3. On drive assemblies with 3 or more belts, provide fixed motor sheaves for thespecified RPM. Provide and install up to 2 pulley changes as necessary to achieve therequired air quantities.

4. All multiple-belt drives shall be factory-marked-matched sets.

C. Specific requirements:

1. Provide high-efficiency motors for the following:a. Air-Handling Units, as scheduled.b. Ventilating Fans, as scheduled.c. HVAC Pumps, as scheduled.

2. Efficiency ranges shall be as follows:

Nominal HP Minimum Efficiency Premium Efficiency3 86.5 89.55 87.5 89.57.5 88.5 91.710 89.5 91.715 91.0 92.420 91.0 93.025 91.7 93.630 92.4 93.640 93.0 94.150, 60, 75 93.0, 93.6, 94.1 94.5, 95.0, 95.4100 94.1 95.4

Motor efficiency certification shall be included with Product Submittal Data inaccordance with Division 01 of these specifications.

3. Variable Speed (Frequency) AC Drives:a. Where scheduled on the plans, provide and install variable speed (frequency) AC

drives for motors.b. Variable speed (frequency) AC drives shall be as described in Section 23 89 65 -

MOTOR CONTROLLERS - of these Specifications.

4. Motor Starters and Controllers:a. Motor starters and controllers for fans, pumps, air-handling units, compressors,

etc., which are not provided as an integral part of a factory-assembled package,shall be provided under Division 23 of the specifications. Refer to Section 23 8965 "MOTOR CONTROLLERS."


PART 3 - EXECUTION - NOT USED


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL DEMOLITION 23 05 06

SECTION 23 05 06

MECHANICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Demolition of:

1. HVAC air handling units, related ductwork, refrigerant piping and hydronic piping.

2. Condensing units and associated refrigerant piping.

3. Boilers, pumps and associated piping.

4. Natural gas piping.

5. Hanger and support devices.

6. All other appliances or devices associated with equipment or devices to be removed.

B. Demolition of all power wiring and conduit from each mechanical item to be removed backto the point of supply.


A. Perform all demolition and removal work necessary to arrive at the arrangement shown onthe Contract Drawings.

B. Perform all operations in such a method to cause minimum damage to items to berelocated, salvaged, or to remain intact and in use.

1.3 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Perform site repair and removal of salvaged items at times approved by the Owner. Accomplish repair and removal of items in a continuous and diligent manner in order to limitinterference with Owner's on-going operations.

B. Drawings may not indicate and specifications may not identify every item required to bemoved or removed.

C. Before submitting bids, visit and examine the site of the work and become familiar with thescope of the work and the details of the demolition work to be accomplished.

D. Submittal of a bid will be evidence that such an examination has been made and thevarious details noted.

E. Claims for extra compensation because of additional labor, materials, or equipmentrequired because of difficulties encountered, will not be recognized unless items wereconcealed at time of inspection of the Contract Documents. Bring all such items to theattention of the Owner's Representative and the Engineer for their disposition beforecontinuing with the work.


F. Execute demolition work in a manner to protect adjacent equipment and other existingitems against damage.

G. Provide and erect lights, barricades, warning signs, and other items as required forprotection of the Owner's employees, building occupants, and the public.

H. Maintain barricades in good condition throughout the project to substantial completion.

I. Control the dust resulting from demolition to prevent it from spreading the occupied areasof the building and to avoid creating a nuisance in the immediate surrounding area.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PROTECTION

A. Provide protection for all building elements, all items which are to remain, all occupants andall workers at all times, and in accordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.2 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FROM THE WEATHER

A. Maintain weather protection for the space(s) being worked in at all times, and inaccordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. Perform demolition in accordance with all requirements of the Owner.

3.4 DISPOSITION OF MATERIALS

A. Dispose of all demolition items and materials in a legal off-site location.

3.5 RELOCATION AND REUSE OF MECHANICAL ITEMS

A. Relocate items indicated on the Contract Drawings as required to accommodate the newconstruction. Remove, relocate and reconnect equipment and accessories that are to bereused.

B. Coordinate the work with the Electrical Contractor. Determine which items and equipmentare to remain, to be relocated or to be removed. Perform the work consistent with thescope of the project.

C. Transport and store materials removed and designated for relocation as directed by theOwner's Representative.

D. Remove all salvage items not be reused or delivered to the Owner, from the property at theend of each workday.


E. Maintain full water, drain, electrical service, etc., to all equipment and apparatus thatremains in service in the building.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Section 23 00 10 - Basic Mechanical Requirements.

3.7 REMOVAL OF WATER

A. Be responsible for the removal of water in areas in which scheduled work is to beperformed.

1. Remove water by pumping, siphoning, absorbent mopping, or compressed airbrooming.

2. Do not use any method of removal that will cause damage to new or reused adjacentequipment or materials.

3.8 SCHEDULING

A. Schedule demolition in strict compliance with the instructions.

3.9 DISCONNECTION AND RECONNECTION OF UTILITIES

A. Do not disconnect or reconnect any utilities until notifying the Owner's Representative.

B. Notify the Electrical Contractor when requiring Electrical Disconnect or Reconnect.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION 23 05 12

SECTION 23 05 12

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL






1.2 SUMMARY



1.3 WORK INCLUDED


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION



21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5


21/22/23 22/23 Notes 1,3,5


21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5




ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION


23 26 23


22/23 22/23 22/23


23 23 23


23 23 Note 1


22/23 22/23 22/23


21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23




28 23 Note 8


23 23 Note 1


23 23 Note 7


22/23 22/23 22/23



21/22/23 21/22/23 Notes 1,5


26 26 26


controls23 23 23


21 21 28


21 21 28


21 21 Note 6


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION


21 21 28


generator22 22 --


22 22 22






(6) Power wiring from energy source to controllers and automatic transferswitch shall be provided under Division 26. Interconnection power andcontrol wiring from controllers and automatic transfer switch to pumpsshall be provided under Division 21, 22 or 23 and conforming to Division26 specifications. Control wiring from automatic transfer switch togenerator starter shall be provided under Division 26.




C. PRECEDENCE









BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL METERS AND GAUGES 23 05 19

SECTION 23 05 19

MECHANICAL METERS AND GAUGES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of meters and gauges required by this section is indicated on Drawings and/orspecified in other Division 23 sections.

B. Types of meters and gauges specified in this section include the following:.

1. Temperature Gauges and Fittings.a. Glass Thermometers.b. Thermometer Wells.c. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs.

2. Pressure Gauges and Fittings.a. Pressure Gauges.b. Pressure Gauge Cocks.c. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs.

C. Meters and gauges furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as partof equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of meters andgauges, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.


1. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable UL standards pertaining to meters andgauges.

2. ANSI and ISA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of ANSI and InstrumentSociety of America (ISA) standards pertaining to construction and installation ofmeters and gauges.

C. Certification: Provide meters and gauges whose accuracies, under specified operatingconditions, are certified by manufacturer.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installationinstructions for each type of meter and gauge. Include scale range, ratings, and calibratedperformance curves, certified where indicated. Submit meter and gauge schedule showingmanufacturer's figure number, scale range, location, and accessories for each meter andgauge.


B. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type of meterand gauge. Include this data and product data in Maintenance Manual; in accordance withrequirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS THERMOMETERS

A. General: Provide glass thermometers of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated,designed and constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Case: Die cast aluminum finished in baked epoxy enamel, glass front, spring secured, 9 in.long.

C. Adjustable Joint: Die cast aluminum, finished to match case, 180° adjustment in verticalplane, 360° adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

D. Tube and Capillary: Glycerin-filled, magnifying lens, 1 percent scale range accuracy, shockmounted.

E. Scale: Satin faced, non-reflective aluminum, permanently etched markings.

F. Stem: Copper-plated steel, or brass, for separable socket, length to suit installation.

G. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Hot Water: 30° - 240°F with 2°F scale divisions (0° - 160°C with 2°C scale divisions).

H. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide glass thermometers ofone of the following, or approved equal.

1. Ernst Gage Co.




5. Weksler

2.2 THERMOMETER WELLS

A. General: Provide thermometer wells constructed of brass or stainless steel, pressure ratedto match piping system design pressure. Provide 2 in. extension for insulated piping. Provide cap nut with chain fastened permanently to thermometer well.

B. Manufacturer: Same as thermometers.

2.3 TEMPERATURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide temperature gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F(93°C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate, equip with 1/4 in. NPS fitting, with


self-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 in. O.D.probe assembly from dial type insertion thermometer. Equip orifice with gasketed screwcap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide temperature gaugeconnector plugs of one of the following, or approved equal:



2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES

A. General: Provide pressure gauges of materials, capacities, and ranges indicated, designedand constructed for use in service indicated.

B. Type: General use, 1% accuracy, ANSI B40.1 grade A, phosphor bronze bourdon type,bottom connection.

C. Case: Drawn steel or brass, glass lens, 4+ in. diameter.

D. Connector: Brass with 1/4 in. male NPT. Provide protective siphon when used for steamservice.

E. Scale: White coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings.

F. Range: Conform to the following:

1. Water: 0 - 100 psi.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauges of one ofthe following, or approved equal:

1. Ametek/U.S. Gauge.

2. Marsh Instrument Co.; Unit of General Signal.




2.5 PRESSURE GAUGE COCKS

A. General: Provide pressure gauge cocks between pressure gauges and gauge tees onpiping systems. Construct gauge cock of brass with 1/4 in. female NPT on each end, and"T" handle brass plug.

B. Siphon: 1/4 in. straight coil constructed of brass tubing with 1/4 in. male NPT on each end.

C. Snubber: 1/4 in. brass bushing with corrosion resistant porous metal disc, through whichpressure fluid is filtered. Select disc material for fluid served and pressure rating.

D. Manufacturer: Same as for pressure gauges.


2.6 PRESSURE GAUGE CONNECTOR PLUGS

A. General: Provide pressure gauge connector plugs pressure rated for 500 psi and 200°F(93°C). Construct of brass and finish in nickel-plate equip with 1/2 in. NPS fitting, withself-sealing valve core type neoprene gasketed orifice suitable for inserting 1/8 in. O.D.probe assembly from dial type insertion pressure gauge. Equip orifice with gasketed screwcap and chain. Provide extension, length equal to insulation thickness, for insulated piping.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure gauge connectorplugs of one of the following, or approved equal:



2.7 CALIBRATED BALANCE VALVES

A. General: Provide as indicated, calibrated balance valves equipped with readout valves tofacilitate connecting of differential pressure meter to balance valves. Equip each readoutvalve with integral EPT check valve designed to minimize system fluid loss duringmonitoring process. Provide calibrated nameplate to indicate degree of closure ofprecision-machined orifice. Construct balancing valve with internal EPT O-ring seals toprevent leakage around rotating element. Provide balance valves with preformedpolyurethane insulation suitable for use on heating and cooling systems, and to protectbalance valves during shipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide calibrated balance valvesof one of the following, or approved equal:

1. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

2. Taco, Inc.

3. Thrush Products, Inc.

4. Griswold.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which meters and gauges are to be installed. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF TEMPERATURE GAUGES

A. General: Install temperature gauges in vertical upright position, and tilted so as to be easilyread by observer standing on floor.


1. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone.

2. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler, chiller and cooling tower.


3. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in air handling units, and built-up centralsystems.

C. Thermometer Wells: Install in piping tee where indicated, in vertical upright position. Fillwell with oil or graphite, secure cap.

D. Temperature Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipeat most readable position. Secure cap.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PRESSURE GAUGES

A. General: Install pressure gauges in piping tee with pressure gauge cock, located on pipe atmost readable position.


1. At suction and discharge of each pump.

2. At discharge of each pressure reducing valve.

C. Pressure Gauge Cocks: Install in piping tee with snubber. Install siphon for steampressure gauges.

D. Pressure Gauge Connector Plugs: Install in piping tee where indicated, located on pipe atmost readable position. Secure cap.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FLOW MEASURING METERS

A. General: Install flow measuring meters on piping systems located in accessible locations atmost readable position.

B. Locations: Install in the following locations, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. At discharge of each pump.

2. At inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems.

C. Calibrated Balance Valves: Install on piping with readout valves in vertical upright position. Maintain minimum length of straight unrestricted piping equivalent to 3 pipe diametersupstream of valve.


A. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gauges to proper angle for best visibility.

B. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gauges and factory-finished surfaces. Replacecracked or broken windows, repair any scratched or marred surfaces with manufacturer'stouch-up paint.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 23 05 29

SECTION 23 05 29

MECHANICAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of supports and anchors required by this section is indicated on Drawings and/orspecified in other Division 23 sections.

B. Types of supports and anchors specified in this section include the following:

1. Pipe and equipment hangers, supports, and anchors.

2. Equipment bases.

C. Supports and anchors furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified aspart of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supports andanchors, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.


1. Code Compliance: Comply with applicable plumbing codes pertaining to productmaterials and installation of supports and anchors.

2. Fire Protection Compliance: Install in accordance with NFPA 13-latest edition. Provideproducts that are UL-listed and FM approved.

3. MSS Standard Compliance:a. Provide pipe hangers and supports of which materials, design, and manufacture

comply with MSS SP-58.b. Select and apply pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-69.c. Fabricate and install pipe hangers and supports, complying with MSS SP-89.d. Terminology used in this section is defined in MSS SP-90.

C. Manufacturers of Hangers and Supports:

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide hangers and supportsof one of the following:a. B-Line Systems Inc. (Cooper)b. ANVIL International

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit product data as required under provisions of Division 01 and Section 23 00 10.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including installationinstructions for each type of support and anchor. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule


showing Manufacturer's figure number, size, location, and features for each required pipehanger and support.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings for each type ofsupport and anchor, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods ofassembly of components.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each type of support andanchor. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; inaccordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL-PIPING HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated horizontal-pipinghangers and supports complying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed,selected by Installer to suit horizontal-piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 andmanufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturer foreach piping service. Select size of hangers and supports to exactly fit pipe size for barepiping, and to exactly fit around piping insulation with saddle or shield for insulated piping. Provide copper-plated hangers and supports for copper-piping systems.

B. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1.

C. Yoke Type Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 2.

D. Steel Double Bolt Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 3.

E. Steel Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 4.

F. Pipe Hangers: MSS Type 5.

G. Adjustable Swivel Pipe Rings: MSS Type 6.

H. Adjustable Steel Band Hangers: MSS Type 7.

I. Adjustable Band Hangers: MSS Type 9.

J. Adjustable Swivel Rings, Band Type: MSS Type 10.

K. Split Pipe Rings: MSS Type 11.

L. Extension Split Pipe Clamps: MSS Type 12.

M. U-Bolts: MSS Type 24.

N. Clips: MSS Type 26.

O. Pipe Saddle Supports: MSS Type 36, including steel pipe base-support and cast-iron floorflange.


2.2 VERTICAL-PIPING CLAMPS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated vertical-piping clampscomplying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following types listed, selected by Installer to suitvertical piping systems, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's publishedproduct information. Select size of vertical piping clamps to exactly fit pipe size of barepipe. Provide copper-plated clamps for copper-piping systems.

B. Two-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8.

C. Four-Bolt Riser Clamps: MSS Type 42.

2.3 HANGER-ROD ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated hanger-rod attachmentscomplying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer tosuit horizontal-piping hangers and building attachments, in accordance with MSS SP-69and manufacturer's published product information. Use only one type by one manufacturerfor each piping service. Select size of hanger-rod attachments to suit hanger rods. Providecopper-plated hanger-rod attachments for copper-piping systems.

B. Steel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13.

C. Steel Clevises: MSS Type 14.

D. Swivel Turnbuckles: MSS Type 15.

E. Malleable Iron Sockets: MSS Type 16.

F. Steel Weldless Eye Nuts: MSS Type 17.

2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide factory-fabricated building attachmentscomplying with MSS SP-58, of one of the following MSS types listed, selected by Installer tosuit building substrate conditions, in accordance with MSS SP-69 and manufacturer'spublished product information. Select size of building attachments to suit hanger rods. Provide copper-plated building attachments for copper-piping systems.

B. Top Beam C-Clamps: MSS Type 19.

C. Side Beam or Channel Clamps: MSS Type 20.

D. Center Beam Clamps: MSS Type 21.

E. Welded Beam Attachments: MSS Type 22.

F. C-Clamps: MSS Type 23.

G. Top Beam Clamps: MSS Type 25.


H. Side Beam Clamps: MSS Type 27.

I. Steel Beam Clamps W/Eye Nut: MSS Type 28.

J. Linked Steel Clamps W/Eye Nut: MSS Type 29.

K. Malleable Beam Clamps: MSS Type 30.

L. Steel Brackets: One of the following for indicated loading:

1. Light Duty: MSS Type 31, suspending 750 lbs. max.

2. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32, suspending 1500 lbs. max.

3. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33, suspending 3000 lbs. max.

M. Side Beam Brackets: MSS Type 34.

N. Plate Lugs: MSS Type 57.

O. Horizontal Travelers: MSS Type 58.

2.5 SADDLES AND SHIELDS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide saddles or shields under piping hangersand supports, factory-fabricated, for all insulated piping. Size saddles and shields for exactfit to mate with pipe insulation.

B. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39; fill interior voids with segments of insulation matchingadjoining insulation.

C. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40; of length recommended by manufacturer to preventcrushing of insulation.

D. Thermal Hanger Shields: Constructed of 360° insert of high density, 125-psi compressivestrength, and water-proofed calcium silicate, encased in 360° sheet metal shield. Provideassembly of same thickness as adjoining insulation.

1. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide thermal hangershields of one of the following:a. Elcen Metal Products Co.b. Pipe Shields, Inc.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1.

B. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: Provide products complying with ASTM A 36.

C. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C 150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformlygraded, natural sand (ASTM C 404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0


parts sand, by volume, with minimum amount of water required for placement andhydration.

D. Auxiliary Steel: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for loads required; weld steel inaccordance with AWS standards.

2.7 ROOF EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. General: Construct roof equipment supports using minimum 14 ga. galvanized steel withfully mitered and welded corners, 3 in. cant, internal bulkhead reinforcing, integral baseplates, pressure treated wood nailer, and 18 ga. galvanized steel counter flashing.

B. Configuration: Construct of sizes as indicated, compensate for slope in roof so top ofsupport is dead level.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof equipment supports ofone of the following:

1. Pate Co.

2. Thycurb Div.; Thybar Corp.

2.8 ROOF PIPING SUPPORTS

A. Multiple parallel runs, or piping and conduits larger than 2-1/2 in. O.D. shall have Type PS,PSE, PP-10 with roller, or PP-10 with bar as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc.,spaced at a maximum 8 ft. o.c. and installed on roof pads if required by RoofingManufacturer. All conduits shall be held in place with clips on bars. Coordinate exactlocations of supports with Roofing Contractor. Do not use wood blocking under supports.

2.9 ROOF PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Construct roof penetration systems utilizing the “Alumi-Flash” system by PortalsPlus, Inc., or equal by Thy-Curb.

B. Each roof penetration shall include a spun aluminum base (“High” size if required due tothe existing roof construction and any insulation thickness) and an EPDM rubber cap. Eachrubber cap shall have a pre-molded pipe opening and shall be selected based on the actualpipe or conduit size required at each location. Secure each rubber cap to each pipe orconduit with the manufacturer’s recommended stainless steel gear clamp.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof penetration systemsof one of the following:

1. Portals Plus, Inc. Ron Widby 800-774-5240

2. Thycurb Div.; Thybar Corp. Jr. Gracia 972-416-6220

2.10 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Concrete housekeeping bases shall be in accordance with Division 3 and constructed of4,000 psi concrete and reinforced with welded wire fabric in accordance with ASTM A 185or deformed reinforcing bar in accordance with ASTM A 615, Grade 60.


B. Reinforcement shall be provided for base thickness as follows unless otherwise noted.

Thickness of Base Size and Type ofReinforcement

Spacing and Location ofReinforcement

4 in. W 2.9 x 2.9 welded 6 in. x 6 in. at centerline of pad6 in. No. 3 bars 18 in. on center each way (3 in. from

top of pad8 in. No. 4 bars 18 in. on center each way (3 in. from

top of pad)12 in. 2 sets of No. 4 bars Two mats 18 in. on center each way

(3 in. from top of pad and 3 in. frombottom of pad)

2.11 SLEEVES, INSETS AND FASTENINGS

A. Pipes passing through concrete or cinder walls and floor or other corrosive material shall beprotected by a protective sheathing or wrapping or by sleeves, as required to meet the localcode. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes shall be filled or tightly caulked in anapproved manner. Annular spaces between sleeves and pipes in fire-resistance-ratedassemblies shall be filled or tightly caulked in accordance with the local code.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which supports and anchors are to be installed. Donot proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Proceed with installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after required buildingstructural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correctinadequacies including (but not limited to) proper placement of inserts, anchors and otherbuilding structural attachments.

B. Prior to installation of hangers, supports, anchors and associated work, Installer shall meetat project site with Contractor, installer of each component of associated work, inspectionand testing agency representatives (if any), installers of other work requiring coordinationwith work of this section and for purpose of reviewing material selections and proceduresto be followed in performing the work in compliance with requirements specified.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING ATTACHMENTS

A. Install building attachments at required locations within concrete or on structural steel forproper piping support. Space attachments within maximum piping span length indicated inMSS SP-69. Install additional at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides,strainers, expansion joints, and at all changes in direction of piping. Install concrete insertsbefore concrete is placed; fasten insert securely to forms. Where concrete withcompressive strength less than 2500 psi is indicated, install reinforcing bars throughopenings at top of inserts.


3.4 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Install hangers, supports, clamps and attachments to support piping properlyfrom building structure; comply with MSS SP-69. Install additional at concentrated loads,including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at all changes in directionof piping. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping to be supported togetheron trapeze type hangers where possible. Install supports with maximum spacingscomplying with MSS SP-69. Where piping of various sizes is to be supported together bytrapeze hangers, space hangers for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports forsmaller diameter pipe. Do not use wire or perforated metal to support piping, and do notsupport piping from other piping.

B. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washersand other accessories. Except as otherwise indicated for exposed continuous pipe runs,install hangers and supports of same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping.

C. Support fire-water piping independently of other piping.

D. Prevent electrolysis in support of copper tubing by use of hangers and supports that arecopper plated, or by other recognized industry methods.

E. Support and laterally brace vertical pipe runs at every floor level and at intervals not toexceed 20 ft. 0 in. Support vertical pipe with riser clamps installed below hubs, couplings orlugs welded to the pipe.

F. Provisions for Movement:

1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and topermit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action ofexpansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units.

2. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loadingand stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

3. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes, and so thatmaximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 Pressure Piping Codes are notexceeded.

G. Insulated Piping: Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps; do notexceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31.

2. Piping hangers shall be sized large enough to allow insulation to pass through. Hangers for piping 2-1/2 in. and greater shall be provided with pipe covering protectionsaddle, or high compressive strength insulation saddle. Hangers for piping 2 in. andless shall be provided with pipe covering shields. On cold or chilled water pipingprovide vapor barrier through hanger.

3. Do NOT utilize "pipe size" hangers or clamps with insulation placed over the pipe andhanger or clamp.


3.5 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS

A. Install anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted byANSI B31, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to piping and tostructure. Comply with ANSI B31 and with AWS standards.

C. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance withexpansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces tomaximums recommended by manufacturer for each unit.

D. Anchor spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install anchors at ends of principalpipe-runs, at intermediate points in pipe-runs between expansion loops and bends. Makeprovisions for preset of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion andcontraction of piping.

3.6 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING BASES

A. Concrete housekeeping bases will be provided as work of Division 03. Furnish toContractor, scaled layouts of all required bases, with dimensions of bases, and location tocolumn centerlines. Furnish templates, anchor bolts, and accessories, necessary for baseconstruction.

B. Provide concrete housekeeping bases for all floor-mounted equipment furnished as part ofthe work of Division 23 in accordance with Division 03. Size bases to extend minimum of 4in. beyond equipment base in any direction; and 4 in. above finished floor elevation, unlessotherwise noted on Drawing. Construct of reinforced concrete, roughen floor slab beneathbase for bond, and provide steel rod anchors between floor and base. Locate anchor boltsusing equipment manufacturer's templates. Chamfer top and edge corners.

3.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Provide structural steel stands to support equipment not floor mounted or hung fromstructure. Construct of structural steel members or steel pipe and fittings. Providefactory-fabricated tank saddles for tanks mounted on steel stands.

B. Furnish roof equipment supports to Contractor for installation as part of work of Division 07;not work of this section.


A. Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers so as to distribute loads equally on attachments.

B. Support Adjustment: Provide grout under supports so as to bring piping and equipment toproper level and elevations.

C. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces withmanufacturer's touch-up paint.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL 23 05 48

SECTION 23 05 48

MECHANICAL VIBRATION CONTROL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of vibration control work required by this section is indicated on Drawings andschedules, and/or specified in other Division 23 sections.

B. Types of vibration control products specified in this section include the following:

1. Fiberglass Pads and Shapes

2. Neoprene Pads

3. Vibration Isolation Springs

4. Pad-Type Isolators

5. Neoprene Mountings

6. Spring Isolators, Free-Standings

7. Spring Isolators, Housed

8. Spring Isolators, Vertically-Restrained

9. Spring Isolators, Earthquake Restrained

10. Equipment Rails

11. Fabricated Equipment Bases

12. Roof-Curb Isolators

13. Isolation Hangers

14. Riser Isolators

15. Flexible Pipe Connectors

C. Vibration control products furnished as integral part of factory-fabricated equipment arespecified as part of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.

D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for equipment foundations, hangers, sealants, gaskets,and other work related to vibration control work.

E. Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements of electrical connections to equipmentisolated on vibration control products.

F. Refer to other Division 23 sections for requirements of duct connections to air handlingequipment isolated on vibration control products.



A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of vibration controlproducts, of type, size, and capacity required, whose products have been in satisfactoryuse in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Except as otherwise indicated, obtain vibration control products from single manufacturer.

C. Engage manufacturer to provide technical supervision of installation of vibration controlproducts.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions foreach type of vibration control product. Submit schedule showing size, type, deflection, andlocation for each product furnished.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicatingdimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components. Details bases, and show location of equipment anchoring points, coordinated withequipment manufacturer's shop drawings.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for each type of vibration control product. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenance manual; in accordancewith requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Submit to compliance with requirements; provide vibration control productsof one of the following:

1. Amber/Booth Co.

2. Consolidated Kinetics, Inc.

3. Korfund Dynamics Corp.

4. Mason Industries, Inc.

5. Peabody Noise Control, Inc.

6. Vibration Eliminator Co., Inc.

7. Vibration Mountings and Controls, Inc.

2.2 VIBRATION CONTROL MATERIALS AND SUPPORT UNITS:

A. Neoprene Pads: Oil-resistant neoprene sheets, of manufacturer's standard hardness andcross-ribbed or waffled pattern. Pad thickness shall be selected such that suitabledeflection is provided i.e., the supported equipment provides a loading in the upper half ofthe manufacturer’s loading range. Neoprene pads shall not be overloaded such thatcomplete deflection is achieved.


B. Spring Isolators, Housed:

1. Except as otherwise indicated, provide vibration isolation spring between telescopingsteel housings with top and bottom loading plates, and with pad-type isolator bondedto bottom of leading plate. Include resilient inserts to separate and guide telescopinghousings.

2. Equip top loading plate with equipment anchorages as indicated or as required forsupport and attachment.

3. Include pad-type isolator bonded to top of top loading plate, except on units withleveling bolts.

4. Include holes in bottom plate for bolting unit substrate.

C. Spring Isolators, Vertically Restrained: Provide spring isolator in housing that includesvertical limit stops. Design housing to act as blocking during erection, and with installedheight and operating height being equal. Maintain 1/2 in. minimum clearance aroundrestraining bolts, and between housing and springs. Design so limit stops are out ofcontact during normal operation.

D. Roof-Curb Isolators: Fabricated Frame units sized to match roof curbs as shown, formedwith isolation springs between extruded aluminum upper and lower sections, which areshaped and positioned to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Provide continuous airtight andwaterproof seal between upper and lower extrusions. Include provisions for anchorage offrame unit to roof curb, and for anchorage of equipment to unit.

E. Isolation Hangers:

1. Hanger units formed with brackets and including manufacturer's standardcompression isolators of type indicated. Design brackets for 3 times rated loading ofunits. Fabricate units to accept misalignment of 30° off center in any direction beforecontracting hanger box, and for use with either rod or strap type members, andincluding acoustical washers to prevent metal-to-metal contacts.

2. Provide vibration isolation spring with cap and Neoprene element in lower part ofhanger and rubber hanger element in top, securely retained in unit.

3. Provide neoprene element, with minimum deflection of 0.35 in., securely retained inhanger box.

4. Provide hangers, precompressed to rate load to limit deflection during installation. Design so hanger may be released after full load is applied.

F. Flexible Pipe Connectors:

1. For non-ferrous piping, provide bronze hose covered with bronze wire braid withcopper tube ends or bronze flanged ends, braze-welded to hose.

2. For ferrous piping, provide stainless steel hose covered with stainless steel wire braidwith NPT steel nipples or 150 psi ANSI flanges, welded to hose.

G. Vibration Isolation Roof Curb Rails:

1. Curb rail mounted roof top equipment shall be mounted on spring isolation curb rails. The lower member shall consist of a rectangular steel tube continuing adjustable andremovable steel springs that support the upper floating section. The upper frame mustprovide continuous support for the equipment and must be captive so as to resilient


resist wind and seismic forces. All directional neoprene snubber bushings shall be aminimum of 1/4 in. thick. Steel springs shall rest on 1/4 in. neoprene acoustical padsand have a minimum deflection of 2 in. Hardware must be cadmium plated orgalvanized and the springs plated or provided with an approved rust-resistant finish. The upper frame shall have a continuous neoprene gasket for sealing with the rooftopunit frame or casing. Roof curbs shall be fabricated to match roof slope and form alevel top edge. Shimming of flat curbs is NOT acceptable.

2. Weatherproofing between the upper and lower sections of the frames of the curb shallbe provided by a continuous flexible aluminum seal joined at the corners by EPDMbellows. The aluminum seal must be nailed over and provide counter flashing to thecurb’s waterproofing. Provide access port with waterproof covers at all springlocations. Provide 2 in. thick insulation on the sides of the lower curb.

3. The curb manufacturer shall provide complete installation instructions. Roof curbsshall be matched to the specific rooftop units provided. Vibration Isolation Curbs shallbe Mason Industries Inc. Type RSR or approved equal.

4. Vibration Isolation Rails mounted on a standard roof curb are not acceptable.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which vibration control units are to be installed. Donot proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 PERFORMANCE OF ISOLATORS

A. General: Comply with minimum static deflectors recommended by ASHRAE, for selectionand application of vibration isolation materials and units as indicated.

B. Manufacturer's Recommendations: Except as otherwise indicated, comply withmanufacturer's recommendation for selection and application of vibration materials andunits.

3.3 APPLICATIONS

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, select vibration control products in accordancewith ASHRAE Handbook, 2003 Applications Volume, Chapter 47 "Sound and VibrationControl," Table 42. Where more than one type of product is offered, selection is Installer'soption.

B. Piping:

1. For piping connected to equipment mounted on vibration control products, installisolation hangers as indicated, and for first 3 points of support for pipe sizes 4 in. andless, for first 4 points of support for pipe sizes 5 in. through 8 in., and for first 6 pointsof support for pipe sizes 10 in. and over.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's instructions forinstallation and load application to vibration control materials and units. Adjust to ensure


that units have equal deflection, do not bottom out under loading, and are notshort-circuited by other contacts or bearing points. Remove space blocks and similardevices intended for temporary support during installation.

B. Install units between substrate and equipment as required for secure operation and toprevent displacement by normal forces, and as indicated.

C. Adjust leveling devices as required to distribute loading uniformly onto isolators. Shim unitsas required where substrate is not level.

D. Install inertia base frames on isolator units as indicated, so that minimum of 1 in. clearancebelow base will result when frame is filled with concrete and supported equipment has beeninstalled and loaded for operation.

E. For air handling equipment, install thrust restraints as indicated, and also wherever thrustexceeds 10% of equipment weight.

F. Locate isolation hangers as near overhead support structure as possible.

G. Weld riser isolator units in place as required to prevent displacement from loading andoperations.

H. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Install on equipment side of shutoff valves, horizontally andparallel to equipment shafts wherever possible.


A. Upon completion of vibration control work, prepare report showing measured equipmentdeflections for each major item of equipment as indicated.

B. Clean each vibration control unit, and verify that each is working freely, and that there is nodirt or debris in immediate vicinity of unit that could possibly short-circuit isolation.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 53

SECTION 23 05 53

MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of mechanical identification work required by this section is indicated on Drawingsand/or specified in other Division 23 sections.

B. Types of identification devices specified in this section include the following:

1. Painted Identification Materials.

2. Plastic Pipe Markers.

3. Plastic Duct Markers.

4. Valve Tags.

5. Valve Schedule Frames.

6. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs.

7. Plastic Equipment Markers.

8. Plasticized Tags.

C. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified aspart of equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.

D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for identification requirements at central-stationmechanical control center; not work of this section.

E. Refer to NFPA 13 - latest edition for additional fire protection system identificationrequirements.

F. Refer to NFPA 99 - latest edition for additional medical gas system identificationrequirements.

G. Refer to Division 26 sections for identification requirements of electrical work; not work ofthis section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identificationdevices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.


1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1 for lettering size, length of color field,colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions foreach identification material and device required.

B. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on8-1/2 in. x 11 in. bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation(as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (ifany). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, byspecial "flags", in margin of schedule. In addition to mounted copies, furnish extra copiesfor Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 01.

C. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals; inaccordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide mechanical identificationmaterials of one of the following:

1. Allen Systems, Inc.

2. Brady (WHO) Co.; Signmark Div.

3. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc.

4. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.2 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required foreach application as referenced in other Division 23 sections. Where more than single typeis specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection foreach product category.

2.3 PAINTED IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS

A. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwiseindicated for piping systems, comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.

2.4 PLASTIC PIPE MARKERS

A. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on,color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI A13.1.

B. Insulation: Furnish 1 inch thick molded fiberglass insulation with jacket for each plastic pipemarker to be installed on un-insulated pipes subjected to fluid temperatures of 125°F(52°C) or greater. Cut length to extend 2 in. beyond each end of plastic pipe marker.


C. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6 in. (including insulation if any), providefull-band pipe markers, extending 360° around pipe at each location, fastened by one of thefollowing methods:

1. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker.

2. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap.

3. Laminated or bonded application of pipe marker to pipe (or insulation).

4. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not less than 3/4in. wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1-1/2 in.

D. Lettering: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed nomenclature that best describes pipingsystem in each instance, as selected by Engineer in cases of variance with name as shownor specified.

E. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, andabbreviate only as necessary for each application length.

1. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow, either integrallywith piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as separateunit of plastic.

2.5 PLASTIC DUCT MARKERS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color-coded duct markers. Conform to the following color code:

1. Yellow/Green: Supply air.

2. Blue: Exhaust, outside, return, and mixed air.

3. For hazardous exhausts, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.

B. Nomenclature: Include the following:

1. Direction of airflow.

2. Duct service (supply, return, exhaust, etc.).

3. Duct origin (from).

4. Duct destination (to).

5. Design CFM.

2.6 VALVE TAGS

A. Brass Valve Tags: Provide 19-gauge polished brass valve tags with stamp-engraved pipingsystem abbreviation in 1/4 in. high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2 in. high, andwith 5/32 in. hole for fastener.

1. Provide 1+ in. diameter tags, except as otherwise indicated.

2. Provide size and shape as specified or scheduled for each piping system.

3. Fill tag engraving with black enamel.


B. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire link orbeaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags tovalves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

C. Access Panel Markers: Provide manufacturer's standard 1/16 in. thick engraved plasticlaminate access panel markers, with abbreviations and numbers corresponding toconcealed valve. Include 1/8 in. center hole to allow attachment.

2.7 VALVE SCHEDULE FRAMES

A. General: For each page of valve schedule, provide glazed display frame, with screws forremovable mounting on masonry walls. Provide frames of finished hardwood or extrudedaluminum, with SSB-grade sheet glass.

2.8 ENGRAVED PLASTIC-LAMINATE SIGNS

A. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS L-P-387, inthe sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of thesizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwiseindicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessarybecause of substrate.

B. Thickness: 1/16 in. for units up to 20 sq. in. or 8 in. length; 1/8 in. for larger units.

C. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent adhesivewhere screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate.

2.9 PLASTIC EQUIPMENT MARKERS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard laminated plastic, color-coded equipmentmarkers. Conform to the following color code:

1. Green: Cooling equipment and components.

2. Yellow: Heating equipment and components.

3. Yellow/Green: Combination cooling and heating equipment and components.

4. Brown: Energy reclamation equipment and components.

5. Blue: Equipment and components that do not meet any of the above criteria.

6. Red: Fire protection equipment and components.

7. For hazardous equipment, use colors and designs recommended by ANSI A13.1.

B. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as closely aspossible:

1. Name and plan number.

2. Equipment service.

3. Design capacity.

4. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving conditions, rpm,etc.


C. Size: Provide approximate 2-1/2 in. x 4 in. markers for control devices, dampers, andvalves; and 4-1/2 in. x 6 in. for equipment.

2.10 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS

A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in mechanicalidentification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, asrecommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification andoperation/maintenance of mechanical systems and equipment.

1. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are shown andspecified, provide identification that indicates individual system number as well asservice (as examples; Boiler No. 3, Air Supply No. 1H, Standpipe F12).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require insulation,painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces,install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior toinstallation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

3.2 DUCTWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake and relief ductwork with duct markers;or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service and direction of flow, inblack or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).

B. Location: In each space where ductwork is exposed, or concealed only by removableceiling system, locate signs near points where ductwork originates or continues intoconcealed enclosures (shaft, underground or similar concealment), and at 50' spacingsalong exposed runs.

C. Access Doors: Provide duct markers or stenciled signs on each access door in ductworkand housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and other maintenanceand operating instructions, and appropriate safety and procedural information.

D. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above acoustical ceilings or similarconcealment, plasticize tags may be installed for identification in lieu of specified signs, atInstaller's option.

3.3 PIPING SYSTEM IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system indicated toreceive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow:

1. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under "Materials" in thissection. Install on pipe insulation segment where required for hot non-insulated pipes.

2. The entire surface of all hydronic piping shall be painted the background coloraccording the Owner's requirements as indicated in paragraph C below.


B. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows wherever piping is exposed to view inoccupied spaces, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels,plenums) and exterior nonconcealed locations.

1. Near each valve and control device.

2. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal units; mark eachpipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

3. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ceilings, or enternon-accessible enclosures.

4. At access doors, manholes and similar access points that permit view of concealedpiping.

5. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

6. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 50 ft. along each piping run, exceptreduce spacing to 25 ft. in congested areas of piping and equipment.

7. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spacedmarkers.

C. Piping Identification

1. Provide piping identification for the following:System Background Color Text ColorHeating Water Supply Light Orange WhiteHeating Water Return Light Orange White

3.4 VALVE IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping system;exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixturefaucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbingfixtures, HVAC terminal devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures andunits. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

1. Tagging Schedule: Comply with requirements of "Valve Tagging Schedule" at end ofthis section.

B. Mount valve schedule frames and schedules in machine rooms where indicated or, if nototherwise indicated, where directed by Engineer.

1. Where more than one major machine room is shown for project, install mounted valveschedule in each major machine room, and repeat only main valves which are to beoperated in conjunction with operations of more than single machine room.

3.5 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign or plastic equipment marker on or near eachmajor item of mechanical equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if nototherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following generalcategories of equipment and operational devices:

1. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and hazardous units suchas gas outlets.


2. Meters, gauges, thermometers and similar units.

3. Fuel-burning units including boilers, furnaces, heaters, stills and absorption units.

4. Pumps, compressors, chillers, condensers and similar motor-driven units.

5. Air handling units.

6. Condensing units.

7. Fans, blowers, primary balancing dampers and mixing boxes.

8. Tanks and pressure vessels.

9. Strainers, filters, humidifiers, water treatment systems and similar equipment.

B. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4 in. high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance isless than 2 ft. 0 in., 1/2 in. high for distances up to 6 ft. 0 in., and proportionately largerlettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering 2/3 to 3/4 of size of principallettering.

C. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish betweenmultiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergencyprecautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.


A. Adjusting: Relocate any mechanical identification device, which has become visuallyblocked by work of this division or other divisions.

B. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices, and glass frames of valve charts.

3.7 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each mechanical identification material required,including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system,additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engravingblanks of assorted sizes.

1. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion ofstenciling and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock ofstenciling paints and applicators.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 23 05 93

SECTION 23 05 93

MECHANICAL TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Adjust and balance Mechanical Water systems

B. Adjust and balance Mechanical Air systems

C. Check each piece of operating equipment provided under Division 23.

D. Provide Balancing Report


A. Independent Subcontractor: All testing, adjusting and balancing shall be performed by aTesting, Adjusting and Balancing firm that is independent from the HVAC systems installer.

B. Balancing Work: Under direct supervision of AABC accredited testing organization certifiedsupervisor.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Comply with AABC National Standards for Total System Balance,latest edition.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificate: Before beginning work, submit certification of AABC certified supervisor andAABC firm certification in accordance with Section 23 00 10.

B. Balancing Report: At completion of work, submit balancing report in accordance withSection 23 00 10. After adjustments have been made submit three (3) copies of acomplete detailed report on mechanical systems and their operation to include:

1. Blackline prints with air openings marked to correspond with data sheets and withthermometer locations clearly marked.

2. Data sheets showing amount of air handled at each opening, instrument used, velocityreadings and manufacturer free area factors.

3. Equipment data sheets giving make, size, etc., of fans, motors and drives. Includesupply fans, exhaust and recirculating fans.

4. Operating data including fan RPM, measured motor current and voltage BHP andCFM (total).

5. Equipment and operating data including air temperatures entering and leaving coils(maximum air temperature rise), together with corresponding air flow and air pressuredrop, water temperatures entering and leaving coils and/or water pressure dropthrough coil.


6. Equipment and operating data as required to show performance of H&V units, fancoils, cabinet heaters, unit heaters, temperature control devices, pumps and domestichot water circulating systems.

7. Static pressure loss across variable air volume boxes and associated reheat coils.

8. Prime source refrigeration equipment operating data at design conditions includingtemperature measurements, flow conditions and corresponding power consumption.

9. A statement outlining any abnormal or notable conditions not covered in above data. Make special note of any discrepancies between tabulated data and specifiedconditions.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Conditions: Verify following conditions before proceeding with work:

1. Installation of the designated system is complete and in full operation.

2. Outside temperature conditions, occupant loads, lighting loads, special equipmentrequiring extra sensible or ventilation requirements, and solar conditions are within areasonable range relative to design conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INSTRUMENTS

A. Calibration and maintenance of instruments shall be in accordance with manufacturer'sstandards and recommendations and requirements of AABC.

B. Calibration histories for each instrument shall be available for examination.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect preceding work in accordance with Section 23 00 10 BASIC MECHANICALREQUIREMENTS.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Water Systems: Check:

1. Strainers are clean.

2. Automatic control valves operation.

3. Pump rotation.

4. Other conditions as required.

B. Air Systems: Check:

1. Filters are clean.

2. Filter leakage.


3. Damper operation and leakage.

4. Duct leakage.

5. Fan rotation.

6. Equipment vibration.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. General: Check, adjust and balance air and water system to meet the design performanceand tabulate results on acceptable forms. Minimum data to include amperage, voltageinput, and thermal heater capacity of each motor, equipment nameplate data and operatingspeed, pressure drop across each filter bank, pressure rise across each fan and pump,CFM capacity each outlet, zone and fan, and heating or cooling capacity of each coil orelement.

B. Belt Drives: Adjust so that when the desired speed and belt tension had been established,the variable speed pulley and the belt tension adjustment shall be at approximately themidpoint of their range.

C. Water Balance and Equipment Test: Include circulating pumps, converters, coils, coolers,chillers, boilers and condensers.

1. Adjust flow rates for equipment, coils and evaporator for instance, to values onequipment submittals if different from values on Contract Drawings.

2. Record final measurements for hydronic equipment performance data sheets. Includeentering and leaving water temperatures for heating and cooling coils, chillerevaporators and condensers, boilers and for converters. Include entering and leavingair temperatures (DB/WB for cooling coils) for air handling units and reheat coils. Make air and water temperature measurements at the same time.

D. Air Systems:

1. Adjust dampers and sheaves for the delivery and distribution of air quantities indicatedon the drawings.

2. Mark balancing device at final setting.

3. Replacement of adjustable pulleys, installation of additional balancing dampers orpressure taps, required to effect proper air balance shall be furnished and installed bythe HVAC Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

4. Adjust exhaust and recirculation air systems for air quantities indicated on drawingsand to establish the proper relationship between supply and exhaust.

5. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperature free from objectionabledrafts and noise within the capabilities of the system.

6. Acceptable Tolerances: Adjust fan systems, air devices, etc. as follows:a. Supply air fan CFM: -5% to +5% of scheduledb. Return air fan CFM: -5% to +5% of scheduledc. Exhaust air fan CFM: -0% to +10% of scheduledd. Supply air device CFM: -0% to +10% of schedulede. Return air device CFM: -10% to +0% of scheduledf. Exhaust air device CFM: -0% to +10% of scheduled


E. Test Run: In order to determine that the system installation is complete and will operatesatisfactorily, make a test run with equipment operating per normal temperature controlschedule and sequence. Run test and operate and adjust equipment as may be requiredduring test run.

3.4 COMPLETION SERVICES

A. Final Check: Make final checks and do any rebalancing as directed.

B. Report: Submit Balancing Report as specified above.

C. Acceptance: Final acceptance of the project will not be made until a satisfactory report isreceived. Owner reserves the right to spot check the report by field verification prior to finalacceptance.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016HVAC DUCT INSULATION 23 07 13

SECTION 23 07 13

HVAC DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Ductwork System Insulation:a. Fiberglass.

C. Refer to Section 23 05 29 "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS" for protection saddles, protectionshields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.

D. Refer to Section 23 31 13 "METAL DUCTWORK" for duct linings; not work of this section.

E. Refer to Section 23 05 53 "MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION" for installation of identificationdevices for piping, ductwork, and equipment; not work of this section.





1.3 SUBMITTALS







PART 2 - PRODUCTS





3. Manson.




2.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Rigid Fiberglass Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 612, Class 1.

B. Jackets for Ductwork Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I (vapor barrier) for ductwork withtemperatures below ambient; Type II for ductwork with temperatures above ambient.

1. Encase exterior ductwork insulation with aluminum jacket with weatherproofconstruction, as specified.

C. Ductwork Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wires, tape, anchors, cornerangles and similar accessories as recommended by insulation manufacturer forapplications indicated.

D. Ductwork Insulation Compounds: Provide cements, adhesives, coatings, sealers,protective finishes and similar compounds as recommended by insulation manufacturer forapplications indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION



3.2 DUCTWORK SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Do not insulate fibrous glass ductwork or lined ductwork.


B. Dual Temperature Ductwork:

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature ductwork:a. Hot/cold supply and return ductwork between fan discharge or HVAC unit

discharge and room terminal outlets; except omit insulation on return air ductworklocated in return air ceiling plenums.

2. Insulate each ductwork system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Rigid Fiberglass: 1-1/2 in. thick, increase thickness to 2 in. in machine, fan and

equipment rooms.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK INSULATION


B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces.

C. Clean and dry ductwork prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensurecomplete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

D. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on ductwork insulation, and protect it to prevent punctureand other damage.

E. Extend ductwork insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar ductworkpenetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

F. Lined Ductwork: Except as otherwise indicated, omit insulation on ductwork where internalinsulation or sound absorbing linings have been installed.

G. Corner Angles: Except for oven and hood exhaust duct insulation; install corner angles onexternal corners of insulation on ductwork in exposed finished spaces before covering withjacketing.

3.4 INSULATION EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier metal jacketing. It may be factory-applied or field applied. Joints shall be overlapped a minimum of 2 in. Securement shall be accomplished by using screws, rivets, or stainless steel bands. Anyvapor-barrier jacket or coating under the metal jacketing shall not be disturbed orpunctured by the use of screws or rivets on the outer jacket. Cross-break the jacketing ontop of all rectangular ducts to ensure positive drainage.








BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION 23 07 16

SECTION 23 07 16

HVAC EQUIPMENT INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Equipment Insulation:a. Flexible Unicellular.

C. Refer to Section 23 05 29 "SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS" for protection saddles, protectionshields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.







1.3 SUBMITTALS



C. Samples: Submit manufacturer’s sample of each piping insulation type required, and ofeach duct and equipment insulation type required. Affix label to sample completelydescribing product.





PART 2 - PRODUCTS




2. Manson.





7. Rubatex Corp.

8. Thermacor Process, Inc. (CT1 9501).

9. Pabco.

10. IMCOA.



13. Unifrax Corporation.

2.2 EQUIPMENT INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Flexible Unicellular Equipment Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type II.

B. Jacketing Material for Equipment Insulation: Provide pre-sized glass cloth jacketingmaterial, not less than 7.8 ounces per square yard, or metal jacket at Installer's option,except as otherwise indicated.

C. Equipment Insulation Compounds: Provide adhesives, cements, sealers, mastics andprotective finishes as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applications indicated.

1. Encase exterior equipment insulation with aluminum jacket with weatherproofconstruction, as specified.

D. Equipment Insulation Accessories: Provide staples, bands, wire, wire netting, tape, cornerangles, anchors and stud pins as recommended by insulation manufacturer for applicationsindicated.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION



3.2 EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. Hot Equipment (Above Ambient Temperature):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot equipment:a. Boilers (not pre-insulated at factory).b. Hot water expansion tanks.c. Hot water pumps.

2. Insulate each item of equipment specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 2 in. thick, except 3 in. thick for low-pressure boilers and

steam-jacketed heat exchangers.b. Flexible Unicellular: 1 in. thick. Do not use for equipment operating above 180°F

(82°C).

3.3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT INSULATION

A. General: Install equipment thermal insulation products in accordance with manufacturer'swritten instructions, and in compliance with recognized industry practices to ensure thatinsulation serves intended purpose.

B. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces and on clean and dry surfaces. Redo poorly fitted joints. Do not use mastic or joint sealer as filler for gapping joints andexcessive voids resulting from poor workmanship.

C. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier on equipment insulation and protect it to prevent punctureand other damage.

D. Do not apply insulation to equipment, breechings, or stacks while hot.

E. Apply insulation using staggered joint method for both single and double layer construction,where feasible. Apply each layer of insulation separately.

F. Coat insulated surfaces with layer of insulating cement, trowelled in workmanlike manner,leaving smooth continuous surface. Fill in scored block, seams, chipped edges anddepressions, and cover over wire netting and joints with cement of sufficient thickness toremove surface irregularities.

G. Cover insulated surfaces with all-service jacketing neatly fitted and firmly secured. Lapseams at least 2 in. Apply over vapor barrier where applicable.


H. Do not insulate boiler manholes, hand-holes, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer'snameplate. Provide neatly beveled edge at interruptions of insulation.

I. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment that must be openedperiodically for maintenance; include metal vessel covers, fasteners, flanges, frames andaccessories.







BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 07 19

SECTION 23 07 19

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY



1. Piping System Insulation:a. Fiberglass.b. Flexible Unicellular.

C. Refer to Section 22 05 29 "PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS" for protectionsaddles, protection shields, and thermal hanger shields; not work of this section.







1. Exception: Outdoor mechanical insulation may have flame-spread index of 75 andsmoke developed index of 150.

2. Exception: Industrial mechanical insulation that will not affect life safety egress ofbuilding may have flame-spread index of 75 and smoke developed index of 150.

1.3 SUBMITTALS







PART 2 - PRODUCTS





3. CertainTeed Corp.





8. Rubatex Corp.

9. Thermacor Process, Inc. (CT1 9501)

10. Pabco

11. IMCOA



14. Unifrax Corporation

2.2 PIPING INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Fiberglass Piping Insulation: ASTM C 547, Class 1 unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cellular Glass Piping Insulation: ASTM C552, Type II, Class 2.

C. Calcium Silicate Piping Insulation: ASTM C 553, Type I.

D. Flexible Unicellular Piping Insulation: ASTM C 534, Type I.

E. Polyurethane: ASTM #84, UL 723.


F. Phenolic Foam Piping Insulation: Preformed sections in accordance with ASTM C 1126,Type III, Grade 1 for use up to +248°F. (Supplied with factory applied ASJ/FSK vaporbarrier jacket Type 1 to ASTM C 1136 and C 921)

1. Koolphen-K Pipe InsulationKingspan Corporation Inc.

G. Jackets for Piping Insulation: ASTM C 921, Type I (Vapor Barrier) for piping withtemperatures below ambient, Type II for piping with temperatures above ambient. Type Imay be used for all piping at Installer’s option.

1. Encase pipe fittings insulation with one-piece premolded PVC fitting covers, fastenedas per manufacturer's recommendations.

2. Encase exterior piping insulation with aluminum jacket with weather-proofconstruction.

H. Staples, Bands, Wires and Cement: As recommended by insulation manufacturer forapplications indicated.

I. Adhesives, Sealers and Protective Finishes: As recommended by insulation manufacturerfor applications indicated.

2.3 METAL PROTECTIVE JACKET

A. Sheet aluminum: ASTM B209, 3003 alloy, H-14 temper, and 0.016 in. thick. Providemoisture barrier lining for service temperatures 60°F or less except where applied over aType I or II jacket. Longitudinal lap shall be at least two inches wide.

B. Fitting covers: Factory fabricated from not lighter than 0.020 in. thick type 3003 sheetaluminum.

C. Bands: 3/4 in. wide aluminum on maximum 18 in. centers.

D. Provide metal jackets over insulation as follows:

1. All insulation exposed to outdoor weather.

2. Insulation exposed in building within five (5) ft. of the floor that connect to sterilizers,kitchen and laundry equipment. Jackets may be applied with pop rivets. Providealuminum angle ring escutcheons at wall, ceiling and floor penetrations.

3. A two-inch overlap is required at longitudinal and circumferential joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION




3.2 HVAC PIPING SYSTEM INSULATION

A. Insulation Omitted: Omit insulation on hot piping within radiation enclosures or unitcabinets; on cold piping within unit cabinets provided piping is located over drain pan; onheating piping beyond control valve, located within heated space; on condensate pipingbetween steam trap and union; and on unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections andexpansion joints.

B. Sub-Freezing Piping (0 to 39°F (-18 to 4°C)):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following subfreezing HVAC piping systems:a. Refrigerant suction lines between evaporators and compressors.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Flexible Unicellular: 1 in. thickness or as recommended by material

manufacturer..

C. Cold Piping (40°F (4.4°C) to ambient)):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following cold HVAC piping systems:a. HVAC make-up water piping.b. Air conditioner condensate drain piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1 in. thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1-1/2 in., 1-1/2 in. thick

for pipe sizes over 1-1/2 in.

D. Dual Temperature Piping (40° to 250°F (4.4° to 121°C)):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following dual temperature HVAC pipingsystems:a. HVAC hot/chilled water supply and return piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Fiberglass: 1 in. thick for pipe sizes up to and including 1 in., 1-1/2 in. thick for

pipe sizes over 1-1/4 in. through 4 in., 2 in. thick for pipe sizes over 5 in.

E. Hot Low Pressure Piping (to 248°F (120°C)):

1. Application Requirements: Insulate the following hot low-pressure HVAC pipingsystems (steam piping up to 14 psi water piping up to 248°F (120°C)).a. Hot gas refrigerant piping.

2. Insulate each piping system specified above with one of the following types andthicknesses of insulation:a. Flexible Unicellular: 1 in. thickness or as recommended by material

manufacturer.

F. Insulation of Piping Exposed to Weather: Protect outdoor insulation from weather byinstalling outdoor protective finish or jacketing as recommended by the manufacturer.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING INSULATION


B. Install insulation on pipe systems subsequent to installation of heat tracing, painting,testing, and acceptance of tests.

C. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Insulate each continuous run ofpiping with full-length units of insulation, with single cut piece to complete run. Do not usecut pieces or scraps abutting each other.

D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together toensure complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.

E. Maintain integrity of vapor-barrier jackets on pipe insulation, and protect to preventpuncture or other damage.

F. Cover valves, fittings and similar items in each piping system with equivalent thickness andcomposition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut orjob fabricated units (at Installer's option) except where specific form or type is indicated.

G. Extend piping insulation without interruption through walls, floors and similar pipingpenetrations, except where otherwise indicated.

H. Butt pipe insulation against pipe hanger insulation inserts. For hot pipes, apply 3 in. widevapor barrier tape or band over the butt joints. For cold piping apply wet coat of vaporbarrier lap cement on butt joints and seal joints with 3 in. wide vapor barrier tape or band.

I. Do NOT insulate over pipe hangers. If pipe hangers for piping to be insulated are notadequately sized for insulation to pass through the hanger, notify the General Contractorand Architect.

3.4 INSULATION EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. Protect outdoor insulation from weather by installation of weather-barrier metal jacketing. Metal jacketing shall be Aluminum. It may be factory-applied or field applied. Joints shallbe overtapped a minimum of 2 in. Securement shall be accomplished by using screws,rivets, or stainless steel bands. Any vapor-barrier jacket or coating under the metaljacketing shall not be disturbed or punctured by the use of screws or rivets on the outerjacket.








BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM (BCS) 23 09 23

SECTION 23 09 23

BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEM (BCS)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL

A. All work shall be in accordance with Division 01 and Section 23 00 10 "BASICMECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS".

1.2 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and services for a fully integrated BuildingControl System (BCS) as indicated, in accordance with the Contract Documents.

B. The BCS shall fully integrate third-party manufacturers control subsystems (i.e., boilers,chillers, etc.), which shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode, while beingsoftware integrated to comprise the complete BCS.

C. Deliver the following features, hardware, and functions as a minimum:

1. One Network Control Panel (NCP) for each major piece of equipment such as chillers,boilers, cooling towers, etc.

2. One Application Specific Controller (ASC) for each air-handling unit, packaged rooftopunit, make-up air unit, fan coil unit, etc.

3. Integration to third-party manufacturers’ microprocessor controllers, as specifiedherein.

4. Furnish and install all sensors, transducers, and controlled devices per thisspecification.

5. Furnish all automatic control valves and control dampers for installation by theMechanical Installer. Furnish and install all control damper and control valveactuators.

6. All monitoring, controlling, optimizing, interfacing, reporting, archiving, operatorinterface and information formulation and other special packages as required by theContract Documents, including but not limited to the following:a. Scheduled stop/start.b. Optimum start/stop.c. Run time totalization.d. Duty cycling.e. Power demand control.f. Load restoration following a fire alarm.g. Automatic alarm lockout.h. Password access control.i. Graphics display.j. Dynamic graphical trending.k. Historical data recording and reporting.

1.3 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS

A. An integrated BCS will only be considered for acceptance from the following companies:


1. Reliable Controls – Installed by Enviro-Matic Systems – Contact Sid Ellis972-206-2590

B. The BCS shall be installed by competent mechanics and commissioned by competenttechnicians regularly employed by the equipment vendor.

C. Provide installation, calibration, and check-out of the stand-alone subsystems; as well asthe complete operation of the integrated BCS, including graphics generation,implementation of point history feature and energy management applications.

D. Maintain local support facility with technical staff, spare parts inventory, and all necessarytest diagnostic equipment.

1.4 REFERENCED STANDARDS, CODES, AND ORDINANCES

A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to be familiar with all codes, rules, ordinances, andregulations of the authority having jurisdiction and their interpretations that are in effect atthe site of the work.

B. All systems equipment, components, accessories, and installation hardware shall be newand free from defects and shall be UL listed where applicable. All components shall be incurrent production and shall be a standard product of the system or device manufacturer. Refurbished or reconditioned components are unacceptable. Each component shall bearthe make, model number, device tag number (if any), and the UL label as applicable. Allsystem components of a given type shall be the product of the same manufacturer.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide submittal data as referenced in Division 01 and Section 23 00 10 of these ContractDocuments.

B. Shop drawings shall include the installation details for all equipment to be furnished orprovided under this Contract. At minimum, the shop drawings shall include details of:

1. BCS architecture schematic (riser diagram).

2. Interconnection and installation drawings and schedules, including bill of materials andsequences of operation.

3. Field panel layout, plan location and interconnection drawings and specificationsheets.

4. Proposed panel loading and spare capacity.

5. Location and sizes for sleeves in walls and floors.

6. Instrumentation locations marked on Mechanical Drawings.

7. Schematic of monitored/controlled systems indicating device locations.

8. Device installation details.

9. Other documentation as appropriate.


C. Product data submittals shall include the specifications for all equipment and software to befurnished or provided under this Contract. In addition, the submittals shall include detailsof:

1. Software and special packages.

2. Computer equipment and terminal specification sheets.

3. Field sensors and instrumentation specification sheets.

4. Damper, valve and actuator specifications sheets.

5. Proposed graphic schematics of mechanical and other systems.

6. Wiring specifications.

7. Format of point/function log sheet.

8. Other documentation as appropriate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

A. The BCS shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions including equipmentsupervision and control, alarm management, energy management, lighting control,information management, and historical data collection and archiving as well as trending.

B. The BCS shall consist of the following:

1. Network Control Panels (NCPs)

2. Application Specific Controllers (HVAC, TUC, etc.)

3. Portable Operator Terminals

4. PC-Based Operator Workstations

C. System shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion of both capacity andfunctionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, Network Control Panels, andoperator devices.

D. System architectural design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarmreporting and control execution. Each NCP and ASC shall operate independently byperforming its own specified control, alarm management, operator I/O, and historical datacollection as well as trending. The failure of any single component or network connectionshall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices.

E. Network Control Panels shall be able to access any data from, or send control commandsand alarm reports directly to, any other controller on the network without dependence upona central processing device, such as a central file server. Network Control Panels shallalso be able to send alarm reports to multiple operator workstations, terminals, and printerswithout dependence upon a central processing device or file server.


2.2 NETWORKING/COMMUNICATIONS

A. The design of the BCS shall network Operator workstations (fixed and portable) andNetwork Control Panels. Inherent in the system’s design shall be the ability to expand ormodify the network.

B. Local Area Network

1. Workstation/Network Control Panel Support. Operator workstations and NCPs shalldirectly reside on a single shared high-speed local area network such thatcommunications may be executed directly between controllers, directly betweenworkstations, and between controllers and workstations on a peer-to-peer basis.

2. Dynamic Data Access. All operator devices, either network resident or connected viadial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application reportdata or execute control functions for any and all other devices via the local areanetwork. Access to data shall be based upon logical identification of buildingequipment.

3. General Network Design. Network design shall include the following provisions:a. High-speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from

multiple controllers, and upload/download efficiency between network devices.b. Support of any combination of controllers and Operator workstations directly

connected to the local area network.c. Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of workstations, NCP,

or the network media. The network shall include provisions for automaticallyre-configuring itself to allow all operational equipment to perform their designatedfunctions as effectively as possible in the event of single or multiple failures.

d. Message and alarm buffering to prevent information from being lost.e. Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity.f. Default device definition to prevent loss of alarms or data and to ensure alarms

are reported as quickly as possible in the event an operator device does notrespond.

g. Automatic synchronization for the real-time clocks in all NCPs and ASCs shall beprovided.

C. Dial-Up Communications. Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided toallow Network Control Panels to communicate with remote operator devices on anintermittent basis via telephone lines.

1. Dial-Up Network Control Panels. Auto-dial panels shall automatically place calls toworkstations to report critical alarms or to upload trend and historical information forarchiving. The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, “no-answers,” and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called whencommunications cannot be established with primary devices.

2. Dial-Up Workstations. Operators at dial-up workstations shall be able to perform allcontrol functions, all report functions, and all database generation and modificationfunctions as described for workstations connected via the local area network. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls and either file or displayinformation sent from remote NCP.

3. Modem Characteristics. Dial-up communications shall utilize Hayes compatible 56Kbaud modems and voice or digital grade telephone lines. Each NCP may have its ownmodem, or a group of NCPs may share a modem.


2.3 NETWORK CONTROL PANELS

A. Network Control Panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, real-timedigital control processors. Each NCP shall consist of modular hardware with plug-inenclosed processors, communication, controllers, power supplies, and input/outputmodules. A sufficient number of controllers shall be provided to fully meet the requirementsof this specification and the attached point list. A 20% installed spare capacity of eachpoint type (AI, AO, DI, DO) shall be provided at each NCP as part of the base bid. TheBCS point capacity shall be capable of being expanded by 200% by the addition of NCPsand ASCs. The BCS shall also support an additional two workstations above thosespecified herein.

B. Each NCP shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databasesincluding:

1. DDC and other control Processes

2. Energy Management Applications

3. Alarm Management

4. Historical/Trend Data for all points

5. Maintenance Support Applications

6. Custom Processes

7. Operator I/O

8. Dial-Up Communications

9. Manual Override Monitoring

C. Each NCP shall support the following types of point inputs and outputs:

1. Digital inputs for status/alarm contacts.

2. Digital outputs for on/off equipment control.

3. Analog inputs for temperature, pressure, humidity, flow, and position measurements.

4. Analog outputs for valve and damper modulation, and capacity control of primaryequipment.

5. Pulse inputs for pulsed contact monitoring.

D. The BCS shall be modular in nature and shall permit expansion through the addition ofsoftware applications, workstation hardware, field controllers, sensors, and actuators. Thesystem architecture shall support 200% expansion capacity of all types of DDC panels andall point types included in the initial installation.

E. Network Control Panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication portsfor simultaneous operation of operator I/O devices such as industry standard printers,laptop workstations, PC workstations, modems and portable operator terminals.

F. Surge and transient protection shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as allfield point terminations, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with UL 1449.


G. In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of all NetworkControl Panels to prevent the loss of database or operating system software. Non-volatilememory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and batterybackup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for aminimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the NCP shall automaticallyresume full operation without manual intervention.

2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES

A. General

1. All necessary software to form a complete operating system as described in thisspecification shall be provided.

2. The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part ofthe NCP or ASC and shall not be dependent upon any higher-level computer forexecution.

B. Control Software Description

1. Control Algorithms. The NCP and ASC shall have the ability to perform the followingcontrol algorithms:a. Two-Position Controlb. Proportional Controlc. Proportional plus Integral Controld. Proportional, Integral, plus Derivative Controle. Adaptive Control Loop Tuning

2. Equipment Cycling Protection. Control software shall include a provision for limitingthe number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hourperiod. Minimum equipment cycle times shall be coordinated with the equipmentmanufacturer.

3. Equipment Delays. The system shall provide protection against excessive demandsituations during start-up periods by automatically introducing time delays betweensuccessive start commands to electrical loads.

4. Powerfail Motor Restart. Upon the resumption of normal power, the NCP and ASCpanels shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normaloccupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normaloperation.

C. Energy Management Applications

1. NCP and ASC panels shall have the ability to perform the following energymanagement routines:a. Scheduled stop/startb. Optimum start/stop.c. Run time totalization.d. Duty cycling.e. Power demand control.f. Night Setback Control.g. Enthalpy or Dry Bulb Economizer.h. Chilled Water Reset.i. Heating/Cooling Interlocks.j. Supply Air Temperature Reset.k. Hot Water Reset.


2. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator interventionand shall be flexible to allow operator customization. Programs shall be applied tobuilding equipment as described in the Execution portion of this specification and inthe I/O point sheets.

D. Custom Process Programming Capability. NCP and ASC shall be able to execute custom,job-specific processes defined by the operator to automatically perform calculations andspecial control routines.

1. Process Inputs and Variables. It shall be possible to use any of the following in acustom process:a. Any system-measured point data or statusb. Any calculated datac. Any results from other processesd. User-defined constantse. Arithmetic functions (+, -, *, /, square root, exponential, etc.)f. Boolean logic operators (and, or, exclusive or, etc.)g. On-delay/Off-delay/One-shot timers

2. Process Triggers. Custom processes may be triggered based on any combination ofthe following:a. Time intervalb. Time of dayc. Dated. Other processese. Time programmingf. Events (e.g., point alarms)

E. Alarm Management. Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and directalarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each NCP and ASC shall performdistributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions dueto non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At notime shall the NCP or ASC panel’s ability to report alarms be affected by either operatoractivity at a PC workstation or local I/O device, or communications with other controllers onthe network.

1. Point Change Report Description. All alarm or point change reports shall include thepoint’s English language description, and the time and date of occurrence.

2. Prioritization. The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for eachpoint. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operatorresponse to critical alarms. A minimum of five priority levels shall be provided.

3. Report Routing. Alarm reports, messages, and files will be directed to a user-definedlist of operator devices or PC disk files used for archiving alarm information. Alarmsshall also be automatically directed to a default device in the event a primary device isfound to be off-line.

4. Alarm Messages. In addition to the point’s descriptor and the time and date, the usershall be able to print, display, or store an 80-characer alarm message to more fullydescribe the alarm condition or direct operator response.

5. Transaction Logging. Operator commands and system events shall be automaticallylogged to disk in personal computer industry standard database format. Operatorcommands initiated from direct-connected workstations, dial-up workstations andportable Operator workstation shall all be logged to this transaction file. This datashall be available at the Operator workstation(s).


F. Historical Data and Trend Analysis. A variety of historical data collection utilities shall beprovided to automatically sample, store, and display system data in all of the followingways:

1. Continuous Point Histories. Network Control Panels shall store point history files forall analog and digital points. Sufficient memory shall be provided within each NCP andASC to accommodate all historical data collection described in this section.

2. The point history routine shall continuously and automatically sample the value of allanalog inputs at intervals determined by the Operator. Samples for all points shall bestored for the past 24 hours to allow the user to immediately analyze equipmentperformance and all problem-related events for the past day. Point history files for allpoints shall include a continuous record of the last ten status changes or commandsfor each point.

3. Extended Sample Period Trends. Measured and calculated analog and binary datashall also be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collectingoperator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervalsof 1 minute to 2 hours shall be provided. Each NCP, ASC and portable Operatorworkstation shall have dedicated memory buffers/hard disk space for trend data.

4. Data Storage and Archiving. Trend data shall be stored at the Network Control Panelsand uploaded to hard disk storage when archival is desired.

G. Runtime Totalization. Network Control Panels shall automatically accumulate and storeruntime hours for binary input and output points as specified in the Execution portion of thisspecification.

H. Analog/Pulse Totalization. Network Control Panels shall automatically sample, calculate,and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected analogand binary pulse input-type points.

I. Event Totalization. Network Control Panels shall have the ability to count events such asthe number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off. Event totalization shall beperformed on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis.

2.5 APPLICATION SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS

A. HVAC Controllers.

1. Each Network Control Panel shall be able to extend its performance and capacitythrough the use of remote Application Specific Controllers (ASCs).

2. Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specifiedcontrol responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASCshall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, and real-time digital control processor.

3. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and databases including:a. Control Processesb. Energy Management Applications

4. The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through anynetwork-resident PC workstation or portable Operator’s workstation connected to anyNCP in the network.


5. Powerfail Protection. All system set points, proportional bands, control algorithms, andany other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of anyduration does not necessitate reprogramming the controller.

6. Configuration Upload and Download. The ASCs shall have the capability of receivingconfiguration and program loading by all of the following: 1) locally, via a direct connectportable laptop service tool, 2) over the network, from the portable laptop service tool;and 3) from the Operator Workstation(s), via the communication networks.

7. Continuous Zone Temperature Histories. Application Specific Controllers shall havethe capability to automatically and continuously maintain a history of the associatedzone temperature to allow users to quickly analyze space comfort and equipmentperformance for the past 24 hours. A minimum of two samples per hour shall bestored in the ASC or shall be uploaded to the associated NCP or OperatorWorkstation.

2.6 INTEGRATION WITH THIRD-PARTY MANUFACTURER CONTROLLERS

A. Interoperability With Equipment Controllers.

1. The BCS shall be capable of interoperating with multiple building systems supplied bydifferent manufacturers. The BCS shall be able to receive, react to, and sendinformation from/to multiple equipment controllers.

2. The system shall allow the custom generation of third-party vendor code on a locallevel to permit any system to be fully integrated into the BCS network.

3. Input and output points from the third-party controllers shall have real-timeinteroperability with BCS software features such as Control Software, EnergyManagement, Custom Process Programming, Alarm Management, Historical Dataand Trend Analysis, Totalization, and Dial-Up and Local Area NetworkCommunications, as described previously in the contract documents.

B. Networking/Communications.

1. The BCS shall support any combination of third-party controllers (if more than onethird-party manufacturer is being integrated) on a single network.

2. A minimum of 100 third-party controllers shall be supported on a single network, or asdictated by the third party system architecture.

3. Integration shall be by RS-232 or RS-485 technologies.

C. Verify and diagnose communication messages and point information between third-partycontrollers and the BCS.

D. The BCS shall be able to monitor and control third-party controller point inputs and outputsas defined in the I/O point schedule.

2.7 OPERATOR INTERFACE

A. Basic Interface Description.

1. Operator workstation interface software shall minimize Operator training through theuse of English language prompting, English language point identification, and industrystandard PC application software. The system shall utilize any one of the followingoperating systems:


a. Microsoft Windowsb. Any system that utilizes a DOS operating system will not be acceptable.

2. At the option of the user, portable and permanent workstations shall provide consistentgraphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described inthis specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, andapplication naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices.

3. The Operator Interface shall provide simultaneous viewing of several different types ofsystem displays in a windowing environment to speed facility operation and analysis. For example, the interface shall provide the ability to simultaneously display a graphicdepicting an air-handling unit, while displaying the trend graph of several associatedspace temperatures to allow the user to analyze system performance.

4. Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/managerto limit workstation control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as hedeems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password.a. A minimum of five levels of access shall be supported.b. Operators shall be able to perform only those commands available for their

respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device,including portable or panel mounted devices, and shall be limited to only thoseitems defined for the access level of the password used to log-on.

c. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be providedto prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices on-line.

5. Reports shall be generated automatically or manually and directed to workstationdisplays, printers, or disk files. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easilyobtain the following types of reports:a. A general listing of all points in the networkb. List all points currently in alarmc. List of all off-line pointsd. List all points currently in override statuse. List of all disabled pointsf. List all points currently in alarm lockoutg. List all weekly schedulesh. List all holiday programmingi. List of limits and dead bands

6. Third-party interface system data, including transactions, alarms totalization files, etc.,shall be stored on the portable workstation disk drive in an industry standard databaseformat (e.g., dBase IV, SQL) such that it is compatible with off-the-shelf third-partydatabase and spreadsheet programs.

7. The BCS shall interface to off-the-shelf personal computer software programs (e.g.,Microsoft Word for Windows, Microsoft Excel, Lotus, etc.). This interface shallconform to Dynamic Data Exchange (DDE) protocols and standards. The user shallhave the ability to “link” the computer programs directly to live, real-time BCS datavalues. Systems that offer data exchange using only historical, disk-residentinformation shall not be acceptable. BCS data value “reads” and “writes” shall both bepermissible.

B. Provide Dynamic Color Graphic Displays as follows:

1. System schematics (for each piece of mechanical equipment including air handlingunits, chilled water systems, and hot water boiler systems).

2. Site plans showing all lighting systems controlled by the BCS.


3. Floor plan of each building floor showing terminal unit and temperature sensorlocations. The points displayed on the mechanical system graphic displays shall bebased on the I/O point sheets included as part of these Contract Documents.a. System Selection/Penetration. The operator interface shall allow users to access

the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetrationscheme, menu selection, or text-based commands.

b. Dynamic Data Displays. Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flowvalues, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locationsand shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operatorintervention. Values of each analog output shall be indicated on the associatedmechanical system graphic display.

c. Windowing. The windowing environment of the Operator workstation shall allowthe user to simultaneously view several graphics at the same time to analyze totalbuilding operation, or allow the display of a graphic associated with an alarm to beviewed without interrupting work in progress.

C. System Configuration and Definition. All temperature and equipment control strategies andenergy management routines shall be definable by the Operator. System definition andmodification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.

2.8 INSTRUMENTATION

A. Temperature Sensors/Transducers.

1. Provide only one of the following temperature sensor types throughout:a. 1000-ohm, (0.2%) thin film platinum.b. 100-ohm, (0.2 ohm) platinum.c. 1000-ohm, (0.2%) nickel.d. Thermistor (100 or 1000 ohm)

2. All temperature sensors shall be constructed as follows:a. Shielded cable with a single end grounded.b. Waterproof sensor to sheath seal.c. Strain minimizing construction.

3. All sensors provided shall meet the following overall end-to-end accuracyrequirements whether or not temperature transducers are provided, under all normalbuilding ambient conditions:a. Temperatures less than 100ºF shall be reported by the BCS with an accuracy of

0.5ºF.b. Temperatures greater than 100ºF shall be reported by the BCS with an accuracy

of 1.0ºF.c. Averaging temperature sensors shall be reported by the BCS with an accuracy of

1.0ºF.d. Drift shall not exceed the accuracy requirements over a 5-year period.

4. Thermowell mount elements shall meet the following additional requirements.a. Stainless steel sheath suitable for the pressure rating of the system.b. Length shall be suitable for application.c. Furnish thermowells and all other accessories required for the temperature

sensor. The Mechanical Installer shall supply Wells for installation. Thermowellsshall be stainless steel or chrome plated brass construction of size to suit sensorand pipe and shall be rated for the maximum pressure imposed on the variouswater systems. Verify and certify that the material of construction will not causeany galvanic corrosion.


d. Each chilled or hot water supply temperature sensor shall be matched to within0.2ºF over the range of 32ºF to 68ºF with the associated return water temperaturesensor.

5. Outside air temperature sensor shall meet the following additional requirements:a. Complete with non-corroding outdoor shield designed to minimize the effect of

solar heating on the temperature sensor element.b. Water proof seal.c. Threaded fittings for mating to conduit.d. Outside air temperature sensors shall be wired to different NCP. If one sensor or

the associated NCP fails the other shall automatically take its place so thatsequences of operation that are dependent on this parameter continue to beexecuted. Sensors shall be located as approved by the Architect/Engineer.

6. Duct mounted temperature sensors shall meet the following additional requirements:a. Copper sheathed construction.b. Length shall be such that the element is between 1/3 and 2/3 the distance across

the duct from all sides.c. Ascertain the recommended location of supply air temperature sensors from the

air handling unit manufacturer.

7. Provide averaging temperature sensors where duct mounted temperature sensors areused to sense mixed air temperature or coil discharge temperature and thecross-sectional area of the duct is 12 square ft. or greater. Averaging temperaturesensors shall meet the following requirements:a. Copper sheathed construction. Standard conduit box termination. Lead

connections shall be rugged.b. Probe shall have a minimum-bending radius of 12 in.c. Probe shall have a minimum immersion length of 12 ft. or a minimum length of

one foot per square foot of duct, whichever is greater.d. Probe shall be single continuous sensing RTD or shall be multiple RTD or

thermistor sensors spaced no further apart than 6 in.e. Provide suitable supports at all bends and elsewhere as necessary to ensure that

the sensor is held firmly in position and will not incur damage from vibration in theair stream. Support shall be provided, at minimum, every 24 in. in addition tosupport at bends.

8. If required, RTD temperature transducers to be provided having the followingminimum specifications:a. Input circuit to accept resistance detectors as specified above.b. Output signal of 4-20mA into maximum of 500-ohm load. Output signal shall be

proportional to the engineering range detailed in the Point Sheets.c. Output short circuit and open circuit protection.d. Input short circuit and open circuit protection.e. Output variation of less than 0.2% of full-scale output for supply voltage variations

of 10%.f. Combined non-linearity, repeatability and hysterisis effects not to exceed 0.5% of

full-scale output.g. Maximum current to sensor not to exceed manufacturers suggested rating.h. Integral, accessible zero and span adjustments.i. Long term output drift of equal to or less than 0.50% of full-scale output per year.j. Shock and vibration protection as necessary.

B. Control Relays

1. Provide interposing control relays having, at minimum, the following specifications:a. Pickup rating time and hold rating as required for individual applications.b. Input operating voltage to be compatible with the BCS digital output equipment.


c. Shock and vibration protection as necessary.d. Rated for a minimum of ten (10 million mechanical operations and a minimum of

500,000 electrical operations.

2. The control relays shall be located in the NCP or other local panels as provided by theBCS Installer.

3. The relays shall provide complete isolation between the motor starter, damperactuator or valve actuator, control circuit and the associated BCS digital output.

4. Select control relays such that they meet the following requirements.a. The malfunction of an NCP/ASC component shall cause the motor to fail on or off

or maintain previous status as identified in the Sequences of Operation.b. Following the resumption of power after power interruption to a motor, the motor

shall not restart until commanded to do so by the BCS in accordance with apredetermined start-up procedure.

c. If a motor is detected by the BCS to have failed, i.e. its BCS monitored andcommanded status differ, then the BCS shall shut down the motor and restartshall only be possible (when the HOA switch is in the “Auto”) by a manuallyentered restart command at the BCS.

5. Where hand-off-auto (HOA) switches are provided, the BCS digital output shall bewired such that control of the motor is from the BCS in the auto position only.

6. Other interlocks providing safety control, e.g. shutdown on high temperature/vibrationdetection, etc., shall not be overridden by the BCS control relays or the installation ofthe control relays.

C. Differential Pressure Switches - Air Service

1. Provide differential pressure air switches as follows:a. SPDT switch action or two (2) SPST switches rated for 10 amps minimum at 120

Vac.b. Set point trip adjustment over, at minimum, of operating range. Dead band

adjustment down to, at maximum, 10% of operating range.c. Operating range of 1.0 in. W. C. to 3.0 in. W. C. for fans with a total static

pressure rating of 2.5 in. W. C. or less and 2.0 in. W. C. to 6.0 in. W. C. for fanshaving a total static pressure rating of greater than 2.5 in. W. C. Operating rangeof 0 to 1.0 in. W. C. for filter status applications.

d. Shock and vibration protection as necessary.e. Materials and construction suitable for application.f. Manual reset shall be provided for air differential pressure switches used in high

positive and negative pressure output applications. High differential pressureswitches shall be provided for all VAV AHU.

g. Air differential pressure switches used in filter status applications shall beequipped with an analog gauge. Gauge shall indicate actual differential pressureand differential pressure set point of switch.

2. High differential pressure switches shall be wired in series with other safety devices tothe respective motor starter.

D. Freezestats

1. Provide freezestats with a minimum 20-ft. vapor tension element, which shallserpentine, the inlet face on all air handling unit cooling which receive unconditionedoutside air. One or more of these devices shall be provided and wired in series inorder to provide one linear foot of coil surface area.


2. The freezestats shall have a manual reset. It shall not be possible for the switch toreset until the duct temperature has increased by at least 10ºF above the set point.

3. Hardwire interlock to the associated fan so that fan will shut down when HOT switch isin Hand or Auto position. Provide time delay relays with minimum two (2) minute timedelay duration to minimize nuisance freezestats trips.

4. Cut out temperature shall be adjustable in the range of, at minimum, 32ºF to 40ºF.

E. Current Sensing Relays

1. Provide current sensing relays as follows:a. Solid core current transducer.b. Switching range suitable for the application.c. Self-powered transducer.d. Normally open status contacts.e. Hysteresis amperage of no less than 0.2 amps.

F. Restrictors

1. Provide on-line restrictors, between damper and valve actuators and transducers,where necessary, to ensure a smooth and orderly operation of actuators as follows:a. Suitable for ambient temperatures to 120ºF at a minimum.b. Pressure rating of a minimum of 50 psi.c. Material of construction suitable for instrument air services.d. Orifice suitably sized for application. Where doubt exists as to required orifice

size install restrictor having an adjustable orifice.

2.9 AUTOMATIC VALVES - GENERAL

A. Furnish all valves shown on the Mechanical Drawings and/or described in the sequences ofoperation as automatic control valves. The Mechanical Installer shall install valves. Allother valves such as check valves, relief valves, pressure reducing valves, self-regulatingvalves, manually operated valves, etc. shall be furnished and installed by the MechanicalInstaller. Provide details of the manufacturer’s installation requirements to the MechanicalInstaller. Refer to the mechanical drawings for the design conditions on which to basesizing and ratings of the valves and their actuators.

B. All valves shall be in accordance with ANSI B16.10, and ANSI B16.34 as appropriate andall other applicable standards. At minimum, valves shall meet ANSI Class 150 ratings andvalves detailed to have minimum working pressure ratings in excess of 150 psig shall, atminimum, meet ANSI Class 300 ratings. Where there is a conflict between ANSI, andother applicable standards, the most stringent shall apply. All valves shall be tested to aminimum of 1.5 times the maximum working pressure rating.

C. Valves shall have the manufacturer’s name and the pressure rating clearly marked on theoutside of the body. Where this is not possible manufacturer’s name and valve pressurerating shall be engraved on a minimum 2-in. diameter stainless steel tag that shall beattached to the valve by a chain in such a manner that it cannot be unintentionally removed.

D. Valves up to 2 in. in size shall have screwed ends. Valves 2.5 in. and larger shall haveflanged ends. Flanged valves shall be furnished complete with companion flanges, gasketsand bolting materials. Flanges, gaskets and boiling materials shall meet the requirementsof ASME/ANSI B16.3, B16.5, B16.9, B16.11 and all other relevant standards.


E. Valves shall be suitable for continuous throttling. Control valves shall be selected so thatthe cavitations does not occur over the full operating range of the valve at the systemdifferential pressures. The control valve assembly shall be capable of tight shut-off whenoperating at system pressure with the system pump operating at shut-off head.

F. Valve schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly show the following for eachvalve:

1. Associated system.

2. Manufacturer and model number.

3. Size.

4. Flow rate, flow coefficient – (CV) and pressure drop at design conditions.

5. Valve configuration (e.g. two way, three way, butterfly).

6. Leakage rate.

7. Maximum pressure shut-off capability.

8. Actuator manufacturer and model number.

9. Valve body pressure and temperature rating.

10. Normally open/closed and failure positions.

G. Control Valves

1. Three-way valves shall be suitable for chilled water and hot water service and shallmeet the following minimum requirements.a. Modulating design with V-port parabolic or linear plug and stainless steel trim.b. Leakage rate shall not exceed 0.01% of the valve CV from inlet to an outlet port

at pump shut-off head when this valve is closed to flow through that outlet port.c. Valve body material shall be cast iron or carbon steel with stainless steel trim.d. Valve seats shall be metal, ceramic filled PTFE or equivalent and must assure

tight seating.

2. Pressure drop through modulating control valves shall not exceed 8 psig.

H. Valve Actuators

1. All valves shall be provided with electric actuators. Actuators shall be sized to meetthe shut-off requirements when operating at the maximum system differential pressureand with the installed system pump operating at shut-off head. Actuators shall controlagainst system maximum working pressures.

2. All two-way control valves on heating coils shall fail closed upon a loss of power, or asindicated in the Sequences of Operation. The three-way control valves shall failclosed to flow through the coil. Butterfly valves shall fail in the previous position.

3. Actuators shall have visual mechanical position indication, showing output shaft andvalve position. The actuator shall be capable of operating the valve from the fullyclosed to the fully open position and vice versa in less than two minutes.

4. Actuators shall be constructed to withstand high shock and vibration withoutoperations failure. The actuator cover shall be die cast aluminum or material ofequivalent strength and have captive bolts to eliminate loss of bolts when removing thecover from the base. Materials of construction shall be non-corroding.


5. Actuators and valves shall be mounted and installed only in the positions approved bythe manufacturer. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate the acceptable positions.

6. Valve actuators shall be of the magnetic or motor driven type. Valve stem positionshall be adjustable in increments of one (1) percent or less of full stem travel.a. Motor driven actuators shall have an integral self-locking gear train, mechanical

travel stops and two adjustable travel limit switches with electrically isolatedcontacts; gear assembly shall be made of hardened steel. Motor drive actuatorsshall be rated for continuous duty and have an input voltage of 120 Vac, 60 Hz. Disassembly of the gears shall not be required to remove the motor. Actuatormotor shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance.

b. Magnetic actuators shall be rated for continuous duty and shall have a controlsignal compatible with the analog output subsystem.

2.10 DAMPERS - GENERAL

A. Furnish all automatic dampers (AD), as indicted on the Mechanical Drawings. Fusible linkdampers for fire protection (FD), smoke dampers (SD) fire smoke dampers (FSD), andmanual dampers (MD) for balancing, back draft dampers (BD) and dampers which arespecified as part of a factory built air handling unit or terminal unit are not furnished by theBCS Installer. The Mechanical Installer shall install all dampers. Provide details of themanufacturer’s installation requirements to the Mechanical Installer.

B. Provide damper actuators for all dampers that are furnished as part of this Contract. Where practical actuators shall be factory mounted.

C. Dampers incorporating multiple sections shall be controlled in unison. Where more thanone actuator serves a damper, then the actuators shall be driven in unison and the controlwiring shall be provided accordingly. Damper sections shall not exceed sixteen (16) squareft. in face area. Damper jackshafts are not acceptable for controlling multiple dampersections.

D. Dampers incorporating multiple sections shall be designed in such a way that the actuators,whether externally or internally mounted, are accessible without difficulty. Under nocircumstances shall it be necessary to remove damper sections, or structural or otherfixtures to facilitate removal of damper motors. Provide access doors where necessary tomeet this requirement. In particular ensure that where in-air stream actuators are providedthey are readily accessible.

E. For all AD, FSD, and SD that are interlocked to a fan motor(s), the BCS Installer shall wirebetween the MCC or local starter and the damper actuator. Dampers interlocked to fanmotors shall be driven open and spring closed unless otherwise indicated in the ContractDocuments. The 120 Vac power supply originating from the MCC or local starter shall beused to power the damper where possible. If the damper is indicated to be spring open anddriven closed or requires a separate power source then the BCS Installer shall provide thenecessary interposing relays and shall obtain the power supply to hold the damper closedfrom the nearest available power panel. The BCS Installer shall wire between the AD, FSDor SD position indicator switch, whose contacts shall be rated for a load up to 10 amps at120 Vac, and the MCC or local starter. The damper position indicator switch contacts shallbe closed when the damper is fully open and open when the damper is not fully open. TheFire Alarm System control of interlocked dampers shall be via the fan motor starter.

F. Automatic Dampers

1. Automatic Dampers (AD) shall be factory fabricated.


2. Damper frames shall be constructed of 16-gauge thick welded galvanized steelchannel, or 1/8 in. thick extended aluminum channel. Frames in excess of 3 ft. by 3ft., shall have corner braces or equivalent means of strengthening to ensuresquareness and rigidity. Channel dimensions shall be a minimum of 5 in. by 1 in. Frames shall be constructed for flanged ductwork connection. “Slip-In” (insertion) typedampers shall not be acceptable. Frames shall be sized to match the final dimensionsof the ducts including allowance where applicable, for the duct lining materials. Coordinate required installation details with Mechanical Installer. The BCS Installershall be responsible for coordination of correct sizing for damper assemblies furnishedas part of this Contract. Blade stops shall not extend more than 1/2 in. into the airstream.

3. Damper blades shall be constructed of:a. Galvanized sheet steel of minimum 21-gauge thickness with a minimum of four

(4) breaks running the entire length of the blade.b. Double galvanized sheet steel of minimum 22-gauge thickness per sheet. Sheets

shall be formed with a minimum of four (4) breaks in each sheet running theentire length of the blade. Sheets shall be spot welded together, or

c. Airfoil shaped double skin-galvanized steel constructed from minimum 14-gaugethick galvanized sheet steel.

d. Airfoil shaped double skin-extruded aluminum constructed from minimum16-gauge thick sheet.

4. Maximum width for galvanized steel blades shall not exceed 8 in. and for aluminumshall not exceed 6 in. Maximum blade length shall not exceed 48 in.

5. Blade edge seals shall be field replaceable and shall be one of the following:a. Neopreneb. Vinylc. Polyurethaned. Silicone rubbere. Synthetic elastomer

6. Blade end (side) seals shall be one of the following:a. Continuous spring stainless steel stripb. Synthetic elastomerc. Flexible aluminum compression type.

7. Damper sections shall be installed such that the blades are horizontal.

8. Damper axles shall be constructed of:a. Minimum 1/2 in. square zinc plated steel with non-slip between blade and axle.b. Minimum 1/2 in. hexagon zinc plated steel with non-slip locking between blade

and axle.c. Minimum 1/2 in. diameter zinc plated steel fastened to the blades with bolts

through the axle, rivets or welds to ensure non-slip locking between blade andaxle.

9. Damper axle bearings shall be one of the following:a. Oil impregnated sintered bronzeb. Stainless steel sleeve

10. Linkage that interconnects blades shall be corrosion resistant steel and shall belocated on the face of the damper in the air stream or shall be concealed in the frame. Linkages shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

11. Control shaft shall be as specified above and shall extend beyond the frame asnecessary to match up with actuator or actuator linkage as applicable.


12. Modulating dampers shall be of the opposed blade type. Two position dampers shallbe of either the parallel or opposed blade type.

13. Multiple section dampers shall bolt together to form a rigid structure free from twistingor bending.

14. The two diagonal measurements from upper to lower opposite corners of the installeddamper assembly, including multiple section dampers, shall not differ by more than0.15 in. or 0.2 percent, whichever is greater.

15. The free area ratio, i.e. the open area in a damper assembly, including in-air streamactuators, divided by the total duct area shall not be less than 0.75 for velocities above1500 fps and 0.6 for velocities below 1500 fps. This shall apply to both single andmultiple damper section assemblies.

16. Maximum leakage rate through a 48 in. by 48 in. closed automatic damper shall notexceed 10 CFM per square foot of overall damper face area at 4 in. W.C. pressuredifferential with a maximum closing torque not exceeding that applied by the actuatorprovided for the damper. The leakage rate of the field-installed damper shall notexceed the rate specified above. Dampers shall be rated for the maximum air streamface velocity that they will experience during normal operation.

17. Damper schedules shall be submitted for review and shall clearly indicate the followingfor each damper:a. Associated system.b. Manufacturer and model number.c. Mechanical drawing reference.d. Damper size for each section.e. Parallel or opposed blade configuration.f. Actuator manufacturer and model number for each section.g. Ratio of anticipated air stream velocity to the manufacturer’s maximum

recommended velocity rating.h. Free area ratio.

18. If the automatic damper complies with these specifications, one of the followingmanufacturers will be acceptable:a. Greenheckb. Prefcoc. Ruskin

2.11 DAMPER ACTUATOR

A. Damper Actuators.

1. Provide damper actuators for all automatic control dampers, including those furnishedas part of a packaged air-handling unit.

2. Electric damper actuators used for two-position service shall be of the spring returntype. Modulating dampers shall be motorized in both directions with spring return tothe failure (de-energized) position. Unless stated otherwise in these ContractDocuments dampers shall fail to the closed position on loss of power. Damperactuators shall have a service life, at minimum, of 60,000 fully closed to fully open tofully closed operations. In addition the modulating damper actuators shall have aservice life of, at minimum, 1000 spring operations on loss of power.

3. Actuators shall stroke by the rotating motion of a reversible, overload-protectedsynchronous motor or shall be direct-coupled rotary type actuators.


4. The actuators shall be protected against overload by an integral magnetic clutch thatshall allow the motor to continue running when, for example, the actuator is stalled atthe end of its stroke or by a jammed damper. Alternatively, stall protection shall be bynon-overloading impedance protected motor.

5. Provide sufficient quantity of additional damper actuators to meet the damper leakagerequirements for the installed damper assembly. At minimum the torque providedshall be such as to meet the maximum close-off leakage requirements.

6. Provide mounting brackets suitable for extended shaft mounting or direct damper driveshaft mounting. The actuator housing shall be rugged and non-corrosive.

7. Damper actuator shall be fully accessible for ease of maintenance. Shop drawingsshall clearly indicate motor locations on multiple section damper assemblies.

8. The actuators shall stroke two position dampers from fully closed to fully open in lessthan two (2) minutes. Modulating dampers shall be driven from fully closed to fullyopen and vice versa in less than two (2) minutes. This time shall not include the initialperiod following the availability of power, not to exceed 200 seconds, which is requiredto tension the spring.

9. The control signal to the modulating damper actuators shall be compatible with theBCS analog output subsystem e.g. 4-20 mA, 0 to 10 Vdc, etc.

10. Actuators shall be as manufactured by Belimo.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All grounding, wiring, selection of components and installations shall conform to theNational Electrical Code with amendments to the date of issue of this specification.

B. The installation shall conform to each manufacturer’s recommended procedures and to allapplicable codes, statutes and ordinances and to the Contract Documents. In each andevery instance of application, the code, regulation, statute, by-law or specification havingthe most stringent requirements shall apply.

C. All installations to be performed by skilled and certified technicians.

D. All equipment installed shall be mechanically stable and, as necessary, fixed to wall or floor. Provide anti-vibration mounts, if required, for the proper isolation of the equipment.

E. Install equipment so as to allow for easy maintenance access. Install equipment such thatit does not interfere in any way with across to adjacent equipment and personnel traffic inthe surrounding space.

F. Install equipment in locations providing adequate ambient conditions for its specifiedfunctioning, allowing for adequate ventilation and with no condensate traps.

G. All components placed in areas of high humidity or potentially high humidity must beadequately protected.

H. The Contractor shall for each handling system with 2000 CFM airflow (nominal 5 Tons) orgreater, install UL listed ionization smoke detectors in the main return air duct, and/or


where shown on the drawings. Smoke detectors may be omitted from the main supply airduct when explicitly not required by local code. Smoke detectors furnished by Division 26. Refer to Section 23 05 12. Connect the detectors into the control circuit to stop the fan inthe event of the presence of smoke.

1. System airflow includes the total airflow of all units serving any single space and allunits connected to the same return air plenum.

3.2 CONDUIT, WIRING, CABLING AND FITTINGS

A. The installation shall conform to the Division 23 and 26 Contract Documents for this project.

B. All wires and cables for powering the BCS as provided shall be:

1. Ninety-eight (98) percent conductivity copper.

2. A minimum of #12 AWG for branch 120 VAC power circuits.

3. A minimum of #14 AWG for DO motor control circuits.

4. A minimum of #18 AWG for sensing, transmitter, DO (except motor control circuits)and AO control circuits. Where manufacturers recommend a heavier conductor, thenthe BCS Installer shall comply with the manufacturer’s recommendation.

5. A minimum of #20 AWG for communication trunk, shielded and grounded at a singleend.

6. Stranded copper conductors throughout for #18 AWG and smaller diameter wire.

7. Continuously color coded insulation in accordance with Section 26 05 19 entitled “Wireand Cable”.

C. Plenum rated cable shall be as specified above with the following additional requirements:

1. All plenum rated wire and cable shall be a minimum of #18 AWG and shall beshielded.

2. Cable jacket shall have a minimum thickness of 0.015 in. and shall be bright orange,red, yellow or other bright, distinctive color. Coordinate jacket color with other trades.

3. Plenum wiring and cabling shall be routed through cable rings. Cable rings shall besuitably spaced to properly support plenum cabling and shall be attached to ductworkhangers or structure as applicable.

4. Plenum cable shall be as manufactured by Belden, Kynar, Dekoron or approved equal.

D. Smaller gauge wiring shall be acceptable if certified by the equipment manufacturer. Ifcomplications arise, however, due to wiring size, replace the wire at no additional cost tothe Owner.

E. The sizing and provision of conduit and type of wire for the main BCS trunk wiring are thedesign responsibility of the BCS Installer.

F. Obtain and pay for all electrical inspection fees related to the work of this section.

G. Perform circuit tests using qualified personnel only. Provide necessary instruments andequipment to demonstrate that:

1. All circuits are continuous and free from short circuits and grounds.


2. All circuits are free from unspecified grounds; that resistance to ground of all circuits isno less than 50 megohms.

H. Provide complete testing for all wiring installed or utilized as part of this work. Provide allequipment, tools, and personnel as necessary to conduct these tests.

I. Provide complete grounding of all power and signal wiring so as to ensure system integrityof operation.

J. NCP/ASC shall not be mounted in-line with vertical conduit but shall be connected off to theside of the vertical conduit by suitably pitched conduit such that any condensed moisture inthe vertical conduit cannot enter the NCP/ASC enclosures.

K. All analog and digital input points and communication cables shall have shielded wiring. Non-shielded wiring may only be provided upon certification from the manufacturer thatnon-shielded wiring will not cause degradation of system performance and will not renderthe system more susceptible to damage. However, if complications arise from the use ofnon-shielded wiring, replace the wiring at no additional cost to the Owner.

L. BCS wiring shall not run in the same conduit as power wiring of any voltage.

M. Suitably coated wire may be used in ceiling spaces and in tenant wall partitions withoutconduit where local codes permit and the cable jacks and insulation have been acceptedunder the provisions of the National Electrical Code and have been classified by UL, Inc. For use without conduit in air plenums. Elsewhere use Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT).

N. Sleeves shall be provided by the BCS Installer where required and shall meet therequirements detailed in the Division 26 Contract Documents for this project.

O. All wiring shall be marked in accordance with the National Electrical Code. Provide thelabeling of wire at every termination. Each wire shall be identified which uniquely identifieseach wire and which corresponds to the shop Drawings and as-built Drawings providedunder this Contract.

3.3 EQUIPMENT, INSTALLATION

A. Temperature sensing wells.

1. Provide list with shop drawing of well locations to Mechanical Installer.

B. Locate temperature sensors, humidity sensors, thermostats, and humidistat for roomcontrol immediately as shown on the mechanical drawings. Prior to installation, coordinatesensor and/or thermostat locations with the Owner and Architect.

1. Prior to installation, coordinate sensor and/or thermostat locations with Owner’sRepresentative.

C. Mount local control panels on at convenient locations adjacent to equipment served.

1. Mount all relays, etc., internal to the temperature control panels.

2. Tag each instrument corresponding to symbols used on control diagrams.

D. Mounting of controllers on air handling units shall not be allowed.


E. Furnish all control valves (globe and butterfly, as applicable) to the Mechanical Installer. Mechanical Installer to install control valves per the valve manufacturer’srecommendations.

3.4 COMMISSIONING

A. BCS shall be installed and commissioned by factory-trained technicians skilled in thesetting and adjustment of BCS equipment used in this project. This technician is to beexperienced in the type of systems associated with this BCS,

B. Perform a complete and detailed calibration and operational check for each individual pointand for each individual function as contained within the BCS. These checks shall ensurethat all equipment, software, network elements, modules and circuits as provided under theterms of this contract are functioning as per the Contract Documents. Such checks shallbe carried out with the use of point/function log sheets. Point/function sheets are to beprepared by the Contactor and submitted to the Engineer for the approval of content andformat. Such calibration and operation checks shall be performed prior to thecommencement of final tests on completion for any relevant system part. Thepoint/function logs shall, at minimum, include the following:

1. Identification of each point by BCS point name and expanded descriptor.

2. Indication of BCS value/status, field-tested value/status, and deviation between theBCS and field-tested value/status.

3. Confirmation of system safeties operation.

4. Confirmation of proper failure modes of motors, dampers, valves, etc.

5. Confirmation of proper tuning of PID control loops.

6. Confirmation of proper sequence of operation performance.

7. Manufacturer, model number and accuracy of test instruments used.

8. Date of testing/verification and name of individuals performing the tests.

C. At time of final observation, demonstrate the sequence of operation for each system to theOwner and Engineer. Perform system demonstration as directed by Owner and Engineer.

3.5 WARRANTY

A. At completion of final test of installation and acceptance by Owner, provide any serviceincidental to proper performance for a period of one year.

B. Equipment shall be warranted for one year (including defects in workmanship and material)under normal use and service. During warranty period supplier shall also replace or repair,free of charge, any equipment proven to be defective in workmanship or material.

C. Certain electronic devices not manufactured by the BCS supplier such as computers, etc.,shall carry the original manufacturer’s warranty. Pass any registration and warrantydocuments and warranty rights to the Owner.


D. All software upgrades, enhancements or revisions that are initiated by the BCSmanufacturer up to the time of expiration of the warranty period shall be provided at noadditional cost to the Owner.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 23 09 93

SECTION 23 09 93

SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 specifications, apply to this section as well as Section 23 00 10"BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS".


A. The work required by this Section shall include the provision of all labor, materials,documentation and services as required by the Contract Documents for those aspects ofthe BCS installation relating to:

1. The implementation of the sequences of operation as detailed herein.

1.3 GENERAL

A. In the descriptions of the sequences of operation to be executed by the BCS, the followingshall apply:

1. Where modulation of a valve or damper is referred to then it shall mean the directdigital control of the valve or damper based on a control algorithm resident in the BCSsoftware at the NCP. Unless noted otherwise the control algorithm shall be PIDcontrol. Choose the control constants so as to provide optimum loop response.

2. An Operator having the required level of password access shall be able to modify theOperator changeable or definable parameters on-line from an I/O device such that themonitoring and control functions of the BCS shall not be affected during the period ofthe change. The mechanism by which the change is made shall be simple and shallbe adequately described in the Operator's manuals. Where setpoints for controlparameters such as temperature, humidity, Operator selection of lead/lag equipment,and modes of operation are referred to in this Section they shall be Operatorchangeable on-line on the associated VDU graphic.

3. Where the sequences refer to the start/stop of a system this shall be initiated either byan Operator manually entered command or automatically by a software routine suchas "Optimum Stop/Start", "Power Demand Control", "Programmed Stop/Start", etc. orby way of an interlock in the sequences of operation to other equipment or events.

4. When the motor controller provided by Division 23 or Division 26 is equipped with aHOA, the motors shall only be controlled by the BCS when the HOA switch is in theauto position.

5. High differential pressure switches, smoke and fire detectors and interlocked dampers(motorized control damper, smoke damper or combination fire/smoke damper) shallbe wired to shut down motors when the HOA switch is in both the hand and autopositions. It shall not be possible for the BCS to override these or any other safetydevices or any fire alarm system control functions.

6. Refer to the Point Definition Sheets, which form part of these Contract Documents, tofacilitate the interpretation of the sequences of operation as defined in this Section.


7. Provide additional I/O points and instrumentation, whether or not such points areindicated in the Point Definition Sheets, if they are required in order to attain therequirements of the Contract Documents.

8. Where fans and dampers (control dampers, smoke dampers or combinationfire/smoke dampers) are to be interlocked, provide hardwire interlocks between themotor starter and damper or software interlocks such that the damper shall be drivenopen when the motor is required to start. Motor start up shall not occur until thedamper end switch indicates the damper is in the full open position.

9. The BCS shall open the BCS motor control relay where the BCS commanded andmonitored status of the motor differ.

10. On air handling systems that are equipped with heating and cooling coils, the heatingand cooling setpoints shall be selected to avoid simultaneous heating and cooling.

11. Where there are fans not identified within the sequence of operation or point definitionsheets that provide supply and/or exhaust air that are not controlled by way of athermostat, they shall be hardwire interlocked to the controlling device as indicated inthe Division 23 or Division 26 Contract Documents. The supply fans shall be hardwireinterlocked with their associated exhaust fan (if applicable) to operate simultaneously. The dampers (control damper, smoke damper or combination fire/smoke damper)shall be hardwire interlocked with the fans by way of end switches such that the fanscannot operate when the damper is not fully open. The damper status shall not bemonitored by the BCS.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MULTIZONE AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. Each of the multizone AHU consists of a constant volume factory built air handling unit witha DX cooling coil in the cold deck, a hot water heating coil in the hot deck and multi-zonesupply header with damper operators. The system also includes a separate return air fan,split system DX condensing unit, outside air damper, return air damper and relief airdamper .

B. De-energized mode.

1. Supply fan shall be de-energized.

2. Return fan shall be de-energized.

3. Outside air damper shall be closed.

4. Condenser shall be disabled.

5. Hot deck valve shall be open.

6. Zone face and bypass dampers shall be in the full bypass position.

C. Economizer Mode

1. Supply fan shall be energized.

2. Return fan shall be energized.

3. The BCS shall compare the outside air enthalpy and the return air enthalpy and shallmodulate the outside air damper and return air damper to provide the lowest heatcontent air to the air handling unit.


4. If the mixed air temperature is below 40°F, the outside air damper shall close to theminimum outside air position.

5. When the outside air enthalpy is lower that the return air enthalpy, but the supply airtemperature setpoint cannot be satisfied, then the DX condensing unit shall bemodulated to provided supplemental cooling as needed to maintain the supply airtemperature setpoint.

6. If the outside air enthalpy is higher than the return air enthalpy, the AHU shall operateunder the normal operation mode.

7. The relief air damper shall be modulated to maintain the mixed air plenum staticpressure setpoint. Coordinate exact mixed air plenum static pressure setpoint with theTest and Balance Contractor.

8. Provide auto on off software function such that the Operator can override theeconomizer cycle operation from the associated VDU graphic.

9. Provide an Operator adjustable deadband between the economizer and normaloperating modes, initially set at 4°F.

D. Normal operation mode.

1. Supply fan shall be energized.

2. Return fan shall be energized.

3. DX condenser shall modulate to maintain a cold deck temperature of 55°F., but shallbe gradually increased by means of a suitable algorithm until such time as one of thezone face and bypass dampers is fully open to flow through the cold deck.

4. The hot deck supply air temperature setpoint shall be reset using a trim and respondalgorithm based on zone heating requirements (damper position in the zone damper).If there is a demand for heating then the setpoint shall be reset to a higher value (adj.).If the demand for heating decreases then the setpoint shall reset to a lower value(adj.). Once the zones are satisfied then the setpoint shall gradually moderate overtime to reduce heating energy use.a. The supply air temperature setpoint shall be reset based on zone heating

requirements as follows:1) The initial supply air temperature setpoint shall be 82 deg F (adj.).2) As heating demand increases, the setpoint shall incrementally reset up to a

maximum of 90 deg F (adj.).3) As heating demand decreases, the setpoint shall incrementally reset down to

a minimum of 72°f (adj.).

5. Outside air damper shall be opened to the minimum outside air position.

E. BCS component failure mode.

1. Supply fan shall be de-energized.

2. Return fan shall be de-energized.

3. DX condenser shall be disabled.

4. Outside air damper hall be closed.

5. Zone face and bypass dampers shall be in the full bypass position.

6. Generate an appropriate alarm.


2.2 HEATING HOT WATER SYSTEM

A. The heating hot water system consists of one hot water boiler and one hot water pump.

B. De-energized mode.

1. Hot water boilers shall be de-energized.

2. Hot water pumps shall be de-energized.

C. Normal operation mode.

1. Each hot water boiler shall be cycled by the internal boiler controls to maintain therespective boiler hot water supply temperature setpoint.

2. The hot water pump shall operate.

3. The BCS shall enable/disable the boilers to maintain the hot water supply temperaturesetpoint upstream of the mixing valve.

4. The boiler shall be modulated to maintain the building hot water supply temperaturesetpoint. The building hot water supply temperature shall be reset based on thefollowing linear outside air temperature reset schedule:

OUTSIDE AIR TEMPERATURE HOT WATER SUPPLY TEMPERATURE25°F 190°F55°F 120°F

As an alternate reset method, the hot water supply temperature shall be resetdownward until one of the air handling hot water heating coils is fully open. TheOperator shall be capable of choosing the desired hot water temperature reset methodfrom the associated VDU graphic.

D. BCS component failure mode.

1. Hot water boilers shall maintain their previous status.

2. Hot water pumps shall maintain their previous status.

3. Generate an appropriate alarm.

PART 3 - INSTALLATION - NOT USED


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016HYDRONIC PIPING 23 21 13.23

SECTION 23 21 13.23

HYDRONIC PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of hydronic piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and requirements ofthis section.

B. This section includes pipe, fittings, and valves for hydronic piping systems installed in theproject as follows:

1. Heating Water.

2. Miscellaneous Drain Lines.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of hydronic pipingproducts of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactoryuse in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience onprojects with hydronic piping work similar to that required for project.

C. Codes and Standards:

1. ASME Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with ASMEB31.9 "Building Services Piping".

2. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with ICBO"Uniform Mechanical Code".

3. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install hydronic piping in accordance with“International Mechanical Code.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide the following submittals in accordance with Division 01 and Section 23 00 10.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions forhydronic piping materials and products.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout Drawings of hydronic piping and fittings including,but not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes ofhorizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatialrelationship between piping and proximate equipment.

D. Submit certificates as listed below:

1. Test Certificates of Approval for Piping Systems.


E. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit Record Drawings of installed hydronic pipingand piping products, in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

F. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for hydronic piping materialsand products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record Drawings inmaintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING AND FITTINGS - GENERAL

A. Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types, pressureratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated, provideproper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.

B. Provide materials and products complying with ASME B31.9 Code for Building ServicesPiping where applicable, base pressure rating on hydronic piping systems maximum designpressures.

C. Provide sizes and types as required to match piping and equipment connections; providefittings of materials which match pipe materials used in hydronic piping systems.

D. Where more than one type of material or product is indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 BASIC PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS

A. Hydronic Piping:

1. Tube Size 3 in. and Smaller: ASTM B88 copper tube; Type L, hard-drawn temper;wrought-copper fittings, ANSI/ASME B16.27 with soldered joints, ANSI/ASTM B32,Grade 95TA.

2. Hydronic Drain Piping: Copper pipe; ASTM B306, DWV fittings; ANSI/ASME B16.3,cast bronze, or AWSI/ASME B16.29, wrought copper. Joints: ANSI/ASTM B32,solder, Grade 50B.

2.3 FLANGES, UNIONS AND COUPLINGS

A. Pipe Size 2 in. and under: 150 psig malleable iron unions for threaded ferrous piping;bronze unions for copper pipe, soldered joints.

B. Pipe Size Over 2 in.: 150 psig forged steel slip-on flanges for ferrous piping; bronze flangesfor copper piping; gaskets suitable for intended service – NO ASBESTOS GASKETMATERIAL ALLOWED.

C. Dielectric Connections: Union with galvanized or plated steel threaded end, copper solderend, and water impervious isolation barrier.

2.4 BASIC VALVES

A. Globe Valves: For throttling.


1. Globe valves 2 in. and less: MSS SP-80, rated for 200 psig minimum water pressure,bronze body and disc, plug type disc, graphite fiber packing, thread bonnet, threadedconnections.a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Crane 12) Stockham B-163) Milwaukee 502

B. Ball Valves: For shutoff and throttling.

1. Ball valves 2 in. and less: MSS SP-72, rated for 200 psig minimum water pressure,full port, bronze or stainless steel body, 316 or 304 stainless steel ball and stem,reinforced Teflon seats and seals, threaded or soldered connections. Throttling valvesshall be provided with memory stops (for establishing any setpoint from 0-100% flow).a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Watts B-6080, B-60812) Jomar T-100-SS3) Apollo 77-100 Series

C. Check Valves

1. Check valves 2 in. and less: MSS SP-80, rated for 200 psig minimum water pressure,swing type, bronze body and disc, renewable seat disc, threaded cap, threadedconnections.a. Acceptable Manufacturers and Models:

1) Crane 372) Jomar T/S-5113) Stockham B-3194) Milwaukee 509

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic piping systems materialsand products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC PIPING

A. General: Install hydronic piping in accordance with the following requirements:

1. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in direction of flow, with tops ofboth pipes and reducer flush.

2. Install piping with 1/32 in. per ft. (1/4%) upward slope in direction of flow.

3. Connect branch-feed piping to mains at horizontal centerline of mains; connect run-outpiping to branches at horizontal centerline of branches.

4. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying full insulationand servicing of valves.

B. Roof penetrations through metal roofs by the Plumbing or Mechanical Contractor will berequired to have written approval by the Roofing Contractor.


3.3 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Provide ball valves for shutoff service as follows:

1. On each branch riser, close to main, where branch or riser serves 2 or more hydronicterminals or equipment connections, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. On inlet and outlet of each mechanical equipment item, and on inlet of each hydronicterminal, and elsewhere as indicated.

3. As drain valves on each mechanical equipment item located to completely drainequipment for service or repair. Install at base of each riser, at base of each rise ordrop in piping system, and elsewhere where indicated or required to completely drainhydronic system.

B. Provide globe or ball valves for throttling service as follows:

1. On outlet of each hydronic terminal, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Provide check valves on discharge side of each pump, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Horizontal swing check valve shall be installed in a true horizontal position.

3.4 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. General: Connect hydronic piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated, andcomply with equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated. Installshutoff valve and union on supply and return, drain valve on drain connection.

B. Hydronic Terminals: Install hydronic terminals with hydronic terminal outlet valve and unionon outlet; union, shutoff valve on inlet. Install manual air vent valve on element inaccordance with manufacturer's instructions. Locate valves and balancing cocks behindvalve access doors for ease of maintenance. Where indicated, install automatictemperature control valve with unions between gate valve and element on supply line.

3.5 TESTING

A. General: Furnish pumps, gauges, equipment, and personnel required, and test asnecessary to demonstrate the integrity of the furnished installation.

B. Pressure Piping: Hydrostatically test and make tight at 1-1/2 times the normal operatingpressure and not less than 150 psig. Repair leaking joints and retest.

C. Gravity Piping: Unless otherwise directed, plug all openings and fill with water to a heightequal to highest connected equipment. Allow to stand one hour. Remake leaking jointsand retest.

D. Tests and Test Procedures shall be witnessed and approved by the Engineer.

E. After completion and approval of testing, submit "Test Certificates of Approval" for heatingwater piping systems stating that all test results are satisfactory. Certificates of Approvalmust be signed by Contractor and Engineer.


3.6 CLEANING

A. Cleaning, Flushing and Inspecting: Flush hydronic piping with potable water until thesystem can operate for eight (8) hours without partial build-up in strainers.

B. Chemical Treatment: Refill hydronic piping systems, adding caustic soda to maintain pH of8.0 to 8.5 and sodium sulfate in amount of 1/3 caustic soda or to maintain residual of 30- to40-ppm in system. Add trisodium phosphate to make hardness of 0-ppm and residual ofapproximately 30-ppm in system. Repeat measurements daily with system under fullcirculation and apply chemicals to adjust levels until no change is apparent.

1. Coordinate chemical treatment of the hydronic systems after installation of new pipingand filling/re-filling of system with the Owner’s Water Treatment Supplier. Theadditional chemicals required due to cleaning and filling/re-filling of the hydronicsystems are a part of this project, and the responsibility of the Contractor.

3.7 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

A. Test, adjust and balance hydronic systems in accordance with requirements of Section 2305 93.

END OF SECTION 23 21 13.23

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES 23 21 13.24

SECTION 23 21 13.24

HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of hydronic specialties required by this section is indicated on drawings andschedules, and by requirements of this section.

B. Types of hydronic specialties specified in this section include the following:

1. Balance Valves.

2. Balance Cocks.

3. Vent Valves.

4. Flow Control Valves.

5. Diverting Fittings.

6. Air Separators.

7. Compression Tanks.

8. Pump Suction Diffusers.

9. Shot Feeders.

10. Water Relief Valves.

11. Pressure Reducing Valves.

C. Hydronic specialties furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment are specified as partof equipment assembly in other Division 23 sections.

D. Refer to other Division 23 sections for insulation of hydronic specialties; not work of thissection.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of hydronicspecialties of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Hydronic Specialty Types: Provide hydronic specialties of same type by samemanufacturer.


1. ASME Compliance: Manufacture and install hydronic specialties in accordance withASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping".

2. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components of hydronic specialties thatare listed and labeled by UL, and comply with NEMA standards.


1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions foreach type of hydronic specialty. Include pressure drop curve or chart for each type andsize of hydronic specialty. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer's figure number, size,location, rated capacities, and features for each required hydronic specialty.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly-type shop drawings indicatingdimensions, weights, required clearances, and method of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and spare parts lists for each type ofhydronic specialty. Include this data, product data, and shop drawings in maintenancemanual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated hydronic specialties recommended by manufacturer foruse in service indicated. Provide hydronic specialties of types and pressure ratingsindicated for each service, or if not indicated, provide proper selection as determined byInstaller to comply with installation requirements. Provide sizes as indicated, andconnections, which properly mate with pipe, tube, and equipment connections. Wheremore than one type is indicated, selection is Installer's option, but more than one typecannot be used on project.

2.2 BALANCE VALVES

A. General: Provide balance valves as indicated, of one of the following types:

1. Threaded Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, globe type with memorystop, straight or angle pattern.

2. Threaded Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, ball type with memorystop, straight pattern.

3. Soldered Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, globe type with memorystop, straight or angle pattern.

4. Soldered Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, ball type with memory stop,straight pattern.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide balance valves of one ofthe following:


2. Hammond Valve Corp.

3. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.

4. Spirax Sarco.

5. Taco, Inc.


2.3 BALANCE COCKS

A. General: Provide balance cocks as indicated, of one of the following types:

1. Threaded Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, bronze plug, screwdriveroperated, straight or angle pattern.

2. Soldered Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Class 125, bronze body, bronze plug, screwdriveroperated, straight or angle pattern.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide balance cocks of one ofthe following:

1. American Air Filter Co.


3. Hammond Valve Corp

4. Milwaukee Valve Co., Inc.

5. Spirax Sarco.

6. Taco, Inc.

2.4 VENT VALVES

A. Manual Vent Valves: Provide manual vent valves designed to be operated manually withscrewdriver or thumbscrew, 1/8 in. NPS connection.

B. Automatic Vent Valves: Provide automatic vent valves designed to vent automatically withfloat principle, stainless steel float and mechanisms, cast-iron body, pressure rated for 125psi, 1/2 in. NPS inlet and outlet connections.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide vent valves of one of thefollowing:

1. Armstrong Machine Works.


3. Hoffman Specialty ITT; Fluid Handling Div.

4. Spirax Sarco.

2.5 FLOW CONTROL VALVES

A. General: Provide flow control valves pressure rated for 125 psi, containing lift checkassembly that will automatically open by means of pump flow pressure, and automaticallyclose when pump is not operating.

1. Threaded Ends 2 in. and Smaller: Cast-iron body, bronze check mechanism, screw-inbonnet, straight or angle pattern.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flow control valves of oneof the following:

1. Armstrong Pumps, Inc.


2. Bell & Gossett ITT; Fluid Handling Div

3. Dunham-Bush, Inc

4. Taco, Inc.

5. Nibco, Inc.

2.6 DIVERTING FITTINGS

A. General: Provide diverting fittings as indicated for one-pipe hydronic piping systems. Construct fittings of cast iron with threaded ends or wrought copper with solder ends,pressure rated for 125 psi. Provide indication on fitting of direction of flow for supply orreturn applications. Furnish flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer'stesting with submittal.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diverting fittings of one ofthe following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.



4. Taco, Inc.

2.7 AIR SEPARATORS

A. General: Provide air separators pressure rated for 125 psi. Select capacity based on totalsystem gpm.

1. In-line Air Separators: Provide in-line air separators as indicated. Construct sizes1-1/2 in. and smaller of cast iron; and sizes 2 in. and larger of steel complying withASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code and stamped with "U" symbol. FurnishNational Board Form U-1 denoting compliance.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air separators of one ofthe following:

1. Sprirotherm.

2. Amtrol, Inc.



5. Taco, Inc.

2.8 DIAPHRAGM-TYPE COMPRESSION TANKS

A. General: Provide diaphragm compression tanks of size and number as indicated. Construct tank of welded steel, constructed, tested, and stamped in accordance withSection VIII of ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code for working pressure of 125 psi. Furnish National Board Form U-1 denoting compliance. Support vertical tanks with steellegs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Provide specially compoundedflexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank to permanently separate air charge from


system water, to maintain design expansion capacity. Provide pressure gauge andair-charging fitting, and drain fitting.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide diaphragm-typecompression tanks of one of the following:

1. TACO

2. Amtrol, Inc.

3. Elbi

2.9 PUMP SUCTION DIFFUSERS

A. General: Provide pump suction diffusers as indicated. Construct unit with angle patterncast-iron body, threaded for 2 in. and smaller, flanged for 2-1/2 in. and larger, pressurerated for 175 psi. Provide inlet vanes with length 2-1/2 times pump suction diameter orgreater. Provide cylinder strainer with 3/16 in. diameter openings with total free area equalto or greater than 5 times cross- sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstandpressure differential equal to pump shutoff head. Provide disposable fine mesh strainer tofit over cylinder strainer. Provide permanent magnet located in flow stream, removable forcleaning. Provide adjustable foot support designed to carry weight of suction piping.Provide blow down tapping in bottom, gauge tapping in side.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pump suction diffusers ofone of the following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.



4. Taco, Inc.

2.10 SHOT FEEDERS

A. General: Provide shot feeders of 5 gal. capacity or otherwise as indicated, constructed ofcast iron or steel, for introducing chemicals in hydronic system. Provide funnel and valve ontop for loading, drain valve in bottom, and recirculating valves on side. Construct forpressure rating of 125 psi.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide shot feeders of one of thefollowing:

1. Culligan USA.

2. Vulcan Laboratories, Subsidiary of Clow Corp.

3. York-Shipley, Inc.

2.11 WATER RELIEF VALVES

A. General: Provide water relief valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selected byInstaller for proper relieving capacity, in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode.


1. Combined Pressure-Temperature Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, thermostat,complying with ANSI Z21.22 listing requirements for temperature discharge capacity. Provide temperature relief at 210°F (99°C), and pressure relief at 125 psi.

2. Pressure Relief Valves: Bronze body, test lever, ASME rated. Provide pressure reliefat 30 psi.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide water relief valves of oneof the following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.


3. Spirax Sarco.


2.12 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

A. General: Provide pressure reducing valves as indicated, of size and capacity as selectedby Installer to maintain operating pressure on boiler system.

B. Construction: Cast-iron or brass body, low inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainerremovable without system shut-down, non-corrosive valve seat and stem, factory-set atoperating pressure.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pressure reducing valvesof one of the following:

1. Amtrol, Inc.



4. Taco, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which hydronic specialties are to beinstalled. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected inmanner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES

A. Balance Valves: At Installer's option, install balance valves in lieu of terminal outlet valvesand balance cocks. Install on each hydronic terminal and elsewhere as indicated. Afterhydronic system balancing has been completed, mark each balance valve with stripe ofyellow lacquer across body and stop plate to permanently mark final balanced position.

B. Balance Cocks: Install balance cocks on outlet of each hydronic terminal, on end of eachhydronic zone circuit, on discharge of each hydronic pump, and elsewhere as indicated.


After hydronic system balancing has been completed, mark each balance cock with stripeof yellow lacquer across body and stem to permanently mark final balanced position.

C. Vent Valves:

1. Manual Vent Valves: Install manual vent valves on each hydronic terminal at highestpoint, and on each hydronic-piping drop in direction of flow for mains, branches, andrun outs, and elsewhere as indicated.

2. Automatic Vent Valves: Install automatic vent valves at top of each hydronic riser andelsewhere as indicated. Install shutoff valve between riser and vent valve, pipe outletto suitable plumbing drain, or as indicated.

D. Flow Control Valves: Install flow control valves on discharge of each pump servinghydronic heating system or zone, and elsewhere as indicated. Install with checkmechanism in upright position, with adequate clearance for service and replacement. Screw check down for automatic operation.

E. Diverting Fittings: Install diverting fittings as indicated and in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions. Position fittings on supply and return mains with properorientation for flow.

F. Air Separators:

1. In-line Air Separators: Install in-line air separators in pump suction lines. Connectinlet and outlet piping. Run piping to compression tank with 1/4 in. per ft. (2%) upwardslope towards tank. Install drain valve on units 2 in. and over.

G. Diaphragm-Type Compression Tanks: Install diaphragm-type compression tanks on flooras indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Vent and purge air fromhydronic system, charge tank with proper air charge as recommended by manufacturer.

H. Pump Suction Diffusers: At Installer's option, install pump suction diffusers on each pumpsuction line in lieu of separate strainer, reducing elbow, entrance pipe, and pressure gaugeoutlet. Install on pump suction inlet, adjust foot support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and shutoff valve in blow down connection. After cleaning and flushinghydronic-piping system, but before balancing of hydronic piping system, remove disposablefine mesh strainer.

I. Shot Feeders: Install shot feeders on each hydronic system at pump discharge andelsewhere as indicated. Install in upright position with top of funnel not more than 48"above floor. Install globe valve in pump discharge line between recirculating lines. Pipedrain to nearest plumbing drain or as indicated.

J. Water Relief Valves: Install on hot water generators, and elsewhere as indicated. Pipedischarge to floor. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

K. Pressure Reducing Valves: Install for each hot water boiler or heat exchanger as indicated,and in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 23 00

SECTION 23 23 00

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of refrigerant piping work is indicated on drawings and schedules, and byrequirements of this section.

B. This section includes pipe, fittings and valves for refrigerant piping systems installed in theproject.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of refrigerant pipingproducts, of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactoryuse in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience onprojects with refrigerant piping work similar to that required for project.


1. ANSI Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with ANSIB31.5 "Refrigeration Piping", and extend applicable lower pressure limits to pressuresbelow 15 psig.

2. UMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with IAPMO"Uniform Mechanical Code".

3. IMC Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance with“International Mechanical Code.”

4. ASHRAE Compliance: Fabricate and install refrigerant piping in accordance withASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration".

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions forrefrigerant piping materials and products.

B. Brazing Certification: Certify brazing procedures, brazers and operators in accordance withASME standards (ANSI B31.5).

C. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of refrigerant pipe and fittings including, butnot necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes ofhorizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatialrelationship between piping and proximate equipment.

D. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed refrigerant pipingand piping products, in accordance with requirements of Division 01.


E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for refrigerant piping materialsand products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings inmaintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

A. General: Provide piping materials and factory-fabricated piping products of sizes, types,pressure ratings, temperature ratings, and capacities as indicated. Where not indicated,provide proper selection as determined by Installer to comply with installation requirements.Provide materials and products complying with ANSI B31.5 Code for Refrigeration Pipingwhere applicable, base pressure rating on refrigerant piping system maximum designpressures. Provide sizes and types matching piping and equipment connections; providefittings of materials that match pipe materials used in refrigerant piping systems. Wheremore than one type of materials or products are indicated, selection is Installer's option.

2.2 BASIC PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Refrigeration Piping:

1. Tube Size 4-1/8 in. and Smaller: ASTM B280, copper tube; Type ACR, hard-drawntemper; ANSI B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; brazed joints.

2. Tube Size 3/4 in. and Smaller: ASTM B280, copper tube; Type ACR, soft annealedtemper; fittings, cast copper-alloy fittings for flared copper tubes; flared joints.

3. Tube Size 7/8 in. through 4-1/8 in.: ASTM B280, copper tube; Type ACR, softannealed temper; ANSI B16.22, wrought-copper, solder-joint fittings; brazed joints.

B. Brazed Joints: Braze joints using American Welding Society (AWS) classification BCuP-4for brazing filler metal.

2.3 SPECIAL REFRIGERANT VALVES

A. General: Special valves required for refrigerant piping include the following types:

1. Globe and Check Valves:a. Globe Shutoff Valves: Forged brass, packed, back seating, winged seal cap,

300°F (149°C) temperature rating, and 500 psi working pressure.b. Check Valves: Forged brass, accessible internal parts, soft synthetic seat, fully

guided brass piston and stainless steel spring, 250°F (121°C) temperature rating,and 500 psi working pressure.

c. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide globe and checkvalves of one of the following or approved equal:1) Henry Valve Co.2) Parker Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air- Cond. Div.3) Sporlan Valve Co.

2. Solenoid Valves:a. 2-Way Solenoid Valves: Forged brass, designed to conform to ARI 760, normally

closed, Teflon valve seat, NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure, 24 volt, 60 Hz., UL-listed,1/2 in. conduit adapter, 250°F (121°C) temperature rating, 400 psi workingpressure.1) Manual Operator: Provide manual operator to open valve.


b. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide solenoid valvesof one of the following or approved equal:1) Alco Controls Div.; Emerson Electric Co.2) Automatic Switch Co.3) Sporlan Valve Co.

2.4 REFRIGERANT SPECIALTIES

A. Refrigerant Strainers: Brass shell and end connections, brazed joints, monel screen, 100mesh, UL-listed, 350 psi working pressure.

B. Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Forged brass, single port, removable caps, polished opticalglass, solder connections, UL-listed, 200°F (93°C) temperature rating, 500 psi workingpressure.

C. Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Steel shell, ceramic-fired desiccant core, solder connections,UL-listed, 500 psi working pressure.

D. Refrigerant Filter-Driers: Corrosion-resistant steel shell, steel flange ring and spring,wrought copper fittings, ductile iron cover plate with steel cap screws, replaceablefilter-drier core, 500 psi working pressure.

E. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Provide corrosion-resistant, spring loaded, stainless steelsprings, pressure operated, evaporator pressure regulator, in size and working pressureindicated, with copper connections.

F. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Provide discharge line mufflers as recommended byequipment manufacturer for use in service indicated, UL-listed.

G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide refrigeration accessoriesof one of the following or approved equal:

1. Alco Controls Div.; Emerson Electric Co.

2. Henry Valve Co.

3. Parker-Hannifin Corp.; Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Div.

4. Sporlan Valve Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which refrigerant piping systems materialsand products are to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditionshave been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT PIPING

A. Install refrigerant piping with 1/4 in. per ft. (1%) downward slope in direction of oil return tocompressor. Provide oil traps and double risers where indicated, and where required toprovide oil return.


B. Clean refrigerant piping by swabbing with dry lintless (linen) cloth, followed by refrigerant oilsoaked swab. Remove excess oil by swabbing with cloth soaked in high flash pointpetroleum solvent, squeezed dry.

C. Bleed dry nitrogen through refrigerant piping during brazing operations.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF SPECIAL REFRIGERANT VALVES

A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions. Remove accessible internal parts before soldering or brazing, replace afterjoints are completed.

1. Solenoid Valves: Install in refrigerant piping as indicated with stem pointing upwards.a. Wiring of solenoid valves is specified in applicable Division 26 sections, and is

included as work of this section.b. Wiring of solenoid valves is specified in applicable Division 26 sections; not work

of this section.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF REFRIGERANT ACCESSORIES

A. Refrigerant Strainers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible location forservice.

B. Moisture-Liquid Indicators: Install as indicated on refrigerant liquid lines, in accessiblelocation.

C. Refrigerant Filter-Dryers: Install in refrigerant lines as indicated, and in accessible locationfor service.

D. Evaporator Pressure Regulators: Install in refrigerant suction lines or evaporator outlets asindicated. Adjust, if required, for proper evaporator pressure.

E. Refrigerant Discharge Line Mufflers: Install as indicated, in horizontal or down flow portionof hot-gas lines, immediately after leaving compressor; not in riser.


A. General: Connect refrigerant piping to mechanical equipment as indicated, and complywith equipment manufacturer's instructions where not otherwise indicated.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Refrigerant Piping Leak Test: Prior to initial operation, clean and test refrigerant piping inaccordance with ANSI B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping". Perform initial test with dry nitrogen,using soap solution to test all joints. Perform final test with 27 in. vacuum, and then 200 psiusing halide torch. System must be entirely leak-free.

B. Repair or replace refrigerant piping as required to eliminate leaks, and retest as specified todemonstrate compliance.


3.7 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING SYSTEM

A. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation.

B. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35°F (2°C) isindicated on vacuum dehydration indicator.

C. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping.

D. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between vacuumpump and system.

E. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas; allow pressure to build up to 2 psi.

F. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide fulloperating charge.


A. Cleaning and Inspecting: Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016METAL DUCTWORK 23 31 13

SECTION 23 31 13

METAL DUCTWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of metal ductwork is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and by requirements ofthis section.

B. All duct dimensions shown on drawings are net inside clear dimensions.


A. Manufacturer’s Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of metal ductworkproducts of types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactoryuse in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Installer’s Qualifications: Firm with at least 3 years of successful installation experience onprojects with metal ductwork systems similar to that required for project.


1. SMACNA Standards: Comply with SMACNA's “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,Metal and Flexible”, First Edition, 2005, for fabrication and installation of metalductwork.

2. ASHRAE Standards: Comply with ASHRAE Handbook latest edition, HVAC Systemsand Equipment volume, Chapter 16 “Duct Construction”, for fabrication and installationof metal ductwork.

3. NFPA Compliance: Comply with latest editions of NFPA 90A “Installation of AirConditioning and Ventilating Systems” and NFPA 90B” Installation of Warm AirHeating and Air Conditioning Systems”.

D. Field Reference Manual: Have available for reference at project field office, copy ofSMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible”.

E. Flame/Smoke Ratings: Provide composite mechanical system (insulating material, jackets,coverings, sealers, mastics and adhesives) with flame-spread index of 25 or less, andsmoke-developed index of 50 or less, as tested by ASTM E 84 (NFPA 255) method.

F. All adhesives, sealants and sealant primers shall contain low VOC (Volatile OrganicCompunds), as outlined in the South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD)Rule #1168. The design intent for this project is to obtain LEED Credit 4.1, which requiresthat all adhesives, sealants and sealant primers comply with the SCAQMD Rule #1168.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical product data and installation instructions formetal ductwork materials and products.


B. Shop Drawings: Submit scaled layout drawings of metal ductwork and fittings including, butnot limited to, duct sizes, locations, elevations, and slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floorpenetrations, and connections. Show interface and spatial relationship between ductworkand proximate equipment. Show modifications of indicated requirements, made to conformto local shop practice, and how those modifications ensure that free area, materials andrigidity are not reduced.

C. Record Drawings: At project closeout, submit record drawings of installed metal ductworkand ductwork products, in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts lists for metal ductwork materialsand products. Include this data, product data, shop drawings, and record drawings inmaintenance manual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.


A. Protection: Protect shop fabricated and factory fabricated ductwork, accessories andpurchased products from damage during shipping, storage and handling. Prevent enddamage and prevent dirt and moisture from entering ducts and fittings.

B. Storage: Where possible, store ductwork inside and protect from weather. Wherenecessary to store outside, store above grade and enclose with waterproof wrapping.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. Exposed Ductwork Materials: Where ductwork is indicated to be exposed to view inoccupied spaces, provide materials that are free from visual imperfections including pitting,seam marks, roller marks, and stains and discolorations, and other imperfections, includingthose that would impair painting.

B. Sheet Metal: All interior ducts shall be constructed with G-60 or better galvanized steel(ASTM A 653/A 653M) LFQ, chem treat. Exterior ductwork or duct exposed to highhumidity conditions (i.e. moisture laden exhausts not specified to be stainless steel) shallbe G-90 or better galvanized steel LFQ, chem treat.

2.2 MISCELLANEOUS DUCTWORK MATERIALS

A. General: Provide miscellaneous materials and products of types and sizes indicated and,where not otherwise indicated, provide type and size required to comply with ductworksystem requirements including proper connection of ductwork and equipment.

B. Fittings: Provide radius type fittings fabricated of multiple sections with maximum 15°change of direction per section. Unless specifically detailed otherwise, use 45° laterals and45° elbows for branch takeoff connections. Where 90° branches are indicated, provideconical type tees.

C. Duct Liner:

1. Fibrous glass, complying with Thermal Insulation Manufacturer’s Association (TIMA)AHC-101; of thickness indicated with a minimum installed R-Valve equal to 5 (1-1/2 in.


thick minimum), with black-coated, fire-resistant airstream face, with EPA-registeredantimicrobial agent.

2. Manufacturers:a. Certainteed “Toughgard”.b. Knauf Type “EM”.c. Johns Mansville “Permacote Linacoustic”.d. Owens-Corning “Aeroflex Plus”.e. No Substitutions

D. Duct Liner Adhesive:

1. Comply with ASTM C 916 “Specifications for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation.” Application shall conform to Manufacturer’s written recommendations for the apparentapplication.

2. Adhesives shall be non-inflammable after curing.

3. Manufacturers:a. Benjamin-Foster.b. Duro Dyne “FPG”.c. Kinco 15-137.d. Miracle PF-91.e. Manufacturer of duct liner used for this project.

E. Duct Liner Fasteners:

1. Comply with SMACNA “Installation Standards for Rectangular Ducts using FlexibleLiner”, Articles S2.0 through S2.11.

2. Comply with lining details as shown in the referenced SMACNA Section, Figures 2-22and 2-23.

3. Clinched-pin type fasteners shall be “Grip-Nail”, or approved equal.

4. Projecting pins in Type 3 or Type 4 applications shall be clipped off close enough tothe retaining disc to provide proper anchoring and to prevent injury to personnel.

F. Duct Sealant:

1. Duct sealer shall be flexible, water-based, adhesive sealant designed for use in allpressure duct systems. After curing, it shall be resistant to ultraviolet light and shallseal out water, air, and moisture. Sealer shall be UL listed and conform to ASTM E84.

2. Comply with requirements of SMACNA Table 1-2.

3. Manufacturers:a. Benjamin-Fosterb. Ductmate - PROseal.c. Duro Dyne S2.d. Hardcast.e. United Sheet Metal.

G. Duct Cement:

1. Non-hardening, non-migrating mastic or liquid elastic sealant of type applicable forfabrication/installation detail as compounded and recommended by manufacturerspecifically for cementing fitting components, or longitudinal seams in ductwork.


2. Comply with requirements of SMACNA Table 1-2.

3. Manufacturers:a. Benjamin-Foster.b. Duro Dyne S2.c. Hardcast.d. United Sheet Metal.

H. Ductwork Support Materials:

1. General:a. Except as otherwise indicated, provide hot-dipped galvanized steel fasteners,

anchors, rods, straps, trim and angles for support of ductwork.b. Comply with applicable provisions of SMACNA 2005 Standards, Figures 4-1

through 4-8, and Tables 4-1 through 4-3.

2. Except where space is indicated as “High Humidity” area, interior support materials ofnot less than 1/4 in. diameter or 3/16 in. thickness may be plain (not galvanized).

3. For exposed stainless steel ductwork, provide matching stainless steel supportmaterials. For copper ductwork, provide copper, bronze or brass support materials.

4. For aluminum ductwork, provide aluminum support materials except where materialsare electrolytically separated from ductwork.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Shop-fabricate ductwork in 4,8,10, or 12 ft. lengths, unless otherwise indicated or requiredto complete runs. Preassemble work in shop to greatest extent possible, so as to minimizefield assembly of systems. Disassemble systems only to extent necessary for shipping andhandling. Match mark sections for reassembly and coordinated installation.

B. All duct dimensions shown on drawings are net inside clear dimensions.

C. Shop-fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with SMACNA 2005Standards as follows:

1. Rectangular, Steel:a. Tables 1-1 through 1-13.b. Figures 1-2 through 1-18.c. Fittings and Construction, Section II.

2. Rectangular, aluminum: Pages 1-31 through 1-33.

3. Round, Oval and Flexible Duct: Section III.

D. Shop fabricate ductwork of gauges and reinforcement complying with ASHRAE Handbook,HVAC Systems and Equipment Volume, Chapter 16 “Duct Construction”.

E. Longitudinal Seams: Pittsburgh lock shall be used on all longitudinal seams. All longitudinalseams will be sealed with mastic sealant. Snaplock is not acceptable.

F. Ductmate or W.D.C.I. proprietary duct connection systems will be acceptable. Ductconstructed using these systems will refer to the manufacturers guidelines for sheet gauge,intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and joint reinforcements.


G. Formed on flanges (T.D.C./T.D.F./T-25A/T-25B) will only be acceptable when submitted forapproval prior to installation of any ductwork. Formed on flanges will be constructed asSMACNA T-25 flanges, whose limits are defined on Page 1.36 of the 2005 SMACNAManual, First Edition. No other construction pertaining to form on flanges will beacceptable. Formed on flanges shall be acceptable for use on ductwork 42 in. wide or less,with 2 in. positive pressure static or less, and must include the use of corners, bolts andcleat.

H. Fabricate duct fittings to match adjoining ducts, and to comply with duct requirements asapplicable to fittings. Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate elbows with center lineradius equal to associated duct width; and fabricate to include turning vanes in elbowswhere shorter radius is necessary. Limit angular tapers to 30° for contracting tapers and20° for expanding tapers.

I. Fabricate ductwork with accessories installed during fabrication to the greatest extentpossible. Refer to Division 23 Section “Ductwork Accessories” for accessory requirements.

J. Fabricate ductwork with duct liner in each section of duct where indicated. Laminate linerto internal surfaces of duct in accordance with instructions by manufacturers of lining andadhesive, and fasten with mechanical fasteners. Comply with previous paragraph 2.2.

K. Pressure Classifications:

1. Static pressure ratings for ductwork systems shall be as noted on the drawings, and/orshall conform to requirements of 2005 SMACNA Standards, Table 1-1.

2. In no case shall the pressure rating of the duct be less than that indicated in Table 1-1for the apparent duct velocity.

3. Gauges of metal and reinforcing methods shall conform to SMACNA requirements asfollows:a. Rectangular Steel: Table 1-3 through 1-13.b. Rectangular Aluminum: Tables 1-14 through 1-16.c. Round, or Flat Oval, Steel: Table 3-2.d. Round Aluminum: Table 3-3.

2.4 FACTORY-FABRICATED DUCTWORK

A. At Contractor’s option, factory-fabricated ductwork sections, fittings, etc., may besubstituted for shop-made items.

B. Factory-fabricated items shall comply in every respect with SMACNA requirements listedpreviously in this Section, or show proof from a recognized, approved independentlaboratory, prior to bidding, that the proposed construction methods produce products thatequal, or exceed, the SMACNA 2005 Standards.

C. Comply with applicable provisions of Fort Worth Mechanical Code.

D. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide factory-fabricatedductwork and/or fittings of one of the following:

1. Ductmate, Inc., Monongahela, PA.

2. Semco Mfg., Inc.


3. United Sheet Metal Div., United McGill, Inc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. General: Examine areas and conditions under which metal ductwork is to be installed. Donot proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF METAL DUCTWORK

A. General: Assemble and install ductwork in accordance with recognized industry practiceswhich will achieve air tight (5% leakage for systems rated 3 in. and under; 1% for systemsrated over 3 in.) and noiseless (no objectionable noise) systems, capable of performingeach indicated service. Install each run with minimum number of joints. Align ductworkaccurately at connections, within 1/8 in. misalignment tolerance and with internal surfacessmooth. Support ducts rigidly with suitable ties, braces, hangers and anchors of type thatwill hold ducts true to shape and to prevent buckling. Support vertical ducts at every floor. Seal all longitudinal and transverse duct joints and seams with non-hardening duct mastic.

B. Inserts: Install concrete inserts for support of ductwork in coordination with formwork, asrequired to avoid delays in work.

C. Field Fabrication: Complete fabrication of work at project as necessary to match shopfabricated work and accommodates installation requirements.

D. Routing: Locate ductwork runs, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontallyand avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Locate runs as indicated by diagrams, detailsand notations or, if not otherwise indicated, run ductwork in shortest route which does notobstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Holdducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanentenclosure elements of building. Where possible, locate insulated ductwork for 1 in.clearance outside of insulation. Limit clearance to 1/2 in. where furring is shown forenclosure or concealment of ducts, but allow for insulation thickness, if any. Whereverpossible in finished and occupied spaces, conceal ductwork from view, by locating inmechanical shafts, hollow wall construction or above suspended ceilings. Do not encasehorizontal runs in solid partitions, except as specifically shown. Coordinate layout withstructural members, suspended ceiling, lighting layouts, sprinkler piping, plumbing systemsand similar finished work.

E. Electrical Equipment Spaces: Do not route ductwork through Electric Rooms, transformervaults, and other electrical equipment spaces and enclosures.

F. Penetrations: Where ducts pass through interior partitions and exterior walls, and areexposed to view, conceal space between construction opening and duct or duct insulationwith sheet metal flanges of same gauge as duct. Overlap opening on 4 sides by at least1-1/2 in. Fasten to duct and substrate.

G. Coordination: Coordinate duct installations with installation of accessories, dampers, coilframes, equipment, controls and other associated work of ductwork system.


H. Installation: Install metal ductwork in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF DUCT LINER

A. General: Install duct liner in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards, pages 2-25 thru 2-29.

B. All supply and return ductwork serving air handlers shall be lined with 1-1/2 in. thickacoustical lining for 20 feet from the unit.


A. General: Connect metal ductwork to equipment as indicated; provide flexible connection foreach ductwork connection to equipment mounted on vibration isolators, and/or equipmentcontaining rotating machinery. Provide access doors as indicated.


A. Clean ductwork internally, unit by unit as it is installed, of dust and debris. Clean externalsurfaces of foreign substances that might cause corrosive deterioration of metal or, whereductwork is to be painted, might interfere with painting or cause paint deterioration.

B. Strip protective paper from stainless ductwork surfaces, and repair finish wherever it hasbeen damaged.

C. Temporary Closure: At ends of ducts that are not connected to equipment or air distributiondevices at time of ductwork installation, provide temporary closure of polyethylene film orother covering that will prevent entrance of dust and debris until time connections are to becompleted.

D. Balancing: Refer to Division 23 Section “TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING” for airdistribution balancing of metal ductwork; not work of this section. Seal any leaks inductwork that become apparent in balancing process.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES 23 31 13.19

SECTION 23 31 13.19

DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of ductwork accessories work is indicated on drawings and in schedules, and byrequirements of this section.

B. Types of ductwork accessories required for project include the following:

1. Dampers.a. Control dampers.

2. Fire and smoke dampers.

3. Turning vanes.

4. Duct hardware.

5. Duct access doors.

6. Flexible connections.

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for testing, adjusting, and balancing of ductworkaccessories; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of ductworkaccessories, of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use insimilar service for not less than 3 years.


1. SMACNA Compliance: Comply with applicable portions of SMACNA “HVAC DuctConstruction Standards, Metal and Flexible,” 2005 edition.

2. Industry Standards: Comply with latest ASHRAE recommendations pertaining toconstruction of ductwork accessories, except as otherwise indicated.

3. UL Compliance: Construct, test, and label fire dampers in accordance with ULStandard 555 “Fire Dampers and Ceiling Dampers.”

4. NFPA Compliance: Comply with applicable provisions of NFPA 90A latest edition“Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems”, pertaining to installation ofductwork accessories.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for each type of ductworkaccessory, including dimensions, capacities, and materials of construction; and installationinstructions.


B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer’s assembly type Shop Drawings for each type ofductwork accessory showing interfacing requirements with ductwork, method of fasteningor support, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Maintenance Data: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance data including parts lists for eachtype of duct accessory. Include this data, product data, and Shop Drawings in maintenancemanual; in accordance with requirements of Division 01.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DAMPERS

A. Control Dampers: Provide dampers with parallel blades for 2-position control, or opposedblades for modulating control. Construct blades of 16-ga steel; provide heavy-duty moldedself-lubricating nylon bearings, 1/2 in. diameter steel axles spaced on 9 in. centers. Construct frame of 2 in. x 1/2 in. x 1/8 in. steel channel for face areas 25 sq.ft. and under; 4in. x 1-1/4 in. x 16-ga channel for face areas over 25 sq.ft. Provide galvanized steel finishwith aluminum touch up.

B. Control Dampers: Refer to Division 23 Section “CONTROL SYSTEMS”: for controldampers; not work of this section.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide dampers of one of thefollowing:

1. Air Balance, Inc.

2. Nailor

3. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.

4. Louvers & Dampers, Inc.

5. Penn Ventilator Co.

6. Ruskin Mfg. Co.

D. Fire Damper (FD)

1. Fabricated Fire Dampers: Provide dampers constructed in accordance with SMACNA“Fire Damper and Heat Stop Guide”.

2. Damper frames shall be constructed of minimum 16 gauge welded galvanized steelchannel. Frames in excess of 36 in. height shall have corner braces or equivalentmeans of strengthening to ensure squareness and rigidity. Frames shall beconstructed for flanged ductwork connection. “Slip In” (insertion) type dampers shallnot be acceptable. Frames shall be sized to match the final dimensions of the ductsincluding allowance where applicable, for the duct lining materials. Coordinate requiredinstallation details with Mechanical Installer.

3. Fire Dampers: Provide Class B or C Fire dampers, of types and sizes indicated.Provide fusible link rated at 160 to 165°F (71 to 74°C) unless otherwise indicated orrequired for special exhaust systems. Provide damper with positive lock in closedposition, and with the following additional features:a. Damper Blade Assembly: Multi blade type, completely out of airstream.b. Damper Blade Assembly: Curtain type, completely out of the airstream.c. Blade Material: Steel, match casing.


d. Blade Material: Stainless Steel.

4. Measurements diagonally from upper to lower opposite corners of the installeddamper assembly, including multiple section dampers shall not differ by more than 1/8in. or 0.2%, whichever is the greater.

5. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fire and smokedampers of one of the following:a. Air Balance, Inc.b. American Warming & Ventilating, Inc.c. Greenheckd. Louvers and Dampers, Inc.e. Nailorf. National Control Airg. Penn Ventilator Co.

2.2 TURNING VANES

A. Fabricated Turning Vanes: Provide fabricated turning vanes and vane runners, constructedin accordance with SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards”.

B. Turning Vanes: Turning vanes shall be double wall turning vanes fabricated from the samematerial as the duct. Tab spacing shall be SMACNA standard. Rail systems withnon-standard tab spacings shall not be accepted. All tabs shall be used, do not skip tabs. Mounting rails shall have friction insert tabs that align the vanes automatically. Vanes shallbe subjected to tensile loading and be capable of supporting 250 lbs when fastened per themanufacturer’s instructions.

C. Acoustic Turning Vanes: Provide acoustic turning vanes constructed of air-foil shapedaluminum extrusions with perforated faces and fiberglass fill.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide turning vanes of one of thefollowing:

1. Aero Dyne Co.

2. Anemostat Products Div.; Dynamics Corp. Of America

3. Barber-Colman Co.

4. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

5. Duro Dyne Corp.

6. Hart & Cooley Mfg. Co.

7. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.

2.3 DUCT HARDWARE

A. General: Provide duct hardware, manufactured by one manufacturer for all items onproject, for the following:

1. Test Holes: Provide in ductwork at fan inlet and outlet, and elsewhere as indicated,duct test holes, consisting of slot and cover, for instrument tests.

2. Quadrant Locks: Provide for each damper, quadrant lock device on one end of shaft;and end bearing plate on other end for damper lengths over 12 in. Provide extendedquadrant locks and end extended bearing plates for externally insulated ductwork.


B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct hardware of one ofthe following:

1. Ventfabrics, Inc.

2. Young Regulator Co.

2.4 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. General: Provide where indicated, duct access doors of size indicated.

B. Construction: Construct of same or greater gauge as ductwork served, provide insulateddoors for insulated ductwork. Provide flush frames for uninsulated ductwork, extendedframes for externally insulated duct. Provide one side hinged, other side with onehandle-type latch for doors 12 in. high and smaller, 2 handle-type latches for larger doors.

C. As an option, clamping type access doors may be installed.

D. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide duct access doors of oneof the following:

1. Air Balance Inc.

2. Ductmate Industries, Inc.

3. Duro Dyne Corp.

4. Register & Grille Mfg. Co., Inc.

5. Ruskin Mfg. Co.


7. Zurn Industries, Inc; Air Systems Div.

2.5 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. General: Provide flexible duct connections wherever ductwork connects to vibratingequipment. Construct flexible connections of neoprene coated flameproof fabric crimpedinto duct flanges for attachment to duct and equipment. Make airtight joint. Provideadequate joint flexibility to allow for thermal, axial, transverse, and torsional movement, andalso capable of absorbing vibrations of connected equipment.

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide flexible connections of oneof the following:

1. American/Elgen Co,; Energy Div.

2. Ductmate Industries

3. Duro Dyne Corp.

4. Flexaust (The) Co.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which ductwork accessories will be installed. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manneracceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES

A. Install ductwork accessories in accordance with manufacturer’s installation instructions,with applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards, and inaccordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve intendedfunction.

B. Install turning vanes in square or rectangular 90° elbows in supply, return and exhaust airsystems, and elsewhere as indicated.

C. Install access doors to open against system air pressure, with latches operable from eitherside, except outside only where duct is too small for person to enter.

D. Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, as necessary to interface installation ofductwork accessories properly with other work.


A. Operate installed ductwork accessories to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Test for air leakage while system is operating. Repair or replace faulty accessories, asrequired to obtain proper operation and leak proof performance.


A. Adjusting: Adjust ductwork accessories for proper settings, install fusible links in firedampers and adjust for proper action.

1. Label access doors in accordance with Division 23 Section “MECHANICALIDENTIFICATION”.

2. Final positioning of manual dampers is specified in Division 23 Section “MECHANICALTESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING”.

B. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces withmanufacturer’s touch-up paint.

3.5 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish extra fusible links to Owner, one link for every 10 installed of each temperaturerange; obtain receipt.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016FANS 23 34 00

SECTION 23 34 00

FANS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of fan work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and schedules, and byrequirements of this section.

B. Types of centrifugal fans required for project include the following:

1. Inline Centrifugal Fans.

C. Refer to Section 23 05 12 - "MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION" forresponsibility of electrical work. Electrical work required of Division 23 shall be done incompliance with requirements of Division 26 sections.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of centrifugal fans,of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar servicefor not less than 10 years.


1. AMCA Compliance: Provide centrifugal fans bearing the AMCA Certified RatingsSeal. Sound rate centrifugal fans in accordance with AMCA 300 "Test Code for SoundRating Air Moving Devices".

2. AMCA Compliance: Provide axial fans bearing the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal.

3. ASHRAE Compliance: Test and rate centrifugal fans in accordance with ASHRAE 51(AMCA 210) "Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating", latest edition.

4. UL Compliance: Provide centrifugal fan electrical components that have been listedand labeled by UL.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for fans, includingspecifications, capacity ratings, fan performance curves with operating point clearlyindicated, gauges and finishes of materials, dimensions, weights, accessories furnished,and installation instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop Drawings showing fan dimensions, requiredclearances, construction details, and field connection details.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring tofan units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and controlwiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed andportions to be field-installed.


D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including lubrication instructions,motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data, product data; shopDrawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordance with requirementsof Division 01.


A. Deliver fans with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; pack components infactory-fabricated protective containers.

B. Handle fans carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do notinstall-damaged components; replace and return damaged components to centrifugal fanmanufacturer.

C. Store fans in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading fans, andmoving them to final location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 INLINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS – SQUARE HOUSING

A. General: Provide inline centrifugal fans of sizes and arrangement as indicated, and ofcapacities and having accessories as scheduled.

B. Housing: The fan housing shall be of the square design constructed of heavy gaugegalvanized steel and shall include square duct mounting collars. Fan construction shallinclude two removable access panels located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel. The access panels must be of sufficient size to permit easy access to all interiorcomponents.

C. Belt-Drive Units: Provide ball bearing motor mounted on adjustable base, with adjustablesheaves. Provide enclosure around belts. Provide lubricating tubes from fan bearings tooutside of fan housing.

D. Wheel: The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward incline, constructed of aluminum andshall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise runningtolerances. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Precision ground andpolished fan shafts shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ballbearings. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours atmaximum cataloged operating speed.

E. Motors: Motors shall be heavy duty type with permanently lubricated sealed ball bearingand carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the scheduled voltage and phase. Motors shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

F. Drives: Drives shall be sized for a minimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower. Pulleysshall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheelmotor shafts. Motor pulleys shall be adjustable for final system balancing.


G. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide inline centrifugal fans ofone of the following:

1. Greenheck.

2. Loren Cook Co.

3. Acme Engineering and Manufacturing Corp.

4. Penn Ventilator Co.

5. Power Line Fans; Torin HVAC Div. Clevepak Corp.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which fans are to be installed. Do not proceed withwork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF FANS

A. General: Install fans where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's installationinstructions, and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that fans comply withrequirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Access: Provide access and service space around and over fans as required, but in nocase less than that recommended by manufacturer.

C. Isolation: Isolate fans with vibration isolators; fasten in accordance with manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to befactory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittaland installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Ensure that rotation is indirection intended for proper performance. Do not proceed with fan start-up untilwiring installation is acceptable to centrifugal fan Installer.

E. Ductwork Connections: Refer to Division 23 "METAL DUCTWORK" sections. Provideflexible connections on inlet and outlet duct connections.


A. Upon completion of installation of fans, and after motor has been energized with normalpower source, test equipment to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Wherepossible, field correct malfunctioning equipment, then retest to demonstrate compliance. Replace equipment that cannot be satisfactorily corrected.


A. Start-up, test, and adjust fans in presence of manufacturer's authorized representative.


3.5 SPARE PARTS

A. General: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, one spare set of belts for each belt driven fan.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016BOILERS 23 52 00

SECTION 23 52 00

BOILERS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Division 23 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods Sections apply to work of this section.


A. Extent of boiler work required by this section is indicated on Drawings and schedules, andby requirements of this section.

B. Types of boiler(s) specified in this section include the following:

1. Cast-Iron Boilers:a. Packaged gas-fired.b. Modular gas-fired.c. Packaged oil-fired.d. Commercial gas-fired.e. Forced draft.

2. Firebox Boilers:a. Packaged gas-fired.b. Packaged oil-fired.

3. Pulse Combustion Boilers.

4. Scotch Marine Firetube Boilers:a. Steam.b. Hot water.

5. Electric Boilers:a. Electric resistance.b. Cast-iron.

C. Refer to other Division 23 sections for concrete pads, piping, specialties, pumps,temperature controls, etc., required external to boiler(s) for installation; not work of thissection.

D. Refer to Division 26 sections for the following work; not work of this section.

1. Power supply wiring from power source to power connection on boilers. Includestarters, disconnects, and required electrical devices, except where specified asfurnished, or factory-installed, by manufacturer.

2. Interlock wiring between boilers, and between boilers and field-installed controldevices.a. Interlock wiring specified, as factory-installed is work of this section.


E. Refer to Division 26 sections for other electrical work including motor starters, disconnects,wires/cables, raceways, and other required electrical devices; not work of this section.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of boilers, of typesand capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service fornot less than 5 years.


1. I=B=R Compliance: Provide firebox boilers that have been tested and rated inaccordance with The Hydronics Institute "Testing and Rating Standard for HeatingBoilers", and bear I=B=R emblem on nameplate affixed to boiler.

2. Boiler Testing and Rating: In accordance with American Boiler Manufacturer'sAssociation (ABMA) "Packaged Firetube Rating".

3. Minimum Steady State Efficiency of Boilers: Not less than prescribed by ASHRAE90A-1993 "Energy Conservation in New Building Design".

4. Low Pressure Boiler Construction: In accordance with American Society ofMechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV. Pressure vessel shall bear ASME label.

5. High Pressure Boiler Construction: In accordance with American Society ofMechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I. Pressurevessel shall bear ASME label.

6. NFPA Compliance: Install oil-fired boiler(s) in accordance with NFPA 31 "Installationof Oil Burning Equipment", latest edition.

7. NFPA Compliance: Install gas-fired boiler(s) in accordance with NFPA 54 "NationalFuel Gas Code", latest edition.

8. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide cast-iron boiler ancillary electrical componentsthat have been listed and labeled by UL, and comply with NEMA standards.

9. FM Compliance: Provide control devices and control sequences in accordance withrequirements of Factory Mutual System (FM).

10. IRI Compliance: Provide control devices and control sequences in accordance withrequirements of Indus- trial Risk Insurers (IRI).

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, including rated capacities ofselected model clearly indicated, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnishedspecialties and accessories; and installation and start-up instructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit boiler manufacturer's shop drawings indicating dimensions, weightloadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components.

C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring tounits. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed and portions to befield-installed.


D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data and parts list for each boiler, control, andaccessory; including "trouble-shooting" maintenance guide. Include this data, product data,shop drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manual; in accordance withrequirements of Division 01.


A. Handle boiler(s) and components carefully to prevent damage, breaking, and scoring. Donot install damaged boilers or components; replace with new.

B. Store boiler(s) and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, fumes, water,construction debris, and physical damage.

C. Comply with manufacturer's rigging and moving instructions for unloading boiler(s), andmoving them to final location.

1.6 SEQUENCE AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the size and location of housekeeping concrete pads on which boiler(s) are tobe mounted. Coordinate required imbedded anchor devices.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Furnish manufacturer's one-year warranty for each boiler including electrical controlcomponents, heating elements, and pressure vessels. In addition, provide five-yearwarranty on all parts and maintenance, one-year warranty on all gaskets and two-yearwarranty on blower motors and accessories.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CAST-IRON PACKAGED GAS-FIRED BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, factory-assembled and fire-tested packaged gas-firedboilers, of capacity as scheduled. Provide design certified by AGA, net ratings approved byI=B=R, heating capacities based on standard test procedures prescribed by DOE, andconstructed in accordance with requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode.

B. Boiler: Construct of cast-iron sections, set on insulated steel base, with sections sealedwith high-temperature sealant, and held together with tie rods.

C. Equipment: Provide insulated extended jacket, vertical draft hood, aluminized steelburners, stainless steel radiation plates, combination gas control valve for 24-volts, 100%shutoff, thermocouple, built-in air eliminator, non-linting pilot burner, ASME safety reliefvalve, automatic air vent, combination pressure-temperature gauge, combination relayreceptacle and 40 VA transformer, plug-in circulator relay, high-limit control, electricaljunction box, wiring harness and safety control wiring, circulator, compression tank with filland check valve, and boiler drain cock.

D. Accessories: In addition to above, provide intermittent electronic ignition system, andautomatic vent damper.


E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged gas-firedboilers of one of the following:

1. BDP Company.

2. Burnham Corp.; Hydronics Div.

3. Hydrotherm Inc.

4. Peerless Heater Co.; Div. of Peerless Industries, Inc.

5. Slant/Fin Corp.

6. Smith (The H. B.) Co., Inc.

7. Weil-McLain; A Marley Co.

2.2 MODULAR GAS-FIRED BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, factory-assembled and tested cast-iron, gas-fired, modularhot water boilers, designed to be operated in battery of boiler modules, of capacity asscheduled. Provide design certified by AGA, net ratings approved by I=B=R, andconstructed in accordance with requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode.

B. Boiler: Construct of horizontal cast-iron sections, connected with push nipples, andprovided with cast-iron flue collector.

C. Equipment: Provide for each module, steel burner base with lanced steel atmospheric typegas burners, thermo-couple type safety pilot, automatic gas valve, pressure regulator, highlimit control, and AGA certified draft hood. Provide for each battery of boiler modules,ASME relief valve, and insulated steel jacket.

D. Controls: Provide gas controls designed to fire each module in battery in step sequence. Arrange controls so any module can be made inoperative without interfering with normaloperation of other modules.

E. Accessories: In addition to above, provide the following accessories:

1. Prefabricated header sets.

2. Domestic hot water exchanger.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide modular gas-fired boilersof one of the following:


2. Hydrotherm Inc.

3. Slant/Fin Corp.


2.3 PACKAGED OIL-FIRED BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, factory-assembled and tested packaged oil-fired boilers, ofcapacity as scheduled. Provide net ratings approved by I=B=R, heating capacities based


on standard test procedures prescribed by DOE, and constructed in accordance withrequirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Boiler: Construct of cast-iron sections, with integral base, with sections sealed withhigh-temperature sealant.

C. Equipment: Provide insulated flush jacket, flame retention light-oil burner, burner mountedcadmium sulfide flame detector, burner mounted primary control, fibrous refractorycombustion chamber, burner mounting plate, heater cover plates and gaskets, drain cock,balanced draft damper, low voltage thermostat, and flue brush.

1. Provide for hot water boilers: circulator, preformed return pipe, combination high-limit,low-limit, and circulator relay, combination pressure and temperature gauge, andASME relief valve.

2. Provide for steam boilers: operating control, high-limit pressure control and siphon,low-water cutoff, ASME safety valve, steam pressure gauge, gauge glass, and gaugecocks.

D. Accessories: In addition to above, provide the following accessories:

1. 2-stage fuel unit.

2. Auxiliary low-water cutoff.

3. Tankless heater.

4. Jacket extension.

5. Automatic vent damper.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged oil-fired boilersof one of the following:

1. BDP Company.

2. Burnham Corp.; Hydronics Division.

3. Hydrotherm Inc.


5. Slant/Fin Corp.


7. Weil-McLain, A Marley Co.

2.4 COMMERCIAL GAS-FIRED BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, factory-assembled and tested gas-fired cast-iron boilers, ofcapacity as scheduled. Provide design certified by AGA, net ratings approved by I=B=R,and constructed in accordance with requirements of the ASME Boiler and Pressure VesselCode.

B. Boilers: Construct of cast-iron sections, sealed with asbestos rope, and assembled with tierods.


C. Equipment: Provide insulated jacket, horizontal to vertical draft hoods, built-in aireliminator, factory-assembled base and burners, prepiped gas control assemblies,aluminized steel burners, manual main shutoff gas valves, pilot shutoff valves, highpressure gas switches, 40 VA transformer, electrical junction box, and flue brush.

1. Provide intermittent electronic ignition system consisting of electronic control,electronic supervised pilot, combination automatic gas valves and pressure regulators,redundant gas valves, pilot filters, and 100% shutoff.

2. Provide for water boilers: high-limit control, operating control, combinationpressure-temperature-altitude gauge, and ASME relief valve.

3. Provide for steam boilers: low water cutoff, pressure limit control and operatingcontrol, steam pressure gauge, gauge cocks, gauge glass, siphon, and ASME safetyvalve.


1. Tankless water heater.

2. Low water cutoff and feeder combination.

3. 1-1/2 in. inspection opening with brass plug for each section.

4. Pilot pressure regulator.

5. Multi-stage firing.

6. Electronic flame safeguard control system with panel.

7. High-Low-Off firing.

8. Full modulation firing.

9. Flow switch.

E. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide commercial gas-firedboilers of one of the following:

1. BDP Company.


3. Hydrotherm Inc.




2.5 FORCED DRAFT BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, forced draft cast-iron boilers of capacity as scheduled. Provide net ratings approved by I=B=R, and construct in accordance with requirements ofASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

B. Boiler: Construct of cast-iron sections with integral base, sealed with asbestos rope forgas-tight construction, factory-assembled and tested.


C. Equipment: Provide insulated flush jacket, burner mounting plate with refractory, flue collarwith built-in breeching damper, front clean out doors and plates, back access door, fluebrushes and handles, close nipples and caps for washout tappings on front and backsections, and supply elbows or top outlets.

1. Provide for hot-water boilers ASME relief valve, combination high- and low-limitcontrol, and combination pressure-temperature-altitude gauge.

2. Provide for steam boilers ASME safety valve, low-limit and high-limit pressure controls,steam pressure gauge, siphon, gauge glass, and gauge cocks.


1. Water level controls.

2. Low water cutoff and feeder combination.

3. Barometric damper.

4. 1-1/2 in. side inspection openings with plugs.

5. Tankless heater.

6. Flow switch.

E. Burner: Provide flame retention power burner for oil, gas, or gas-oil as scheduled. Provideburner mounted, factory-wired control panel for operation as scheduled.

F. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide forced draft boilers ofone of the following:



2.6 FIREBOX BOILERS

A. General: Provide as indicated, factory-assembled and tested firebox boilers, of capacity asscheduled. Construct in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, SectionIV.

B. Capacity: Provide boilers having not less than scheduled certified output ratings, withminimum surface and furnace volume as scheduled. Design so heat release does notexceed 83,200 but/cu.ft. of furnace volume.

C. Construction: Provide 3-pass compact firebox design with arched upright crown sheet and2-passes of fire tubes. Provide observation port in rear of firebox, 3 in. flue gasthermometer in smoke box. Provide refractory backed access covers for access to firetubes.

D. Jacket: Provide wrap-around steel jacket with glass or mineral fiber insulation and smoothenamel finish.

E. Tubes: Set tubes into sheets with roller expander at each end. Do not weld. Installspinner blades as recommended by manufacturer.


F. Assembly: Assemble boiler at factory on refractory-filled skid-type base. Install burner,controls, trim, and jacket. Provide all wiring, controls, starters, and disconnects.

G. Water Boiler Trim: Provide the following:

1. Low water cutoff.

2. Water relief valve.

3. Combination altitude/temperature gauge.

4. Operating and high-limit aquastats.

5. Burner controller.

H. Steam Boiler Trim: Provide the following:

1. Low water cutoff.

2. Water column and pump control.

3. Steam safety valve.

4. Compound steam and vacuum gauge.

5. Operating and limit controls.

6. Burner controller.

I. Fuel Burning Equipment: Provide forced-draft type, UL-listed, factory-assembled, mounted,and wired; including the following:

1. Forced draft fan with air damper.

2. Limit and operating controls.

3. Flame sensing device.

4. Control cabinet containing:a. Electric flame safeguard and programming timer.b. Control circuit switch.c. Control circuit fuse.d. Switching relays.e. Indicating lights for major operations.f. Numbered terminal strips.g. Numbered wiring.h. Engraved nameplates.i. Magnetic starters with thermal overload protection.j. Control circuit transformer.

J. Electrical Requirements: Provide controls for 115V, 60 Hz, single phase. Provide motorsof scheduled voltage with built-in thermal overload protection with manual reset.

K. Oil Burner: Provide flange-mounted mechanical atomizing type oil burner suitable for No. 2fuel oil, with oil pump. Provide the following:

1. Atomizing oil nozzles.

2. Oil solenoid valves.


3. Oil filter.

4. Oil metering control valve with adjustable cam operator.

5. Ignition assembly.

6. Airflow safety switch.

7. Flame safeguard control.

8. Controls and linkage for firing sequence.

9. Fuel-air regulation damper and controller.

L. Gas Burner: Provide flange-mounted radial port flame retention type gas burner suitablefor natural gas. Provide the following:

1. Safety gas valves.

2. Gas volume control valve.

3. Gas pressure regulator.

4. Gas gauge.

5. Gas cocks.

6. High and low pressure interlocks.

7. Gas-electric ignition assembly.

8. Air flow safety switch.

9. Flame safeguard control.

10. Controls and linkage for firing sequence.

11. Fuel-air regulation damper and controller.

M. Combination Gas/Oil Burner: Provide flange-mounted combination radial port flameretention type gas burner and mechanical pressure atomized type oil burner suitable for No.2 oil and with oil pump. Provide the following:

1. Gas Side:a. Safety gas valves.b. Gas volume control valve.c. Gas pressure regulator.d. Gas gaugee. Gas cocks.f. Provision for pressure check.g. Controls for firing sequence.

2. Oil Side:a. Air-oil atomizing nozzle.b. Oil solenoid valves.c. Oil filter.d. Oil metering control valve.e. Controls for firing sequence.f. Flame safeguard controlg. Air flow safety switch.h. Ignition assembly.i. Fuel-air regulation damper and controller.


j. Change over selector switch in control cabinet.

N. Provide combination burner such that no changes in linkage burner position, or mechanicaladjustment are necessary when changing fuels.

O. Provide change over selector switch, with combustion control relay, that will provide properignition timing for fuel being burned.

P. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide firebox boilers of one ofthe following:

1. Burnham Corp.; Hydronics Division.

2. Dunham-Bush, Inc.

3. Industrial Boiler Co.

4. Kewanee Boiler Corp.

2.7 PULSE COMBUSTION BOILERS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested gas-fired pulse combustion modular hotwater boilers of capacities and having components and accessories as scheduled.

B. Fuel: Provide boilers for natural gas at 4.5 in. wg minimum and 7.0 in. wg maximum.

C. Modules: Provide modules consisting of molded combustion air inlet chamber, pre-purgepost-purge blower assembly, air-gas fuel control valve, cast-bronze pulse combustionchamber, welded-steel absorption unit with spiraled fire tubes, and molded exhaustchamber. Provide insulated jacket around module and boiler-mounted electrical controlpanel enclosure with operation sequence indicator lights.

D. Tappings: Provide the following tappings, extended to outside of jacket:

1. Air Inlet and Exhaust: 1-1/2 in. plastic.

2. Hot Water Supply and Return: 1 in. NPS.

3. Condensate Drain: 1/4 in. NPS.

E. Absorption Unit: Construct for 30 psi working pressure.

F. Controls: Provide solid-state controller with circulator relay, fan prove pressure switch, andpressure-sensing flame safeguard system. Provide ignition transformer and spark plug forinterrupted ignition. Provide combination gas control with manual shutoff valve, systempressure controlled regulator, and automatic redundant control valves. Provide high limitwater temperature controller, ASME approved pressure relief valve, and temperature andpressure gauge. Design gas controls for step-firing of modules, and arranged so that anyinoperative module will not interfere with operation of other modules.

G. Step Controller: Provide self-contained sequencing-type step controller consisting of thefollowing:

1. Metal panel chassis with integral solid-state controls. Indicator light arrangement formonitoring boiler step-firing. Outdoor temperature reset of supply water system.


H. Piping: Provide connecting manifold piping between modules, to accept inlet and outletconnections of each unit. Provide vibration isolator in supply and return manifold, andsupport piping with piping clamps.

I. Accessories: Provide the following accessories as indicated and/or scheduled.

1. Exhaust mufflers.

2. Air supply mufflers.

3. Low water cutoff and manual reset hi-limit (for each bank of boilers).

4. Vent terminal plates.

J. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide pulse combustion boilersof one of the following:

1. Hydrotherm, Inc.

2.8 SCOTCH MARINE FIRETUBE BOILER

A. General Description: Scotch marine boilers shall be factory-assembled and tested,packaged, multi-pass, horizontal Firetube boilers of dry or wet back type. Boilers shall befactory-mounted on heavy steel base frame, complete with integral forced draft burner,burner controls, boiler trim, and refractory. Factory-assemble and wire boilers so that onlywater, steam, fuel, blow down, electrical, and vent connections are required.

1. Provide 5 sq. ft. of heating surface per rated bhp.

2. Capacities and electrical characteristics are scheduled on the Drawings.

3. Provide manufacturer's standard number of hand holes in boiler shell, and manhole onboilers over 48 in. in diameter. Provide 2 lifting lugs, permanently attached to top ofboiler.

B. Front and Rear Doors: Hinged or davited, sealed with heat resistant gaskets, and fastenedwith lugs and cap- screws. Design doors so front and rear tube sheets and all flues arefully accessible for inspection and cleaning when doors are open.

1. Provide observation ports at each end of boiler for inspection of flame conditions.

C. Refractory: Provide refractory and insulation in door construction, accessible for inspectionand maintenance.

D. Exhaust Gas Vent: On top of boiler, complete with stack thermometer.

E. Insulation and Jacket: Minimum of 2 in. thick fiberglass blanket insulation on boiler shell,cover with sheet metal jacket of manufacturer's standard gauge.

F. Painting: Factory-painted hard enamel finish on boiler, base frame, and componentsassembly.

G. Steam Boiler Trim:

1. Water Column: Complete with try-cocks, gauge glass set, and gauge glass and watercolumn blow down valves.


2. Feed water Pump Control: An integral part of the water column, selected toautomatically actuate motor-driven feed-water pump to maintain boiler water levelwithin normal limits.

3. Low Water Cutoff: An integral part of the boiler feed-water control, factory-wired intoburner control circuit to prevent burner operation if boiler water level falls below safeoperating level; complete with manual reset device for high pressure boilers.

4. Auxiliary Low Water Cutoff: A second low water cutoff, mounted below primary unit,and wired in series to primary unit.

5. Steam Pressure Gauge: Located on front end of boiler including siphon, cock, andtest connection. Range shall suit operating pressure.

6. Steam Pressure Controls: To regulate burner operation, mounted near water column,complete with high limit pressure control.

H. Hot Water Boiler Trim:

1. Hot Water Connections: Supply and return connection locations shall provide internalthermal circulation that will mix return water with hot water in boiler.

2. Dip Tube: An integral part of the hot water outlet, and air vent tapping in boiler shellfor removal of entrained air.

3. Low Water Cutoff: Mounted on the side of boiler; factory-wired into burner controlcircuit to prevent burner operation if boiler water falls below safe level.

4. Pressure and Temperature Gauges: Mounted on boiler, with temperature sensingelement located adjacent to the hot water outlet.

5. Water Relief Valves: Of type and size to comply with ASME Code requirements.

6. Temperature Controls: To regulate burner operation; mounted temperature sensingelements adjacent to hot water outlet.

7. Pressure Controls: High pressure limit control.

I. Gas Burner: High radiant multiport type burner, integral with front head of boiler, approvedfor operation with natural, manufactured, or mixed gas.

1. Operation:a. On-off principle.b. High-low-off principle.c. Full modulation principle, 4 to 1 turndown ratio.d. Return burner to low fire position for ignition.

2. Gas Pilot: Premix type with automatic electric ignition, complete with electronicdetector to monitor pilot so primary fuel valve cannot open until pilot flame has beenestablished.

3. Forced Draft Blower: For combustion air, mounted on front of boiler, with castaluminum blower wheel and radial blades, directly connected to flanged type motor

4. Combustion Air Control:a. Manually operated damper for proper air-fuel ratios.b. Motor-operated combustion air damper, linked with auxiliary switch to control high

or low fire gas supply.c. Motor-operated combustion air damper and cam-operated butterfly gas-metering

valve, operated by single damper control motor to regulate fire according to load


demand. Operation of damper control motor shall be regulated by potentiometertype positioning controls.

5. Gas Burner Piping: Integrally mounted, including primary gas shutoff valve, motoroperated with spring return, designed to start and stop gas burner, and to closeautomatically in event of power failure, flame failure, or low water condition. Gas trainshall include lubricated plug cock located upstream of primary valve for manualshutoff, plugged leakage test cock and second lubricated plug cock; additional devicesrequired, include:a. A proof of closure switch on primary valve, and high and low gas pressure

switchesb. A second motorized safety shutoff valve and additional plugged leakage test

cock, with proof-of-closure switch and manual reset.c. A vent valve located between safety shutoff valves.

6. Control Panel: NEMA 1A control panel mounted on front of boiler, complete with anelectronic programming relay, blower motor starter, and control switches. Panels shallinclude:a. Plug-in fuel modules, and indicating lights for low water level, flame failure, fuel

valve open, and load demand.b. Programming relay, to control ignition timing and starting and stopping burner

through pre-combustion purge and post-combustion purge, plus a flame scannerto shut down burner in event of ignition, pilot, or main flame failure.

c. Manual-automatic selector switch and damper motor positioning switch to permitautomatic firing in accordance with load demand, or manual control of firing rateat any desired point between low fire and maximum rating;

d. Factory-wired UL-labeled electrical equipment. Use oil, heat, and moistureresistant wire throughout.

J. #2 Oil Burner: Low-pressure air or pressure atomizing type burner, integral with front headof boiler, approved for operation with commercial #2 fuel oil.


2. Oil Pilot: Air atomizing type with automatic electric ignition, complete with electronicdetector to monitor pilot so primary oil valve cannot open until pilot flame has beenestablished.

3. Forced Draft Blower: For combustion air, mounted on front of boiler, with castaluminum blower wheel and radial blades, directly connected to flanged type motor.

4. Combustion Air Control:a. Manually set damper for proper air-fuel ratios.b. Motor-operated damper, linked with auxiliary switch to control high and low fire oil

supply.c. Motor-operated damper and cam-operated oil metering valve, operated by single

damper control motor to regulate fire according to load demand. Operation ofdamper control motor shall be regulated by potentiometer type positioningcontrols.

5. Oil Pump: Shall deliver twice the capacity of maximum burning rate.a. Pump shall be belt driven from blower motor, integral with burner.b. Pump unit shall be separate motor driven pump set, shipped loose for field

installation.


6. Oil Burner Piping: Integrally mounted, including oil pressure regulating devices, oilmetering controls, solenoid shutoff valves, pressure gauges, and fuel oil strainer.

7. Burner Unit: Low pressure air or pressure atomizing system including:a. Belt-driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator, inlet air filter,

and air pressure gauge.b. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base rail. c. Belt-driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator, inlet air filter,

and air pressure gauge.d. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base rail.

8. Control Panel: NEMA 1A control panel mounted on front of boiler, complete withelectronic programming relay, blower motor starter, and control switches. Panels shallinclude:a. Plug-in fuel modules, and indicating lights for low water level, flame failure, fuel

valve open, and load demand;b. Programming relay to control ignition timing and starting and stopping burner

through pre-combustion purge and post-combustion purge, plus a flame scannerto shut down boiler in event of ignition, pilot, or main flame failure.

c. Manual-automatic selector switch and damper motor positioning switch to permitautomatic firing in accordance with load demand, or manual control of firing rateat any desired point between low fire and maximum rating;

d. Factory-wired UL labeled electrical equipment. Use oil, heat, and moistureresistant wire throughout.

K. Combination Gas/Oil Burner: Combination low-pressure air atomizing type for oil and highradiant multiport type for gas, integral with front head of boiler, and approved for operationwith commercial #2 fuel oil and natural, manufactured, or mixed gas.


2. Gas Pilot: Premix type with automatic electric ignition, complete with electronicdetector to monitor pilot so primary fuel valve cannot open until pilot flame has beenestablished.

3. Forced Draft Blower: For combustion air, mounted on front of boiler, with castaluminum blower wheel and radial blades, directly connected to flanged type motor.

4. Combustion Air Control:a. Manually set damper for proper air-fuel ratios.b. Motor-operated damper, linked with auxiliary switch to control high or low fire

supply.c. Motor-operated damper and cam-operated fuel metering valves, operated by

single damper control motor to regulate fire according to load demand. Operationof damper control motor shall be regulated by potentiometer type positioningcontrols.

5. Oil Pump: Shall deliver twice the capacity of maximum burning rate.a. Pump shall be belt driven from blower motor, integral with burner.b. Pump unit shall be a separate motor driven pump set, shipped loose for field

installation.

6. Oil Burner Piping: Integrally mounted, including oil pressure regulating devices, oilmetering controls, solenoid shutoff valves, pressure gauges, and fuel oil strainer.


7. Oil Burner Unit: Low pressure air atomizing system including:a. Belt-driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator, inlet air filter,

and air pressure gauge.b. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base rail.c. Belt-driven air compressor, lubricating oil tank, oil level indicator, inlet air filter,

and air pressure gauge.d. Separate air compressor module mounted on boiler base frame.

8. Gas Burner Piping: Integrally mounted gas piping including primary gas shutoff valve,motor operated with spring return, designed to start and stop gas burner, and to closeautomatically in event of power failure, flame failure, or low water condition. Gas trainshall include lubricated plug cock located upstream of primary valve for manualshutoff, plugged leakage test cock, and second lubricated plug cock; additionaldevices required, include:a. A proof of closure switch on primary valve, and high and low gas pressure

switches.b. A second motorized safety shutoff valve and additional plugged leakage test

cock.c. A vent valve located between safety shutoff valves.

9. Control Panel: NEMA 1A control panel mounted on front of boiler, complete with anelectronic programming relay, blower motor starter, and control switches. Panels shallinclude:a. Plug-in fuel modules, and indicating lights for low water level, flame failure, fuel

valve open, and load demand;b. Programming relay, to control ignition timing and starting and stopping boiler

through pre-combustion purge and post-combustion purge, plus a flame scannerto shut down boiler in event of ignition, pilot, or main flame failure;

c. Oil-gas selector switch.d. Manual-automatic selector switch and damper motor positioning switch to permit

automatic firing in accordance with load demand, or manual control of firing rateat any desired point between low fire and maximum rating;

e. Factory-wired UL-labeled electrical equipment. Use oil, heat, and moistureresistant wire throughout.

10. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide packaged Firetubeboilers of one of the following:a. Burnham Corp; Hydronics Division.b. Cleaver-Brooks; Div. Aqua-Chem, Inc.c. Hurst Boiler Co.d. Kewanee Boiler Corp.e. Sellers Engineering Co.f. Superior Boiler Works, Inc.g. York-Shipley, Inc.

2.9 ELECTRIC BOILERS - RESISTANCE

A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested electric resistance boilers as indicated. Provide capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled.

B. High-Pressure, Pressure Vessels: Construct of carbon steel, in accordance with ASMEBoiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section I, for working pressures as scheduled. ProvideASME stamp, and register with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. Furnish ASME data reports.


C. Low-Pressure Vessels: Construct of carbon steel, in accordance with ASME Boiler andPressure Vessel Code, Section IV, for working pressure as scheduled. Provide ASMEstamp, and register with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors. FurnishASME data reports.

D. Base and Lifting Lugs: Mount pressure vessel on 4 in. steel channel frame base. Providelifting lugs welded to pressure vessel, and extending above top of jacket.

E. Nozzles: Provide flanges for hot-water inlet and outlet, and heating element inserts. Provide threaded connections for water relief valve and boiler drain.

F. Nozzles: Provide flanges for steam outlet and heating element inserts. Provide threadedconnections for steam safety valve, boiler drain, surface blow down, boiler feed water, andlow water cutoff.

G. Insulation: Provide 4 in. thick fiberglass type insulation covering entire surface of pressurevessel.

H. Jacket: Provide steel jacket around boiler with removable side panels for access topressure vessel, and knockouts for electrical conduit and mechanical piping. Providebaked enamel finish, manufacturer's standard color.

I. Heating Elements: Provide replaceable Incoloy sheathed heating elements, each rated at15 KW maximum, of sufficient length to limit heat transfer to 75 W/sq. in. maximum. Subdivide load branch circuits into 48 amperes maximum each. Wire elements withUL-listed conductors.

J. Power Panels: Provide NEMA 1 ventilated power panel with hinged door and key lockinghandle. Provide mechanical lugs bolted to copper bus bars. Provide NEMA Class J or K5,maximum 60 amperes fuses. Provide 3-pole magnetic contractors, listed by UL for100,000 cycles at full load, with full-voltage coil, subject to local code requirements. Wire inaccordance with ANSI/UL 834.

K. Boiler Trim: Provide pressure-temperature gauge, ASME certified relief valve, drain valve,low-water cutoff, and dual automatic reset high-temperature cutouts.

L. Boiler Trim: Provide pressure gauge, ASME certified steam safety valve, automatic floattype low-water cutoff with sight glass, automatic reset high-pressure cutout, and bottom andsurface blow down valves.

M. Controls: Provide 120-volt control circuit transformer where required. Provide stepcontroller with recycling relay to return controller to OFF position after power failure. Boilerswith 4-steps or less can use heavy-duty multistage thermostats in lieu of step controller. Provide control circuit switch, pilot lights for each step, and supply voltage indicator. Factory-wire controls to limit field-wiring requirements to installation of external feed.

N. Accessories: Provide the following accessories:

1. Manual reset high limit control.

2. Manual reset low water cutout.

3. Nonfused interlocking disconnect switch.


4. Door interlock switch.

5. Dip tube type hot water outlet.

O. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide electric resistanceboilers of one of the following:

1. Brasch Mfg Co, Inc.

2. Bryan Steam Corp.

3. Industrial Engineering and Equipment Co (INDEECO).

4. Patterson-Kelley Div; Harsco Corp.

5. Precision Parts Corp.

2.10 CAST-IRON ELECTRIC BOILERS

A. General: Provide factory-assembled and tested cast-iron electric boilers as indicated. Provide capacities and electrical characteristics as scheduled.

B. Pressure Vessel: Construct of cast iron, in accordance with ASME Boiler and PressureVessel Code, Section IV, stamped with ASME Code symbol. Insulate pressure vesselsurfaces with fiberglass type insulation.

C. Jacket: Provide steel jacket encompassing boiler with hinged front door for access, andknockouts for conduit and piping. Provide brackets on rear for wall mounting. Providebaked enamel finish, manufacturer's standard color.

D. Heating Elements: Provide replaceable Incoloy sheathed heating elements, with 75 W/sq.in. maximum rating.

E. Controls: Provide 24-volt control system, factory-prewired, including fuse for each elementleg, thermostat terminal block, power input terminal and fuse block, time-delay relays,heavy-duty contactors, and low-voltage transformer.

F. Control Sequence: Energize heating elements individually and in sequence throughtime-delay relays. De-energize in same sequence. If high-limit setting is exceeded,immediately de-energize all heating elements.

G. Boiler Trim: Provide ASME water relief valve, combination pressure and temperaturegauge, combination low and high-limit control, low water cutoff, and pump relay.

H. Boiler Trim: Provide ASME steam safety valve, high-limit pressure control, low-pressurecontrol, low-water cutoff, water gauge glass, gauge cocks, and steam pressure gauge.

I. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide cast-iron electric boilers ofone of the following:

1. Weil-McLain, A Marley Co.


PART 1 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which boiler(s) are to be installed, and substrate thatwill support boilers. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have beencorrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF CAST-IRON BOILER

A. General: Install boilers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, inaccordance with State and local code requirements, and in accordance with requirementsof local Utility Company. Install units plumb and level, to tolerance of 1/8 in. in 10 ft. - 0 in.in both directions. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and overboilers.

B. Support: Install boilers on 4 in. thick concrete pad, 4 in. larger on each side than base ofunit.

C. Erection: Assemble boiler sections in proper sequence and with sealing between eachsection. Assemble boiler trim shipped loose, or unassembled for shipment purposes. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Electrical Work: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to befactory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical work installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittaland installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipmentstart-up until electrical work is acceptable to equipment Installer.

E. Gas Piping: Refer to Division 23 Section “PLUMBING PIPING”. Connect gas piping toboiler, full size of boiler gas train inlet; provide union with sufficient clearance for burnerremoval and service.

F. Oil Piping: Refer to Division 23 Section "FUEL SYSTEM". Connect oil piping to boiler, fullsize of inlet to burner; provide shutoff valve and union with sufficient clearance for burnerremoval and service.

G. Hot Water Piping: Refer to Division 23 Section "HYDRONIC PIPING". Connect supply andreturn boiler tapings as indicated, with shutoff valve and union or flange at each connection.

H. Steam and Condensate Piping: Refer to Division23 Section "STEAM AND CONDENSATEPIPING". Connect supply, return, and blow down boiler tapings as indicated, with shutoffvalve and union or flange at each connection.

I. Breeching: Refer to Division 23 Section "BREECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS". Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet. Route as indicated.



A. Flush and clean cast-iron boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance withmanufacturer's start-up instructions.

B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping in accordance with applicable sections ofASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection ofboiler piping, observation of hydrostatic testing, and for certification of completed boilerunits.

D. Start-up boilers, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and in presence ofboiler manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstrate compliance withrequirements. Adjust burner for maximum burning efficiency. Replace damaged ormalfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces withmanufacturer's touch- up paint.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIREBOX BOILERS

A. General: Comply with boiler manufacturer's instructions for installation, except asotherwise indicated.

B. Comply with installation requirements of local and state boiler codes, and applicableprovisions of NFPA and ASME boiler code standards.

C. Install firebox boilers on 4 in. high concrete pad where indicated, maintain manufacturer'srecommended clearances around and over top of boilers.

D. Install boiler trim not installed at factory.

E. Connect water or steam, fuel; blow down piping, and breeching as indicated.

F. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to befactory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittaland installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with boilerstart-up until wiring installation is acceptable to boiler installer


A. Flush and clean firebox boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance withmanufacturer's start-up instructions.

B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping in accordance with applicable sections ofASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.


C. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection ofboiler piping, observation of hydrostatic testing, and for certification of completed boilerunits.

D. Start-up firebox boilers, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and inpresence of boiler manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstratecompliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls andequipment.

E. Cleaning: Clean factory-finished surfaces. Repair any marred or scratched surfaces withmanufacturer's touch-up paint.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF PULSE COMBUSTION BOILERS

A. General: Install boilers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and localCode requirements. Install units plumb and level, to tolerance of 1/8 in. in 10 ft. 0 in. in bothdirections. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances.

B. Support: Install boilers on 4 in. thick reinforced concrete pad, 4 in. larger on each side thanbase of unit.

C. Assemble unit sections and parts shipped loose or unassembled for shipment purposes. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to befactory-mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittaland installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipmentstart-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment Installer.

E. Gas Piping: Refer to Division 23 section specifying gas systems. Connect gas piping toboiler gas train with shutoff valve and union.

F. Hot Water Piping: Refer to Division 23 section specifying hydronic-piping systems. Connect to hot water supply and return connections with shutoff valve and union.

G. Air Intake and Exhaust Piping: Provide air intake and exhaust piping, size asrecommended by manufacturer. Use Schedule 40 CPVC pipe and fittings for exhaust,PVC for supply, with solvent cement joints. Pitch toward boiler minimum of 1/4 in. per foot(2%) or as indicated. Isolate piping from substrate at each point of contact with 1/4 in.flexible unicellular insulation. Run individual lines to each boiler module. Providetermination as indicated.

H. Condensate Piping: Refer to Division-23 section specifying make-up and drain piping. Provide Schedule 40 CPVC manifold pipe and fittings from boiler to nearest floor drain oras indicated. Provide clear plastic tubing between boiler module connection and manifoldconnection.


I. Start-Up: Flush and clean pulse combustion boilers in accordance with manufacturer'sstart-up instructions. Adjust each module for maximum firing efficiency. Test and adjustcontrol sequence for proper operation.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF SCOTCH MARINE BOILERS

A. General: Install boilers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions,requirements State and local code and requirements of local Utility Company. Install unitsplumb and level, to tolerance if 1/8 in. in 10 ft. in both directions. Maintain manufacturer'srecommended clearances around and over boilers.

B. Support: Install scotch marine boilers on 4 in. high concrete pad, 6 in. larger on each sidethan base of unit. Concrete requirements are specified in Division 03.

C. Erection: Assemble boiler trim shipped loose or unassembled for shipment purposes. Follow manufacturer's installation instructions.

D. Gas Piping: Refer to Section 22 10 00 “PLUMBING PIPING”. Connect gas piping to boiler,full size of boiler gas train inlet; provide union with sufficient clearance for burner removaland service.

E. Oil Piping: Refer to Section 22 80 10 "FUEL SYSTEMS". Connect oil piping to boiler, fullsize of inlet to burner; provide shutoff valve and union with sufficient clearance for burnerremoval and service.

F. Hot Water Piping: Refer to Section 23 21 13.23 "HYDRONIC PIPING". Connect supplyand return boiler tapings as indicated, with shutoff valve and union or flange at eachconnection.

G. Steam and Condensate Piping: Refer to Section 23 22 13 "STEAM AND CONDENSATEPIPING". Connect supply, return, and blow down boiler tapings as indicated, with shutoffvalve and union or flange at each connection.

H. Breeching: Refer to Section 23 51 00 "BEECHINGS, CHIMNEYS, AND STACKS". Connect breeching to boiler outlet, full size of outlet.

I. Electrical: Refer to Section 26 05 20 “WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES”.


A. Flush and clean boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance with manufacturer'sinstructions.

B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping in accordance with applicable Sections ofASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection ofboiler installation, piping connections, observation of hydrostatic testing, and for certificationof completed boiler units.


D. Services: After testing and inspection is complete, provide the services of an authorizedfactory service representative to perform start-up and operation demonstration services.

E. Start-up: Perform services in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged ormalfunctioning controls and equipment.

3.9 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install boilers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions, inaccordance with State and local code requirements, and in accordance with requirementsof local utility company. Install units plumb and level, to tolerance of 1/8 in. in 10 ft. in bothdirections. Maintain manufacturer's recommended clearances around and over boilers.

B. Support: Install electric resistance boilers on 4 in. high concrete pad 6 in. larger on eachside than base of unit.

C. Erection: Assemble boiler trim that has been shipped loose, or unassembled for shipmentpurposes.

D. Steam and Condensate Piping: Refer to Division 23 Section "STEAM AND CONDENSATEPIPING". Connect steam piping, blow down piping, drain piping, boiler feed piping, andsafety valve relief piping; as indicated.

E. Hot Water Piping: Refer to Division 23 Section "HYDRONIC PIPING". Connect hot waterpiping; drain piping, and relief valve relief piping.

F. Electrical Work: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer, but not specified to befactory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical work is in accordance with manufacturer's submittal andinstallation requirements of Division 26 Sections. Do not proceed with equipmentstart-up until electrical work is acceptable to equipment Installer.


A. Flush and clean electric boilers upon completion of installation, in accordance withmanufacturer's start-up instructions.

B. Hydrostatically test assembled boiler and piping in accordance with applicable Sections ofASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

C. Arrange with National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors for inspection ofboiler piping, observation of hydrostatic testing, and for certification of completed boiler unit.

D. Start-up electric boilers, in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions, and inpresence of boiler manufacturer's representative. Test controls and demonstratecompliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls andequipment.


3.11 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURE

A. Owner's Instructions: Provide services of manufacturer's technical representative for onehalf day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation and maintenance of pulse combustionboilers. Schedule instruction with Owner; provide at least 7-day notice to Contractor andEngineer of training date.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016CONDENSING BOILERS 23 52 16

SECTION 23 52 16

CONDENSING BOILERS

PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Manufactured units.

B. Boiler construction.

C. Boiler trim.

D. Fuel burning system.

E. Factory installed controls.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute (AHRI); current edition at www.ahrinet.org.

B. ANSI Z21.13 - American National Standard for Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and HotWater Boilers; 2014, with Errata.

C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 I-P - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise ResidentialBuildings; 2013, Including All Amendments and Errata.

D. ASHRAE Std 103 - Methods of Testing for Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency of ResidentialCentral Furnaces and Boilers; 2007, Including All Amendments.

E. ASME BPVC-IV - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV - Rules for Construction ofHeating Boilers; 2015.

F. NBBI Manufacturer and Repair Directory - The National Board of Boiler and PressureVessel Inspectors (NBBI); current edition at www.nationalboard.org.

G. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; 2015.

H. SCAQMD 1146.1 - South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule No.1146.1; currentedition.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data indicating general assembly, components, controls, safetycontrols, and wiring diagrams with electrical characteristics and connection requirements,and service connections.


C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly, support details, connectionrequirements, and include start up instructions.

D. Manufacturer's Factory Inspection Report: Submit boiler inspection prior to shipment.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operatinginstructions, cleaning procedures, replacement parts list, and maintenance and repair data.

F. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed inOwner's name and registered with manufacturer.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of productsspecified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience.


A. Protect boilers from damage by leaving factory inspection openings and shipping packagingin place until final installation.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. See Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Provide a five year warranty to include coverage for heat exchanger.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Natural Gas, Propane, or Combination Natural Gas/Propane for Indoor Applications:

1. Aerco.

2. Lochinvar.

3. OR Approved equal.

2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Factory assembled, factory fire-tested, self-contained, readily transported unit ready forautomatic operation except for connection of water, fuel, electrical, and vent services.

B. Unit: Metal membrane wall, water or fire tube, condensing boiler on integral structural steelframe base with integral fuel burning system, firing controls, boiler trim, insulation, andremovable jacket, suitable for indoor application.

C. Electrical Characteristics:

1. ____ rated load amperes.


2. 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

D. Annual Fuel Utilization Efficiency (AFUE) in accordance with ASHRAE Std 103: 0.82.

2.3 BOILER CONSTRUCTION

A. Conform to the minimum requirements of ASME BPVC-IV and ANSI Z21.13 forconstruction of boilers.

B. Required Directory Listings:

1. AHRI Directory of Certified Product Performance - Air-Conditioning, Heating, andRefrigeration Institute (AHRI); current edition at www.ahrinet.org.

2. NBBI Manufacturer and Repair Directory - The National Board of Boiler and PressureVessel Inspectors (NBBI); current edition at www.nationalboard.org.

C. Heat Exchanger: Construct with materials that are impervious to corrosion where subjectto contact with corrosive condensables.

D. Provide adequate tappings, observation ports, removable panels, and access doors forentry, cleaning, and inspection.

E. Insulate casing with insulation material, protected and covered by heavy-gage metal jacket.

F. Factory apply boiler base and other components, that are subject to corrosion, with durable,acrylic, powder coated, painted, weather-proofed, or ___________ finish.

2.4 BOILER TRIM

A. ASME rated pressure relief valve.

B. Flow switch.

C. Temperature and pressure gage.

D. Pressure Switches:

1. High gas pressure.

2. Low gas pressure.

3. Air pressure.

E. Manual reset high limit.

2.5 FUEL BURNING SYSTEM

A. Provide forced draft automatic burner, integral to boiler, designed to burn natural gas, andmaintain fuel-air ratios automatically.

1. Blower Design: Statically and dynamically balanced to supply combustion air; directconnected to motor.


2. Forced Draft Design: Mixes combustion air and gas to achieve 90 percent combustionefficiency.

3. Combustion Air Filter: Protects fuel burning system from debris.

B. Gas Train: Plug valve, safety gas valve, gas-air ratio control valve, and pressure regulatorcontrols air and gas mixture.

C. Emission of Oxides of Nitrogen Requirements: Comply with SCAQMD 1146.1 for naturalgas fired system, as applicable.

D. Intakes: Combustion air intake capable of accepting free mechanical room air or directoutside air through a sealed intake pipe

2.6 FACTORY INSTALLED CONTROLS

A. Option for internal or external (0-10) VDC control.

B. Temperature Controls:

1. Automatic reset type to control fuel burning system on-off and firing rate to maintaintemperature.

2. Manual reset type to control fuel burning system to prevent boiler water temperaturefrom exceeding safe system water temperature.

3. Low-fire start time delay relay.

C. Electronic PI setpoint/modulation control system.

D. Microprocessor-based, fuel/air mixing controls.

2.7 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Provide factory tests to check construction, controls, and operation of unit.

C. Manufacturer to conduct boiler inspection prior to shipment; submit copy of inspectionreport to Architect.

D. Non-Conforming Work: See Section 01 40 00.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install boiler and provide connection of natural gas service in accordance with requirementsof NFPA 54 and applicable codes.


C. Coordinate factory installed controls with Section 23 09 23.

D. Pipe relief valves to nearest floor drain.

E. Pipe cooled condensate produced by the combustion process from the boiler condensateconnection and/or flue stack with suitable piping material to neutralizer prior to discharginginto condensate neutralization vessell and discharge the overflow into the nearest floordrain.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016AIR HANDLING UNITS 23 73 13

SECTION 23 73 13

AIR HANDLING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Extent of air handling unit work is indicated on Drawings and schedules, and byrequirements of this section.

B. Types of packaged air handling units specified in this section include the following:

1. Indoor blow-through.


A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of packaged airhandling units with characteristics, sizes, and capacities required, whose products havebeen in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10 years.


1. AMCA Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with AMCAstandards 210 and 500.

2. ARI Compliance: Test and rate air handling units in accordance with ARI 430"Standard for Central Station Air Handling Units", display certification symbol on unitsof certified models.

3. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance withASHRAE 15 "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration", latest edition.

4. NFPA Compliance: Provide air handling unit internal insulation having flame spreadrating not over 25 and smoke developed rating no higher than 50; and complying withNFPA 90A Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems", latest edition.

5. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of airhandling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMAStandards.

6. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) latest edition asapplicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electrical componentsof air handling units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data for air handling units showingdimensions, weights, capacities, ratings, fan performance with operating point clearlyindicated, motor electrical characteristics, gauges and finishes of materials, and installationinstructions.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit assembly-type shop Drawings showing unit dimensions, weightloadings, required clearances, construction details, and field connection details.


C. Wiring Diagrams: Submit manufacturer's electrical requirements for power supply wiring toair handling units. Submit manufacturer's ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock andcontrol wiring. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are factory-installed andportions to be field-installed.

D. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance instructions, including instructions for lubrication,filter replacement, motor and drive replacement, and spare parts lists. Include this data,product data; shop Drawings, and wiring diagrams in maintenance manuals; in accordancewith requirements of Division 01.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Deliver air-handling units with factory-installed shipping skids and lifting lugs; packcomponents in factory fabricated protective containers.

B. Handle air-handling units carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and finish. Do not install-damaged components; replace and return damaged components to airhandling unit manufacturer.

C. Store air-handling units in clean dry place and protect from weather and construction traffic.

D. Comply with Manufacturer's rigging and installation instructions for unloading air handlingunits, and moving them to final location.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide air handling units of oneof the following:

1. McQuay

2. Temtrol

3. York (Johnson Controls)

2.2 AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Provide factory-fabricated and factory-tested air handling units as indicated, ofsizes and capacities as scheduled, and as specified herein.

B. Casings: Construct casings of galvanized steel, maximum L/240 deflection, designed towithstand specific operating pressures. Provide casing panels and/or access doors thatare easily and quickly removable for inspection and access to internal parts.

1. Provide Multizone units consisting of single zone components, diffuser section,damper section, zoning dampers, and balancing plate when required to equalizeresistances through cooling and heating passes.

2. Provide reinforced points of support for either setting or hanging units.

3. Provide stainless steel insulated drain pan, located under cooling coil section extensive enough to catch condensate leaving the coil at highest catalogued face


velocity. Provide at least one drain connection at low point in drain pan. Drainconnections shall be located so as to provide and ensure positive condensatedrainage – no standing water.

4. Cover casing and frame with manufacturer's standard protective finish on both sides.

C. Coils: Provide heating and cooling coil(s) of scheduled capacity, mounted in unit in mannerpermitting removal.

1. Construct coils with copper tubing primary surface and aluminum secondary surfacebonded to tubes by method approved by specified manufacturer. Provide chilledwater and heating coils with threaded connections. Provide direct expansion coilswith solder connections, liquid refrigerant distributors, and connections for gravity oildrainage. Pitch coils in unit casing for drainage.

D. Coil Sections: Provide common or individual casing for heating and cooling coil(s) asrequired. Design internal structure of coil section to allow for removal of coil(s), and providesuitable baffles to assure no air bypass around coil(s). Provide condensate pans and drainconnections to cooling coil sections of sufficient size to contain and remove coilcondensate. Insulate coil section casings and drain pans as specified in "Insulation"paragraph.

E. Fan Sections: Provide type of fans scheduled specifically designed and suitable for classof service indicated. Provide adjustable motor base, adjusted with mounting bolts, toprovide variation in center distance. Provide locking nuts, or similar devices, to securebase in proper position. Provide belt-driven fans with adjustable pitch pulley permitting fanspeed to be varied. Select pulley for midpoint of adjustable range. Design fan shafts so asnot to pass through first critical speed when unit comes up to rated RPM. Providegrease-lubricated fan bearings with externally accessible fittings for lubrication. Staticallyand dynamically balance fan assemblies in fan housing after final assembly.

F. Filter Boxes: Provide filter boxes with either hinged access doors or quickly removablepanels, at each end. Provide racks to receive filters in flat type pattern.

G. Insulate casing sections with 1-1/2 in. thick, 3 lbs. per cu.ft. Density, neoprene coated,glass fiber insulation, "K" value at 75°F maximum 0.26 Btu/in./sq.ft./°F/hr, applied to internalsurfaces with adhesive and weld pins. Coat exposed edges of insulation with adhesive. Insulation and adhesive shall conform to NFPA 90A.

H. Provide insulation with fire-retarding characteristics, complying with NFPA 90A. Insulatedrain pans as required to prevent condensate formation on unit exterior at ambientconditions to be encountered.

I. Zoning Damper Sections: Provide zoning damper sections for multi-zone units, furnishedwith series of equal sized discharge openings, each with set of dampers to regulate air flowfrom heating pass and cooling pass. Permanently secure damper blades in correct positionon single shaft, rotating in centered bronze or nylon bearings, and extend either upward ordownward for connection to damper motor. Provide sealing edges on damper blades, orclose against sealing stops. Connect damper shafts together with one continuous linkagebar that may be cut in field to separate dampened openings into groupings as required. Provide damper section capable of either horizontal or vertical air discharge, factoryinstalled for orientation indicated.

J. Air Filters: Refer to Division 23 section "Air Cleaning" for air filters required for air handlingunits; not work of this section.


K. The Contractor shall for each air handling system with 2000 CFM airflow (nominal 5 Tons)or greater, install UL listed ionization smoke detectors in the main return air duct and/orwhere shown on the drawings. Smoke detectors furnished by Division 26. Refer toSection 23 05 12. Connect the detectors into the control circuit to stop the fan in the eventof the presence of smoke.

1. System airflow includes the total airflow of all units serving any space and all unitsconnected to the same return air plenum.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which air handling units are to be installed. Do notproceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF AIR HANDLING UNITS

A. General: Install air handling units where indicated, in accordance with equipmentmanufacturer's published installation instructions, and with recognized industry practices, toensure that units comply with requirements and serve intended purposes.

B. Coordination: Coordinate with other work, including ductwork, floor construction, roofdecking, and piping, as necessary to interface installation of air handling units with otherwork.

C. Access: Provide access space around air handling units for service as indicated, but in nocase less than that recommended by manufacturer.

D. Support: Install floor mounted air-handling units on 4 in. high reinforced concrete pad, 6 in.larger on each side than unit base.

E. Support: Install roof mounted air-handling units on roof curb.

1. Install curb as shown on plans.

F. Mounting: Mount air-handling units on vibration isolators, in accordance withmanufacturer's instructions.

G. Electrical Wiring: Install electrical devices furnished by manufacturer but not specified to befactory mounted. Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal to ElectricalInstaller.

1. Verify that electrical wiring installation is in accordance with manufacturer's submittaland installation requirements of Division 26 sections. Do not proceed with equipmentstart-up until wiring installation is acceptable to equipment installer.

H. Piping Connections: Refer to Division 23 HVAC sections. Provide piping, valves,accessories, gauges, supports, and flexible connectors as indicated.

I. Duct Connections: Refer to Division 23 Air Distribution sections. Provide ductwork,accessories, and flexible connections as indicated.


J. Filters: Install filters prior to operation of air handling units during construction. Maintainfilters during construction to prevent units from becoming dirty. Do not operate units at anytime without filters installed.

K. Grounding: Provide positive equipment ground for air handling unit components.


A. Testing: Upon completion of installation of air handling units, start-up and operateequipment to demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Field correctmalfunctioning units, then retest to demonstrate compliance.

3.4 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide one complete extra set of filters for each air-handling unit. Install new filters atcompletion of air handling system work, and prior to testing, adjusting, and balancing work. Obtain receipt from Owner that new filters have been installed.

B. Provide one spare set of belts for each belt driven air-handling unit, obtain receipt fromOwner that belts have been received.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016SPLIT DX CONDENSING UNITS 23 81 26

SECTION 23 81 26

SPLIT DX CONDENSING UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes split system DX condensing units.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 23 05 12: Mechanical and Electrical Coordination

2. Section 22 10 00: Plumbing Piping

3. Section 22 10 01: Plumbing Piping Specialties

4. Section 23 31 13: Metal Ductwork

5. Section 23 05 93: Testing, Adjusting and Balancing

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Do not use submittals as a proposal for equipment that has not beenpre-approved during the bid process.

1. Do not base bids on unapproved items!

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data, indicating full compliance withscheduled capacities and characteristics, including specific capacities at the scheduledentering air conditions, dimensions, weights, operating clearances and specific referencesto all specialties and accessories as scheduled or specified, including installation andstart-up instructions.

1. Data that does not apply to this specific project shall be marked out, or suitablydeleted.

2. Units shall be specifically identified, using the same nomenclature as shown on theplans.

C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop Drawings detailing the following:

1. Electrical requirements for power supply.

2. Ladder-type wiring diagrams for interlock and control wiring. Wiring diagrams shallclearly delineate field and factory wiring requirements, as well as the incorporation ofspecial features that only apply to this specific project.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include maintenance data and parts lists for each unit,including "troubleshooting" and maintenance guide, servicing guide and preventativemaintenance schedule and procedures in the Maintenance Manual required in accordancewith requirements of Division 01.



A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of heating andcooling units, of the types and capacities required, whose products have been insatisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.


1. Gas-Fired Furnace Sections: Constructed in accordance with applicable AGAStandards, and bearing the AGA Seal.

2. Testing and Rating Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of the followingstandards in effect as of the date of the Contract documents:a. UL Compliance: Units shall be UL-listed, and the unit shall bear the UL seal.

Units shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with ULrequirements.

b. UL and NEMA Compliance: Provide electrical components required as part of airhandling units, which have been listed and labeled by UL and comply with NEMAStandards.

c. NEC Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) latest editionas applicable to installation and electrical connections of ancillary electricalcomponents of air handling units.

d. ARI Compliance: ARI 270 "Standard for Sound Rating of Outdoor UnitaryEquipment."

e. ASHRAE Compliance: Construct and install refrigerant coils in accordance withASHRAE 15 “Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration”, latest edition.

f. ASHRAE Compliance: Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER) of condensing units shall benot less than that indicated in ASHRAE Standard 90.1 "Energy Conservation inNew Building Design", latest edition.

g. Equipment shall bear the appropriate Certified Rating Seal.


A. Handle units and components carefully to prevent damage. Replace damaged units orcomponents with new.

B. Store units and components in a clean, dry place, off the ground, and protect from weather,water, and physical damage.

1.5 SCHEDULING AND SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate roof opening locations and mechanical, electrical, gas and drain locations.

1.6 SPECIAL WARRANTY

A. Warranty on Compressor and Heat Exchanger: Provide written warranty, signed bymanufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair, within warranty period, compressors and heatexchanger which show inadequate and defective materials and/or workmanship, includingleakage, breakage, improper assembly, or failure to perform as required; providedmanufacturer's instructions for handling, installing, protecting and maintaining units havebeen properly followed during the warranty period. Replacement is limited to componentreplacement only, and does not include labor for removal and re-installation.


B. Warranty Card shall plainly state the name of the project, the starting and ending dates ofthe warranty period, and the serial numbers of the included equipment.

1.7 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Furnish to Owner, with receipt, the following spare parts for each unit:

1. One set of matched fan belts for each belt-driven fan.

2. One set of replacement filter media.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. General: Furnish and install an air-cooled condensing unit. The unit shall be shippedcompletely factory assembled, piped and wired internally, ready for field connections. Inaddition, manufacturer shall test operate unit at the factory before shipment. Thecondensing unit shall be a standard product of a firm regularly engaged in the manufacturerof heating-cooling equipment. The manufacturer shall have parts and service availablethroughout the United States.

B. Cooling Capacity: The total cooling capacity shall be as scheduled.

C. Compressor: Units shall be single speed compressors or two speed compressorsproviding staging control to deliver varying cooling load requirements. Compressor shall beresiliently mounted, suction cooled, overload protected, internal pressure relief protectedand have internal excessive current and temperature protection. Shall have verticalcrankshaft, ringed valves and piston, tuned discharge muffler, efficient oil pump andcrankcase heater.

D. Refrigerant System: Shall include liquid line service valve, suction line service valve, gaugeports, hi-capacity drier, high and low pressure switches and timed-off control. Controls shallinclude low ambient control kit and head pressure control to allow operations down to 20°F.

E. Condenser Coil(s): Coils(s) shall be non-ferrous construction with aluminum finsmechanically bonded to durable copper tubes. Coil(s) shall be pressure leak tested. Coil(s) shall be protected with expanded metal type hail guard(s).

F. Casing: Shall be constructed of galvanized steel that has been through a metal washpreparation and have a finish coat of baked-on outdoor enamel. Large access panel shallbe provided to allow complete service. The base section shall be provided with moistureremoval openings. Openings shall be provided for refrigerant lines and power connectionentry.

G. Air Mover: Shall be direct blade type fan(s). Motor(s) shall have inherent protectiondevices and shall be protected from moisture. Fan(s) shall be protected with steelguard(s).

H. All wiring shall be in compliance with NEC. Shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard210-81 and 360-86. Units shall have U.L. listing. Units shall have ETL TestingLaboratories listing where applicable.


I. Equipment Warranty: The compressor shall have a warranty for five years. All othercomponents shall have a warranty for one year.

J. Air-cooled condensing unit shall be of the following manufactures:

1. York.

2. Aaon.

2.2 ELECTRIC TEMPERATURE CONTROLS

A. The extent of the electric temperature control work is indicated by Drawings and schedules,and by the requirements of this section.

B. Generally, the controls shall be furnished as a package with the HVAC equipment. Certainmiscellaneous control items, interlocks, etc. are included as part of the work.

C. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical products that have been tested, listed and labeledby Underwriter's Laboratories and comply with NEMA standards.

D. Provide the required electric temperature control products in the sizes and capacitiesindicated, complying with the manufacturer's published product information on standardmaterials and components designed and constructed as recommended by themanufacturer for the applications indicated.

E. Install control system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions androughing-in Drawings, and details on the Drawings. Install electrical work and use electricalproducts complying with the requirements of the applicable Division 26 sections of thesespecifications. Mount controllers at convenient locations and heights.

F. After completion of the installation, adjust thermostats, and similar equipment provided aswork of this section.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and conditions under which units are to be installed. Do not proceed withwork until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner acceptable to Installer.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install units in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Installunits plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer'srecommended clearances.

B. Electrical Connections: Coordinate with Electrical for final connections to equipment andinstallation of loose-shipped electrical components.


3.3 DEMONSTRATION

A. Start-Up Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative tostart-up units, in accordance with manufacturer's written start-up instructions. Test controlsand demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioningcontrols and equipment.

B. Operating and Maintenance Training:

1. Provide services of manufacturer's service representative to instruct Owner'spersonnel in operation and maintenance of units. Training shall consist of a minimumof 8 hours, not necessarily consecutive, and shall include start-up and shutdown,servicing and preventative maintenance schedule and procedures, andtroubleshooting procedures plus procedures for obtaining repair parts and technicalassistance. Review operating and maintenance data contained in the Operating andMaintenance Manuals specified in Division 01.

2. Schedule training with Owner; provide at least 7-day prior notice to the Engineer.

3. Provide a written report of training periods to Owner and Architect/Engineer.

3.4 PIPING CONNECTIONS

A. Refer to Section 22 10 00 of these specifications for natural gas and condensate drainpiping.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK 26 05 10

SECTION 26 05 10

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL WORK

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Provide all labor, materials, supervision, tools, services, equipment and incidentalsnecessary for complete and operational systems as specified under this division and asshown on the Contract Drawings.

B. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and SupplementaryConditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Division.

1.2 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Prior to submitting a bid:

1. Examine the Drawings.

2. Read the Specifications and other Contract Documents, including Addenda andreferenced material.

3. Visit the site of the work.

4. Become informed prior to bidding as to existing conditions and limitations of theproject.

B. Bring exceptions and inconsistencies in Drawings, specifications, addenda, referencedmaterial, other Contract Documents and site conditions to the attention of the Engineer inwriting seven days before the bid opening; otherwise be responsible for changes andadditions that become necessary during construction.

C. Interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be made by Addendum and willbe mailed or delivered to each Contract Bidder of Record.

D. Location of material, equipment, devices and appliances shown in the Contract Drawingsare approximate and are subject to such revisions as may be necessary or desirable at thetime the work is installed. Install the work in relation to existing conditions and beresponsible for the correctness of the work with reference to finish elevations andsurrounding conditions.

E. The accompanying Drawings do not indicate the existing electrical installations other thanto identify modifications and extensions thereto. Visit the site and ascertain the conditionsto be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work,and installing the new work. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for anyadditional payment in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existinginstallations and/or installing any new or temporary work under this Division.

1.3 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Execute the work in accordance with local, state and national codes, ordinances andregulations having jurisdiction or authority over the work. Make any and all adjustments


required by these agencies without further cost to the Owner. In addition, conform to theapplicable provisions and recommendations of the following standards:

1. National Electrical Manufacturer Association (NEMA)

2. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

4. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC)

5. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE)

6. National Electrical Code (NEC)

7. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL)

8. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

9. International Building Code (IBC)

10. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA)

11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)

12. Applicable utility companies

13. Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS)

14. International Energy Conservation Code (IECC)

B. Execute the work in accordance with the most current codes and standards in effect at thetime of bidding.

C. In the event standards and codes conflict with each other, the most stringent shall apply.

D. Conform to National Electrical Code rules. Provide material and equipment, which isapproved by Underwriter's Laboratories, bears UL label and is acceptable to FactoryMutual.

E. It is specifically understood, however, that in those instances where capacities, sizes, etc.,of electrical equipment, devices or material as designated in these Specifications or on theDrawings are in excess of the minimum requirements of the National Electrical Code, suchdesignated capacities shall prevail.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARDS FOR MATERIALS

A. It is the intention of these specifications to indicate a standard of quality for all materialsincorporated in this work. Manufacturer's names and catalog numbers are used todesignate the item of equipment or material as a means of establishing grade and quality. Where several manufacturers are named, only the named manufacturer's products will beconsidered and the Contractor's bid shall be based on their product.

B. Where the phrase 'or approved equivalent' or 'or equivalent' or 'equivalent to' or 'acceptedsubstitute' is used in these specifications, the names or name mentioned are to be used asa basis of quality. Other manufacturers will be considered if the quality of the proposedmaterial is equivalent to that of materials named, in the opinion of the Engineer. Such


unnamed manufacturers' products will, however, be considered as substitutions and shallnot be used as a basis for bidding.

C. Basis of quality shall include material, workmanship, weight, finishes, and gauges ofmaterial, appearances, capacity and performance. Manufacturer's representation as toavailability of equipment, replacement parts and service personnel in the area will be afactor in consideration of submittals.

D. All materials shall be fully warranted.

E. Furnish standard products and manufacturers regularly engaged in production of suchequipment.

F. Furnish manufacturer's latest standard design.

G. All equipment shall conform with applicable IEEE, UL, ANSI and/or NEMA Standards.

H. Obtain manufacturer's recommendations and instructions for all installed equipmentincluding installation instructions, preparation cleaning, tests and preservice checks, andthen ensure all have been performed prior to completion of work.

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. The Engineer prior to installation shall approve substitutions of equipment. Substitution ofequipment shall be in accordance with Division 01 of the specifications.

B. When alternate or substitute materials and equipment are used, the Contractor shall beresponsible for space requirements, configurations, performance, changes in bases,supports, structural members and openings in structure, and other apparatus and tradesthat may be affected by their use.

C. Contractor shall bear all additional costs resulting from the use of substituted materials. Such changes shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate and direct the work under this division of the specifications with the work underother divisions of the specifications. Examine the Contract Documents and report anydiscrepancies between divisions of the work to the Engineer and obtain written instructionsfor changes necessary in the work.

B. Before installation, make proper provisions to avoid interferences with the work under otherdivisions of the specifications. Changes required in the work of the Contractor caused byhis neglect to do so shall be made by him at his own expense.

C. Harmonize the work under this division with the work under other divisions of thespecifications such that it may be installed in the most direct and workmanlike mannerwithout hindering, handicapping, or conflicting with the work under other divisions of thespecifications. Piping interferences shall be handled by giving precedence to pipelines thatrequire a stated grade for proper operation.


3.2 PERMITS AND FEES

A. Secure and pay for all necessary permits, licenses and inspections required by law for thecompletion of the Work. Secure and pay for all certificates of approval that are requiredand deliver them to the Owner before final acceptance of the Work.

B. If a utility company in connection with the work under this division makes any charges, theContractor shall advise the Owner, so that the Owner can pay these charges. Advise theOwner of these charges in a timely manner, so as not to delay construction of the project.


A. Use adequate quantities of skilled workmen who are trained and experienced in their craftsand who are familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed to perform thework in this division.

B. Install materials and equipment based upon actual dimensions and conditions at the projectsite. Field measure for materials or equipment requiring exact fit.

C. Be responsible for the proper location and sizes of all slots, holes or openings in thebuilding structure pertaining to the work in this division, and for the correct location of pipesleeves.

D. Perform work in accordance with good commercial practice. The good appearance of thefinished work shall be of equivalent importance with its operation.

E. Isolate all conduit, transformers and motors to insure an acceptable noise level free fromobjectionable vibration for all systems.

3.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Follow the manufacturer's directions in the delivery, storage and handling of equipment andmaterials.

B. Equipment and materials shall be tightly covered and protected against dirt, water,chemical or mechanical injury and theft. Damaged equipment will not be accepted.

C. After materials are installed, protect the installation until the work is completed andaccepted by the Owner.

3.5 CLEANING UP

A. Remove all shipping labels, dirt, paint, grease and stains from all equipment under thisdivision of the Work. Remove debris as it accumulates. Upon completion of the Work,clean all electrical equipment and the entire electrical installation in order to present a firstclass electrical installation suitable for occupancy. No loose parts, scraps, tools nor debrisshall be left on the premises.



A. Be responsible for the cost of cutting and patching required in connection with the workunder this division of the specifications.

B. Coordinate the work to eliminate unnecessary cutting of construction. Where it becomesnecessary to cut through walls, floors, ceilings and other construction to permit installationof the work, or to repair defective work under this division, the costs for such cutting andpatching shall be included in this division of the work. Comply with other applicabledivisions of the specifications concerning the quality of cutting and patching.

C. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, provide lintels or structural supports toprotect the remaining masonry. Provide adequate support during the cutting operation toprevent any damage to the affected masonry.

D. Cutting of structural members is not permitted unless the Owner grants specific writtenpermission.

3.7 FLASHINGS, SLEEVES, INSERTS

A. Be responsible for maintaining the integrity of the waterproofing of conduit penetrationsthrough roofs, exterior walls and floors.

B. Be responsible for the installation of counterflashing of roof penetrations to provide aweatherproof installation.

C. Install 22 gauge galvanized sheet iron sleeves for each conduit passing through floors. Extend sleeves 1-1/2 in. above the floor slab and cement watertight. The sizes of sleevesshall be installed to permit the subsequent insertion of the proper size conduits orraceways.

D. Install galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves around conduits and raceways that passthrough concrete beams or walls and masonry exterior walls. The inside diameter of thesesleeves shall be at least 1/2 in. greater than the outside diameters of the service pipes. After the pipes are installed in these sleeves, fill the annular space between pipes andsleeves with mastic. The completed installation shall be watertight.

E. Be responsible for maintaining the fire rating of penetrations through walls, floors andceilings.

F. Waterproofing and fireproofing work shall conform to the requirements of other applicablesections of the specifications.

3.8 FOUNDATIONS

A. Be responsible for the installation of steel reinforced concrete foundations below all floormounted electrical equipment.

B. Concrete foundations shall not be less than 4 in. high. All top edges shall be neatlychamfered.


C. Concrete foundations shall be 3 in. wider and 3 in. longer than the base of the equipmentbeing installed.

D. All concrete work shall be steel reinforced with a minimum of 6 in. by 6 in., No. 6 mesh andshall conform entirely to the requirements of the other sections of the specificationsdescribing this class of work.

3.9 PAINTING

A. Maintain original factory finish on all material and equipment installed under this division ofthe work unless specifically noted otherwise within the Contract Documents. Should thefinish be marred in transit or during installation, it shall be re-finished to present a neat,workmanlike appearance. Leave equipment clean and free from any grease, dirt and rustand in a suitable condition for painting.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Identify electrical equipment in accordance with the NEC, local authorities and inaccordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Use laminated three-ply, engraved plastic nameplates with black surface and white interiorcore, at least 1/16 in. thick. Engraved lettering shall be condensed gothic at least 1/4 in.high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attach plates to equipment withchromium-plated screws. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable. Identify the followingitems with engraved nameplates, located as follows:

1. Spares shall be labeled 'Spare'.

2. Each branch circuit panel - on panel trim cover immediately above panel door.

3. Each safety switch, relay cabinet, time clock - on outside of cover.

4. Each exhaust fan switch - custom engraved on outside of switch coverplate (high andlow if required).

5. Each motor starter - on outside of cover.

6. Any switch for load that cannot be seen from the control point - custom engraved onoutside of switch coverplate.

C. Custom engraving on cover plates for items noted above shall be equivalent to customengraving as performed by Hubbell, or accepted substitute.

D. Branch circuit panelboard directories shall be completely and properly typewritten, includingroom numbers. Room numbers and names shall be as finally designated at the jobsite.

E. Refer to other sections of the specifications for conductor color-coding requirements.

3.11 BALANCING OF PANELS

A. At the completion of the installation of the electrical system, check each phase of all panelsunder full load and arrange loads such that all phases carry the proper proportion of load. Submit load readings to Engineer for review as part of project close out documentation.


3.12 ACCESS DOORS

A. Wherever access is required in walls, ceilings, or soffits to concealed junction boxes, pullboxes or other electrical equipment installed under this division, provide and install accessdoors as indicated herein.

B. Furnish and install hinged access door and frame with flush latch handle as follows:

1. Plaster surfaces - Milcor Style K, or accepted substitute.

2. Ceramic tile or drywall surface - Milcor Style M (with 'B' label where required), oraccepted substitute.

3.13 RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Job set: Promptly following receipt of the Owner's Notice to Proceed, secure from theEngineer at no charge to the Contractor, one complete set of all Documents comprising theContract.

B. Final Record Documents: At a time nearing the completion of the work, secure from theEngineer at no charge to the Contractor one complete set of sepia transparencies of allDrawings in the Contract.

C. Maintenance of Job Set: Immediately upon receipt of the job set described in paragraphabove, identify each of the Documents with the title, "RECORD DOCUMENTS - JOB SET".

D. Preservation:

1. Considering the Contract completion time, the probable number of occasions uponwhich the job set must be taken out for the new entries and for examination, and theconditions under which these activities will be performed, devise a suitable method forprotecting the job set to the approval of the Engineer.

2. Do not use the job set for any purpose except entry of new data and for review by theEngineer, from start of transfer of data to final Project Record Documents.

3. Maintain the job set at the site of Work where the Owner designates that site.

E. Making Entries on Drawings:

1. Using an erasable colored pencil (not ink or indelible pencil), clearly describe thechange by graphic line and note as required.

2. Date all entries.

3. Call attention to the entry by a 'cloud' drawn around the area or areas affected.

4. In the event of overlapping changes, use different colors for the overlapping changes.

5. All equipment shall be clearly indicated in its installed location. Exposed items orthose easily accessible, as above lay-in ceilings, may be located to scale. Concealeditems not readily accessible, such as underground piping, shall be located bydimension.

F. Transfer of Data to Final Project Documents:

1. Approval of recorded data prior to transfer:


a. Following receipt of the transparencies described above, and prior to beginningtransfer of recorded data thereto, secure the Engineer's approval of all recordeddata.

b. Make required revisions.

2. Transfer of Data to Drawings:a. Carefully transfer change data shown on the job set of Record Drawings to the

corresponding transparencies, coordinating the changes as required.b. Clearly indicate at each affected detail and other drawing a full description of

changes made during construction, and the actual location of items describedabove.

c. Call attention to each entry by drawing a 'cloud' around the area or areasaffected.

d. Make changes neatly, consistently, and with the proper media to assure longevityand clear reproduction.

G. Review and Submittal:

1. Submit the completed set of Project Record Documents to the Engineer as describedabove.

2. Participate in review meetings as required.

3. Make required changes and promptly deliver the final Project Record Documents tothe Owner.

3.14 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE DATA

A. Accumulate, as the job progresses, the following data, in duplicate, prepared in a neatbrochure or packet folder, and deliver to the Engineer for checking and subsequent deliveryto the Owner.

1. Manufacturers' warranties, guarantees, service manuals, and operating instructions forequipment and materials covered by this division of the specifications.

2. Copies of approved Shop Drawings.

3. Any and all other data and/or Drawings required during construction.

4. Repair parts list of all major items and equipment including name, address, andtelephone number of local supplier and agent.

3.15 LOCAL PARTS AND SERVICE

A. Each item of equipment furnished on this project shall have local representation,factory-authorized service, and an adequate stock of repair parts. "Local" shall be defined,for this purpose, as "within 150 miles of the project site".

3.16 INSTALLATION INSPECTIONS AND CERTIFICATIONS

A. Obtain timely inspections of the installation by the constituted authorities. Remedy anydeficiencies to the satisfaction of the inspection authority.

B. Upon final completion of the Work, obtain certificates of acceptance from the constitutedauthorities. Deliver the certificates to the Engineer for transmission to the Owner.


3.17 OPERATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE

A. When any equipment is operable, and it is to the advantage of the Contractor to operate theequipment, he may do so provided that he properly supervises the operation and retains fullresponsibility for the equipment operated. Regardless of whether or not the equipment hasor has not been operated, clean the equipment properly; make required adjustments, andcomplete punch list items before final acceptance by the Owner.

B. The date of acceptance by the Engineer , for beneficial use by the Owner, shall be thebeginning date of the warranty period.

3.18 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

A. The Work, when completed, will be accepted in a finished, perfect and undamaged stateonly. Provide for protection of the Work during its progress, and if damaged, do allpatching or replacing necessary to its full and satisfactory completion.

3.19 WARRANTY

A. Furnish a written certificate, guaranteeing all materials, equipment and labor to be free of alldefects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance by the Owner of theWork, and guarantee that if any defects appear within the stipulated guarantee period, suchwork shall be replaced without charge.

B. This guarantee shall be extended to include the capacity and integrated performance of allcomponent parts of the various systems.

C. Lamps for light fixtures shall be excluded from the guarantee requirements of this section.

3.20 FINALLY

A. It is the intention that this Specification provide a complete installation. Include allaccessory construction and apparatus necessary to the operation and testing of the workunder this division. The omission of specific reference to any part of the work necessary forsuch complete installation shall not relieve this Contractor from furnishing and installingsuch parts.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING 26 05 11

SECTION 26 05 11

WORK IN EXISTING BUILDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work.

B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunctionwith the work in existing buildings as indicated in the Contract Documents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Use materials to match existing construction unless specified elsewhere in these ContractDocuments. Materials shall comply with local codes, be UL listed, and be properly appliedfor their intended function.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. Inspect the jobsite prior to bidding and be familiar with all existing conditions. Include thecost of the work required to accommodate the existing conditions in the bid proposal.

B. Obtain data related to existing facilities from existing documents, measurements, notations,photographs, surveys and other observations at the site.

C. Relocate existing items as required to accommodate the new construction. Remove,relocate and reconnect equipment and accessories that are to be reused.

D. Coordinate the Work with other divisions of the specifications. Determine which items andequipment are to remain, to be relocated or be removed, and perform all work consistentwith the Scope of Work.

E. Loads that exist and are to remain shall be connected to the new distribution system asshown on the Drawings or as required to maintain their proper operation.

F. Refer to other divisions of the specifications and determine equipment that requires powerto be disconnected, or power to be relocated and disconnect power and relocate power tothis equipment.

G. Remove all conductors and exposed conduit rendered unused back to the source ofsupply.

H. Perform splices as required to maintain circuit continuity to existing devices or equipment toremain in service.


3.2 DISRUPTION OF EXISTING FUNCTIONS

A. Access: Access to and use of the existing facilities and site will be restricted, and shall beunder the direction and control of the Owner.

B. Disruptions: Maintain existing electrical, communications, alarm, and other existingsystems, and maintain existing functions in service except for scheduled disruptions. Where existing functions to remain in use are disrupted, they shall be fully restored afterdisruption, in full compliance with this division of the specifications for new work.

C. Scheduling of Disruptions: Seek and obtain approval two weeks in advance of the eventdate. Indicate date of event, starting time, and duration of each required disruption.

D. Notice of Disruption: Date, time and duration of each disruption shall be subject to theOwner's prior approval, and shall include the following information in the form of amemorandum submitted by the Contractor to the Architect for approval by the Owner:

STARTINGFACILITY/SYSTEM DATE TIME DURATION

E. Emergency Disruptions: When circumstances preclude obtaining advance approval asspecified above, make request immediately upon knowledge of the requirement, andperform work so as to cause the minimum amount of disruption, for the minimum duration.

F. Notification: Notify the Engineer and the Owner immediately by telephone and then inwriting, as changes and additions to the scheduled disruption requirements become known.

G. Duration: Complete as large a portion of the work as possible before initiating disruptionand perform only that work necessary so as to minimize duration of disruption. Maintainadequate personnel, supplies, materials, equipment, tools, and other resources at job siteto avoid unnecessary delay in resumption of normal service.

3.3 SALVAGE, DEMOLITION AND RELOCATION

A. General

1. Modify, remove, or relocate materials and items indicated in the Contract Documentsand required by the installation of new facilities.

2. Working jointly with the work under other divisions of the specifications establish andmark salvage and demolition items before commencing work; report items scheduledfor relocation, reinstallation or reuse, which are found to be in damaged condition;await further instructions from the Owner's Representative and/or the Engineer beforecommencing with work.

3. Owner shall have first right of refusal for all material and equipment. Deliver salvagedmaterial accepted by the Owner to destinations on the premises as directed andremove material rejected by the Owner from the site.

B. Relocations

1. Make minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by theEngineer, without additional cost to the Owner.


2. Repair and restore to good functional condition equipment, materials and itemsscheduled for relocation, which are damaged during dismantling or reassemblyoperations.

3. New materials and items of similar design and quality may be substituted for materialsand items indicated to be relocated upon approval of shop drawings, product data, andsamples.

4. Remove carefully, in reverse order to original assembly or placement, items that are tobe relocated.

5. Protect items until relocation is complete.

6. Clean and repair items to be relocated, and provide new materials, fittings, andappurtenances required to complete the relocations and to restore items to goodoperating order.

7. Perform the relocation work in accordance with applicable sections of thesespecifications, utilizing skilled workers.

C. Relocating Devices: Remove and reinstall, in locations designated by the Owner'sRepresentative and the Engineer, temperature control system devices, relays, wire,conduit, fixtures, equipment and other devices required for the operation of the varioussystems that are installed in existing-to-be-removed construction.

3.4 EXISTING RACEWAYS

A. Reuse raceways where possible and where permitted by local codes. Rework raceways tomeet code requirements. Secure all raceways that are not properly supported. Paintraceways when exposed to view to match surroundings if existing finish is damaged orsoiled.

B. Fasten existing boxes and raceways securely to provide proper support.

3.5 NEW RACEWAYS

A. Provide new raceways where required to provide wiring as indicated in the ContractDocuments.

B. Where raceways must be exposed to view, use wiremold, securely fastened, and painted tomatch surroundings. Provide number of coats of paint as required to cover prime coat oforiginal finish of wiremold.

3.6 EXISTING CEILINGS

A. Provide a typewritten list of existing damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles. Disregard rooms inwhich ceilings are to be repaired and replaced. Correlate list to room numbers indicated ondrawings.

B. Mark damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles with easily removable red "stick-on" labels,minimum size two square in.

C. Submit list prior to commencing work. Do not start work until Architect and Owner reviewlist; otherwise repair and replace damaged ceilings and ceiling tiles.


3.7 EXISTING PANELBOARDS

A. Service existing panelboards to be reused as follows:

1. Clean interiors and exteriors.

2. Touch-up damaged finishes with manufacturer's matching touch-up paint.

3. Inspect for component damage and repair or replace as necessary.

4. Tighten conduit and wire terminations.

5. Provide new typewritten circuit directories.

6. Provide new panelboard identification labels if panelboard designation changes or if nolabels exist.

3.8 EXISTING WIRING

A. Inspect existing wiring to be reused for damage. Repair or replace damaged wiring.

B. Assure integrity of existing wiring insulation as follows:

1. Megger wiring phase-to-phase, phase to neutral, phase to ground, and neutral toground.

2. Record megger results. Provide typewritten record of results to the Architect forreview.

3. Repair defective insulation to a dielectric value equivalent to that of wire of the sametype.

4. Existing wiring may be replaced with new wiring if, in the Contractor's opinion, costs tothe Owner would be lower.

C. Secure and label existing wiring that is to be disturbed.

D. Tighten existing wiring terminations and connections.



SECTION 26 05 12

MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL






1.2 SUMMARY



1.3 WORK INCLUDED


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION



21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5


21/22/23 22/23 Notes 1,3,5


21/22/23 26 Notes 1,3,5




ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION


23 26 23


22/23 22/23 22/23


23 23 23


23 23 Note 1


22/23 22/23 22/23


21/22/23 21/22/23 21/22/23




28 23 Note 8


23 23 Note 1


23 23 Note 7


22/23 22/23 22/23



21/22/23 21/22/23 Notes 1,5


26 26 26


controls23 23 23


21 21 28


21 21 28


21 21 Note 6


ITEM FURNISHEDUNDER

DIVISION

INSTALLEDUNDER

DIVISION

WIRED ANDCONNECTED

UNDERDIVISION


21 21 28


generator22 22 --


22 22 22






(6) Power wiring from energy source to controllers and automatic transferswitch shall be provided under Division 26. Interconnection power andcontrol wiring from controllers and automatic transfer switch to pumpsshall be provided under Division 21, 22 or 23 and conforming to Division26 specifications. Control wiring from automatic transfer switch togenerator starter shall be provided under Division 26.




C. PRECEDENCE









BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WIRES AND CABLES 26 05 19

SECTION 26 05 19

WIRES AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work

B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of wire and cable systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products to beused.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide conductors made of soft-drawn-annealed copper with conductivity not less thanthat of 98 percent pure copper. Conductors #12 gauge and smaller shall be solid. Conductors No. 10 gauge and larger shall be stranded.

B. Utilize conductors with insulation rated at 600 volts and insulated with type 'THHN'insulation in dry locations and type "THWN" in wet locations . Wire in fixture channels andother special locations shall be as specifically rated for temperature in Article 300 in theNEC.

C. Minimum wire sizes shall be in accordance with other requirements of the specificationsand as follows: For 20 ampere branch circuits #12 gauge, except that home runs greaterthan 50 ft. from the panel to the first outlet box on 120/208 volt shall be #10 gauge.

D. All wire shall be color-coded. Mark conductors on each end with a 1 in. band of coloredpressure-sensitive plastic tape or by the use of brilliant waterproof lacquer, appliedaccording to manufacturers instructions. Colors for each phase and the neutral shall beconsistent throughout the system in accordance with the requirements of this section.

E. Conductor sizes shown on the Contract Documents are selected based upon use with 75degrees C terminations. Furnish terminations, which are UL listed for 75°C, or derateconductors for use at 60°C. Use of 90°C terminations is acceptable, but conductor must besized at the 75°C rating. Do not use 90°C rating for conductors.

F. Armored cable types MC, AC, and BX are specifically not allowed.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL WIRING METHODS

A. Place an equivalent number of conductors for each phase, neutral and ground of a circuit insame raceway or cable.

B. Do not share neutral conductors between branch circuits connected to single pole circuitbreakers unless shown otherwise on drawings.

C. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.

D. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.

E. Make conductor lengths equal for parallel circuits.

F. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant forpulling #4 gauge and larger wires.

G. When inserting conductors in raceways, comply with the following:

1. Raceways shall first be installed as a complete raceway system without conductors.

2. Do not install pull wires and conductors until the raceway system is in place.

3. Do not use cleaning agents and lubricants that have a deleterious effect on theconductors.

4. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.

3.2 PHASING

A. Identify wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits for general power and lighting with avisible color code in accordance with the requirements of this section as follows:

120/208 VoltPhase A - BlackPhase B - RedPhase C - BlueNeutral - WhiteGround - Green

B. Provide green or bare grounding conductor identification for grounding conductors. Identification of all ungrounded conductors at junction boxes, wireways, and/or terminationsmay be by means of colored tape or painting when color-coded conductors as specifiedabove are not available.

C. Phasing of the complete electrical installation shall be connected and maintained the samethroughout the power distribution system. Where the project is an addition or modificationto an existing facility, the electrical distribution system phasing shall be made the same asthe existing.


D. Switchgear, safety switches, motor starters, lighting and power panels and powerreceptacles shall have all the same phase arrangements throughout the facility.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install conductors in a neat and workmanlike manner to meet code requirements and makeruns continuous without weld, splice, or joint between boxes. Do not install wires in conduitunless the entire system of conduit and outlet boxes is permanently in place. Pullconductors using a UL approved wire lubricant.

B. Deliver cable and wire to the project in original packages. Conductors with insulationshowing deterioration within one year after final completion and acceptance of the Workshall be removed and replaced at no cost to Owner.

C. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.

D. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without perceptibletemperature rise.

E. Terminate spare conductors with electrical tape.

F. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's recommendedvalues.

G. Where outlets only are indicated, leave 48-in. leads of conductors, for connection toequipment. Identify all conductors’ circuit numbers with Brady tape at terminals andjunctions.

H. Where more than three current-carrying conductors are installed in a raceway, use largersize conductor and appropriate larger size raceway to comply with Article 310 of theNational Electrical Code.

I. Where conductor is installed in an environment where the ambient temperature will exceed86°F, use larger size conductor and appropriate larger size raceway to comply with Article310 of the National Electrical Code.

J. Test all circuits for grounds. Prove and test energy available at the load side of disconnectswitches and at the final point of connection to driven equipment. Make all necessary andreasonable tests as required by the Engineer to prove the integrity of work and leave thecomplete electrical installation ready for operation.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES 26 05 20

SECTION 26 05 20

WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of wire connections and devices systems as indicated in the ContractDocuments.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Make cable and wire connections for splicing or terminating with compression deformingtype connectors as manufactured by Burndy Corp., Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., DossertManufacturing Corp., Ilsco Corp., or accepted substitute. Connectors for cable sizes 250Kcmil and larger shall be the long barrel type for double indentation. Soldered connectionswill not be permitted. Twist-on insulated connectors, of proper size, and resistant tovibration, may be used. Use twist-on connectors as manufactured by Minnesota Miningand Manufacturing Co., Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., Ideal Industries, Inc., or approvedequivalent.

B. Provide terminal connectors with the hole sizes and spacing in accordance with NEMAstandards. Provide terminal connectors with two holes in tongue for use on conductor sizes250 Kcmil and larger. Terminal connectors are not required for connections to the circuitbreakers in the lighting and/or receptacle panels.

C. Insulate connections made with non-insulated connectors with three layers of plastic tape,each layer being half-lapped. Use No. 35+ plastic tape as manufactured by MinnesotaMining and Manufacturing Co., or similar and equivalent plastic tape as manufactured byPlymouth Rubber Co.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Make all electrical power and control connections to equipment furnished under otherdivisions of the specifications and furnish wiring, conduit, outlet boxes, disconnect switches,etc., as required for same. Check General Construction, Controls, Plumbing, Heating, andAir Conditioning, etc. plans and specifications to determine the amount of such wiringrequired and include cost of same in bid. Verify locations, horsepower, voltages, etc., of all

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WIRE CONNECTION AND DEVICES 26 05 20

equipment as the job progresses. If a conflict arises in wiring, ask the Engineerimmediately for clarification.

B. Provide branch circuits and connections to all motors furnished to this project. Provide alldisconnect switches as shown and where required by national or local codes. In general,all wiring shall be in conduit, with a short section of flexible conduit at each motor. Securelyattach conduit to flexible conduit. When the motor is an integral part of equipment, isolatewith a short section of flexible metal conduit to prevent vibration and/or noise amplificationto the building structure. If the motor is adjustable, an additional length of flexible metalconduit shall be installed at the motor. Connect a ground wire from the conduit terminationto the motor frame on the inside of the flexible conduit. Use approved grounding lugs orclamps on the conduit connection.

C. Branch circuits and connections to all electrically operated equipment are included in thiscontract, whether or not specifically mentioned. Check, on the job, for further details onPlumbing, Heating, and Air Conditioning equipment as project progresses. Groundequipment in an approved manner.

D. Major equipment furnished under the mechanical and other sections of the specificationsmay require different rough-in requirements than indicated on the plans due to the 'orequivalent' equipment clause. Secure detailed drawings from the trade furnishing theequipment to determine actual rough-in locations, conduit and conductor requirements.

E. Before connecting equipment, check the nameplate data against the information shown onthe Drawings. Call any discrepancies to the attention of the Engineer.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016GROUNDING 26 05 26

SECTION 26 05 26

GROUNDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunctionwith the installation of a grounding system as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Provide an extension of the existing grounding system that includes all connections andtesting of ground rods, ground cables, ground buses, conduits, fittings, anchors, supports,thermite process materials and equipment, and other materials as required for a completeinstallation.

B. Provide ground cables composed of stranded bare copper of 98 percent conductivityencased in conduits above grade, or buried to a depth not less than 12 in. below grade. Install as required to provide sufficient mechanical protection.

C. Provide Burndy Corp., Type NE, Thomas & Betts Co., Inc., Catalog No. 3951, or approvedequivalent, ground fittings for bonding ground cable to its encasing conduit.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Ground electrical work in accordance with NEC Article 250, local codes as specified herein,and as shown on the Drawings.

B. Install ground cables continuous between connections. Splices will not be allowed exceptwhere indicated on the Drawings. Where ground cables pass through floor slabs, buildingwalls, etc., and are not in metallic enclosures, provide with sleeves of approved nonmetallicmaterial.

C. Use rigid metal conduit and electrical metallic tubing as equipment grounding conductors. Make-up couplings wrench tight. Install grounding conductor in nonmetallic raceways andunder floor ducts.

D. Install equipment-grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways. Install equipmentgrounding conductors in metallic raceways where noted on the drawings.

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016GROUNDING 26 05 26

E. Where connections are made to motors or equipment with flexible metal conduit, groundingconductor shall be stranded copper conductor within the conduit, bonded to the equipmentand to the rigid metal raceway system. Size conductor in accordance with NEC, Article250.

F. At each convenience outlet, install a grounding clip attached to the outlet box and leave asufficient length of No. 12 wire with green colored insulation to connect to the groundingterminal of the receptacle. Grounding clip shall be equivalent to Steel City Type G. Thisrequirement may be deleted if automatic grounding clip receptacle meeting NEC Article250.

3.2 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate the work under this section with the work under other divisions of thespecifications.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016SEALING OF PENETRATIONS 26 05 27

SECTION 26 05 27

SEALING OF PENETRATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withsealing of penetrations as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Samples: Provide samples upon written request.

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Caulk and Putty: 3M's No. CP-25 and No. CP-303 synthetic elastomers.

2. Wrap/Strip: 3M's No. FS-195 organic/inorganic, fire resistive sheet with aluminum foilon one side.

3. Composite Sheet: 3M's No. CS-195 organic/inorganic fire resistive elastomeric sheet,bonded on one side with 28-gauge galvanized steel and the other side with reinforcedhexagonal shaped steel wire mesh and covered with aluminum foil.

4. Thunderline Model "LS/Link-Seal" seals, of the required size and number of links, shallbe used on all conduit penetrations of exterior walls. Similar fittings by O.Z./Gedneyshall be considered approved equivalents.

2.2 ROOF PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Construct roof penetration systems utilizing the “Alumi-Flash” system by PortalsPlus, Inc., or equal by Thy-Curb.

B. Each roof penetration shall include a spun aluminum base (“High” size if required due tothe existing roof construction and any insulation thickness) and an EPDM rubber cap. Eachrubber cap shall have a pre-molded pipe opening and shall be selected based on the actualpipe or conduit size required at each location. Secure each rubber cap to each pipe orconduit with the manufacturer’s recommended stainless steel gear clamp.

C. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide roof penetration systemsof one of the following:

1. Portals Plus, Inc.

2. Thycurb Div.; Thybar Corp.

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016SEALING OF PENETRATIONS 26 05 27

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Review the detailed requirements of the UL through penetration fire stop assembly to beused and verify dimensional requirements such as maximum conduit size, conduit spacing,maximum opening size, minimum length of sleeve, etc.

B. For sealing of sleeves on or below grade and in wet locations, install link seals around allconduit penetrations properly sealing the annular space between the sleeve and the conduitto provide a waterproof seal.

C. For sealing of sleeves above grade and in dry/damp locations, use specified fire stopmaterial and install per manufacturer's instructions and in conformance with ULrequirements.

D. Attach an adhesive warning label identifying the fire stop assembly and warning againstremoval without proper resealing.

E. Seal floor, wall and ceiling penetrations or fire rated assemblies in above grade and in dry/damp locations, both horizontal and vertical, utilizing intumescent (expand when heated)materials designed to be applied as a fire, cold smoke, noxious gas, and water sealant.Penetrations shall meet the requirements of ANSI/UL 1479 "Fire Tests ofThrough-Penetration Firestops".


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016SUPPORTING DEVICES 26 05 29

SECTION 26 05 29

SUPPORTING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Refer to Section 26 05 10: General Requirements for Electrical Work:

B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunctionwith installation of supporting devices as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's engineering brochures.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Kindorf

B. Unistrut

C. Superstrut

D. Powerstrut

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Continuous slotted channel: 12 gauge steel with electro-galvanizing and gold zincdichromate barrier bases and dimensions as required for application.

B. Hanger rods: Continuous thread, electro-galvanized, steel, with gold zinc dichromatebarrier, sizes as required for loads imposed.

C. Hex head cap screws and nuts: No. H-113 and No. 114, respectively.

D. One-hole pipe straps: Series HS-100, galvanized steel.

E. Single bolt channel pipe straps: Steel, with machine screw and nut, Series C-105 andSeries C-106.

F. Lay-in pipe hanger: Series C-149.

G. Conduit and pipe hanger: Series 6H.

H. Beam clamps: Series 500, RC, EC and PC as applicable.


I. Concrete inserts, spot: Series D-256 or D-255.

J. Concrete inserts, channel: Series D-980 or Series D-986.

K. Riser clamps: Series C-210.

L. Cable supports: O.Z./Gedney Type S.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Carefully lay out supporting devices to coordinate with the work under other divisions of thespecifications.

B. Securely fasten and support conduits and raceways to the building structure.

C. Suspend horizontal runs of conduits and raceways from the floor and roof construction byrod hangers spaced 10 ft. or less on centers for sizes 2-1/2 in. and greater, and 9 ft. or lesson centers for 2 in. and smaller.

D. Fasten single runs of conduit to the structure with one-hole pipe straps and beam clamps orhang on rod hangers.

E. Support multiple runs of conduit and raceways from continuous channel inserts or fromtrapeze hangers constructed of rod hangers and channels.

F. Fasten single conduits to rod hangers with adjustable lay-in pipe hangers or for conduits ofsizes 2 in. and smaller with Series 6H pipe hangers.

G. Fasten conduits to channels with pipe channel straps.

H. Support conduits and raceways within 3 ft. of each bend, of each termination, and at otherintervals to maintain horizontal and vertical alignment without sag and deformation.

I. Do not use cable, strap, or wire hangers and fasteners.

J. Provide riser clamps for conduits at floor lines. Provide wire and cable supports in pullboxes for risers in accordance with NEC.

K. Install supports to permit equivalently distributed expansion and contraction of conduits andraceways with expansion joints. Use guides consisting of saddles, U-bolts and anchorsdesigned for equivalent effectiveness for both longitudinal and transverse thrusts. Submitcomplete details for review.

L. Do not support conduits and raceways from equipment connections.

M. Provide special supports with vibration dampers to minimize transmission of vibrations andnoises, where required.


N. Provide hangers, racks, cable cleats, and supports for wires and cables in cable chambersand other locations to make a neat and substantial installation.

O. Provide steel angle and channel supports to the floor and structure for panelboards,cabinets, pull and junction boxes. Provide independent support from entering conduits andraceways.

P. Provide supports as specified for conduits and raceways for outlet boxes and pull boxes100 cubic in. and smaller.

Q. Paint all cuts, breaks, welds and other points where the rust inhibiting coating of supports isdamaged.

R. Provide supports sized for the ultimate loads to be imposed.

S. Anchor supporting devices with:

1. Wood screws on wood.

2. Toggle bolts on hollow masonry.

3. Bolts and expansion anchors in concrete or brick.

4. Machine screws, threaded rods and clamps on steel.

T. Provide supports with hot-dipped galvanized finish in outdoor and wet locations.

U. Pipe and conduit supports:

1. Single run pipe and conduits, 2-1/2 in. O.D. and less, shall have Type SS-8R/SS-8Cas manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc., or approved equivalent, spaced atmaximum eight ft. on center and installed on roof pads if required by the roofingmanufacturer.

2. Multiple run pipe and conduits larger than 2-1/2 in. O.D. shall have Type PS, PSE,PP-10 with Roller, or PP-10 with Bar, as manufactured by Portable Pipe Hangers, Inc.,or approved equivalent, spaced at maximum eight ft. on center and installed on roofpads if required by the roofing manufacturer. All conduits shall be held in place withclips on bars.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 05 32

SECTION 26 05 32

PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of pull and junction boxes as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Pull boxes and junction boxes used on concealed runs of conduit in walls and over ceilingsshall be of code gauge galvanized steel with sheet steel covers. Pull boxes in floors shallbe of galvanized malleable cast iron, with gasketed covers. Exposed pull boxes or junctionboxes installed outdoors shall be weatherproof and shall be provided with watertightgasketed covers fastened with corrosion resistant screws.

B. Pull Boxes and Junction Boxes: Metal construction conforming to National Electrical Code,with screw-on or hinged cover. Use hinged cover for boxes larger than 12 in. in anydimension.

C. Flush-Mounted Pull Boxes: Provide overlapping covers with flush-head cover retainingscrews, prime coated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Use separate pull boxes and junction boxes for electric power, control, lighting, computerand communication systems.

B. Install pull boxes and junction boxes where required by the National Electrical Code andwherever required to overcome mechanical difficulties.

C. Install pull boxes in interior conduit at not more than 100 ft. apart when junction or outletboxes do not break conduit runs.

D. Size pull boxes and junction boxes to best meet the needs of the particular situation and/orlocation and to comply with the National Electrical Code.

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES 26 05 32

E. Coordinate the work in this section with the work under other divisions of this specification.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016CONDUITS 26 05 33

SECTION 26 05 33

CONDUITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment, and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of conduit systems as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications and product data forproducts to be used.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Rigid Metal Conduit: Heavy-wall, mild steel tube with metallic corrosion-resistant coating oninterior and exterior, hot-dipped galvanized, free from defects and manufactured inaccordance with ANSI standards, and UL listed.

B. PVC Coated Rigid Metal Conduit:

1. Hot dip galvanized inside and out. Factory-cut threads shall be protected with hotgalvanized threads and a clear urethane coating. Thread protectors shall be used onthe exposed threads. The PVC coating must have been investigated by UL asproviding the primary corrosion protection for the rigid galvanized steel conduit. ThePVC coating shall be gray, 40 mils in thickness, continuous over the entire length ofthe conduit except at the threads, and be free of blisters, bubbles, or pinholes andmanufactured in accordance with UL 6 Standard for Safety, Rigid Metal Conduit.

2. The PVC coated rigid galvanized steel conduit must be certified and authorized toapply the ETL Verification Mark “ETL Verified to PVC-001”. ETL Verified to: IntertekETL SEMKO High Temperature H20 PVC Coating Adhesion Test Procedure.

C. Electric Metallic Tubing (EMT): Welded steel tubing formed of low carbon steel,electro-galvanized exterior, inside coated with a thick, baked, tough elastic low-frictioncoating of enamel, and UL approved.

D. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Manufactured in accordance with UL 1242 with interiorcoating of silicone epoxy ester lubricant.

E. Flexible Metal Conduit: Single strip helically wound interlocking galvanized steel, UL listed;provide liquid tight with extruded polyvinyl jacket in damp and wet locations and in kitchens.

F. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit:

1. Direct buried - Schedule 40, UL listed.


2. Concrete encased - Schedule 20, UL listed.

G. Elbows and Bends:

1. Rigid nonmetallic conduit systems - PVC coated rigid metal conduit.

2. Other conduit systems - same material as the conduit with which they are installed.

H. Bushings:

1. 1-1/4 in. and smaller - high-impact thermosetting phenolic insulation, 150°C,O-Z/Gedney Type A.

2. 1-1/2 in. and larger - hot-dipped galvanized with thermosetting phenolic insulation,150°C, O-Z/Gedney Type B.

I. Locknuts:

1. 1-1/4 in. and smaller - zinc-plated heavy stock steel, O-Z/Gedney.

2. 1-1/2 in. and larger - cadmium-plated malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney.

J. Hubs: Cadmium-plated malleable iron, tapered threads, neoprene 'O' ring, insulated throat,O-Z/Gedney.

K. EMT Connectors: Set screw type, zinc-plated steel body, cadmium-plated malleable ironnut, insulated throat, O-Z/Gedney.

L. EMT Couplings: Set screw type, zinc-plated steel body, O-Z/Gedney.

M. Liquid tight Conduit Connectors: Cadmium-plated malleable iron body and nut, cadmiumplated steel ferrule, insulated throat, integrally-cast external ground lug, O-Z/Gedney Type4QL.

N. Through-Wall and Floor Seals: Malleable iron body, oversize sleeves, sealing rings,pressure clamps and hex-head cap screws, O-Z/Gedney Type FSK.

O. End Bells: Hot-dipped galvanized, threaded, malleable iron, O-Z/Gedney Type TNS.

P. Expansion Fittings: Hot-dipped galvanized, malleable iron with bonding jumpers.

1. Linear - O-Z/Gedney Type AX or TX.

2. Linear with deflection - O-Z/Gedney Type AXDX.

Q. Escutcheons: Chrome-plated sectional floor and ceiling plates, Crane No. 10.

R. Accessories: Reducers, bushings, washers, etc., shall be cadmium-plated, malleable ironof the forms and dimensions best suited for the application.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Size conduits as indicated on the Contract Drawings and as required by the NationalElectrical Code for the quantity and sizes of wires to be installed in the conduit. Do not useconduit sized less than 1/2 in. unless specified otherwise.

B. No more than one, three-phase circuit or three, single phase circuits may be placed in asingle conduit, unless specifically noted on the drawings as such.

C. Conceal conduits from view in all areas except mechanical and electrical rooms and crawlspaces. Should it appear necessary to expose any conduit:

1. Bring it to the attention of the Owner immediately and obtain Owner’s approval forlocation of exposed conduit.

2. Rearrange the work to facilitate an approved installation.

D. Install conduits at elevations to maintain headroom and at locations to avoid interferencewith other work requiring grading of piping, the structure, finished ceiling, walls, accesspanels, etc. Avoid crossing other work.

E. To prevent displacement, securely support conduits to be concealed in the buildingstructure and installed in advance of other work. Carefully lay out conduits installed withinthe structure, such as floors, beams, and walls to avoid densities excessive for theconstruction.

F. Ream, remove burrs, and swab inside conduits before pulling in conductors.

G. Cap or plug conduits with standard manufactured accessories as soon as the conduitshave been permanently installed in place.

H. Make bends and offsets in 1 in. and smaller conduits with approved bending devices. Donot install conduits, which have had their walls crushed, deformed or their surface finishdamaged due to bending.

I. Where space conditions prohibit the use of standard ells, elbows, and conduits, use castferrous alloy fittings of such forms and dimensions as best suited for the application.

J. Make conduit joints mechanically tight, electrically continuous, and watertight. Pitchconduits in areas where moisture may subsequently be present in a manner to avoidcreating moisture traps; where unavoidable, provide junction box with drain fitting at conduitlow point.

K. Install insulated throat threaded hubs on conduits entering enclosures without threadedhubs in wet and damp locations.

L. Install and neatly rack exposed conduits parallel with and perpendicular to building walls. Provide space for 25% additional conduit. Do not install exposed diagonal conduit runs.


M. Route and suspend conduits crossing expansion joints to permit expansion, contraction,and deflection utilizing approved fittings to prevent damage to the building, conduits, andsupporting devices.

N. Do not install conduits exposed on the roof unless approval is obtained prior to installation.

O. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and duct-work where possible; otherwise,route through roof penetration system as specified in Section 26 05 27 - SEALING OFPENTRATIONS.

P. Do not place conduits in close proximity to equipment, systems and service lines, such ashot water supply and return lines, steam pipes, which could be detrimental to the conduitand its contents. Maintain a minimum of 3 in. separation, except in crossing, which shall bea minimum 1 in.

Q. Connect motors, equipment containing motors, equipment mounted on isolated foundationsother equipment and devices which are subject to vibration and which require adjustment,with flexible metallic conduit from the device to the conduit serving it. Restrict length offlexible conduit to 6 ft. maximum unless specifically instructed in writing otherwise by theEngineer. Provide secure supports at the points of attachment on each side of theconnection. Use bonding jumpers as directed by the National Electrical Code and othersections of these specifications.

R. Install escutcheons on sight exposed conduits passing through interior floors, walls, andceilings in finished spaces

S. Install fire seals on conduits passing through fire-rated partitions, floors and ceiling.

T. Provide grounding of conduits, fittings and accessories. Refer to grounding section ofspecifications.

U. Feeder Circuits:

1. Install rigid metal conduit in damp and wet locations, in concrete slabs, and whereexposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms and crawl spaces.

2. Install flexible metal conduit where specified above and where permitted by theauthorities having jurisdiction. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit in damp and wetlocations, where exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and inkitchen and shop areas.

V. Branch Circuits:

1. Install rigid metal conduit in damp and wet locations, in concrete slabs, and whereexposed in crawl space.

2. Install electrical metallic tubing where concealed by building structure and whereexposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms.

3. Exterior to the building and above grade, use rigid steel conduit and for elbows andbends greater than 30 degrees regardless of whether conduit is above or below grade. Wrap buried metal conduit portions with .020-inch thick self-sticking, anti-corrosivePVC pipe wrapping tape. Wrap tape half-lapped continuously around metal portions.


4. Install flexible metal conduit where specified above and where permitted by theauthorities having jurisdiction. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit in damp and wetlocations, where exposed in mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, and inkitchen and shop areas. Limit flexible conduit to a length of 6 ft. maximum unlessspecifically instructed otherwise, in writing, by the Engineer.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016OUTLET BOXES 26 05 34

SECTION 26 05 34

OUTLET BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of outlet boxes as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 OUTLET BOXES

A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, with 1/2 in. male fixturestuds where required.

B. Cast Boxes: Cast metal, deep type, gasketed cover, threaded hubs. Use cast boxes fordamp and outdoor installation.

C. Provide boxes with plaster ring where required. Boxes for installation in masonry wallsshall be special square corner masonry type.

D. Furnish boxes with proper covers and device plates.

E. Cast Metal Boxes for Outdoor and Wet Location Installations: NEMA 250; Type 4 and Type6, flat-flanged, surface-mounted junction box, UL listed as rain tight. Cast metal box andcover with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS

A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wirepulling, equipment connections and code compliance.

B. Determine from dimensions shown on the Contract Documents and by actualmeasurements on the site, the exact location of each outlet. Outlet locations shall bemodified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes in door swings, spacechanges or to clear other interferences that arise or from job modifications. Make suchmodifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of job coordination. Coordinate jobconditions and notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installationof the work.


C. The locations of equipment and outlets shown on the Contract Documents areapproximate. Check and verify exact locations in the field. Coordinate installation with theEngineer and with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

D. Unless otherwise noted, location of outlet boxes, measured to centerline of box, shall be asfollows:

EQUIPMENT OR OUTLETS ELEVATION(ABOVE FINISHED FLOOR)

Toggle Switches 3 feet - 10 inchesReceptacles 1 foot - 6 inchesCombination motor starters 5 feet - 0 inchesControl stations 3 feet - 10 inchesManual starters 5 feet - 0 inchesThermostats in office 3 feet - 10 inchesCircuit protective devices 6 feet - 6 inches to top of enclosure

E. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Where installation is inaccessible, coordinatelocations and sizes of required access doors in accordance with other sections of thespecifications.

F. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.

3.2 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION

A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls. Provide a minimum 6 in. separation in commonwall cavity, except provide minimum 24 in. separation in acoustic rated walls. Refer toarchitectural drawings for locations of acoustic walls.

B. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinatemasonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.

C. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.

D. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.

E. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benchesand back splashes.

F. Position outlets to coordinate luminaire locations with ceilings.

G. In inaccessible ceiling areas, position outlets and junction boxes within 6 inches ofrecessed luminaire, to be accessible through luminaire ceiling opening.

H. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and partitionstuds, accurately positioning to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped steel studbridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel fasteners for flushceiling outlet boxes.


I. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats and similar devices.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26

SECTION 26 27 26

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Provide labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction withthe installation of wiring devices as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's specifications for products to beused. Manufacturer's catalog numbers listed are used to set the standard.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Hubbell, Leviton and Pass & Seymour.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SWITCHES

A. Single pole, 20 amp equivalent to Hubbell CS1221; Leviton 1221-2

B. Double pole, 20 amp equivalent to Hubbell CS1222; Leviton 1222-2

C. Use HP rated switches approved for motor control or disconnect service when controlling ordisconnecting motor loads in excess of 1/4 HP.

2.2 RECEPTACLES

A. Duplex receptacle, 20 amp equivalent to Hubbell CR5362; Leviton 5362.

B. Weatherproof receptacle, equivalent to Hubbell GFR5352L, GFCI receptacle with HubbellWP26M while-in-use cover. Do not use feed-through feature. Install GFCI device at eachlocation. GFCI circuit breaker not acceptable. Use non-GFCI simplex receptacle if deviceserves heat tape.

C. Ground fault circuit interrupting with visible indication of ground fault condition, indoor,equivalent to Hubbell GFR5352L. Do not use feed-through feature. Install GFCI device ateach location. GFCI circuit breaker not acceptable.

2.3 WIRING DEVICES

A. All wiring devices shall be white unless otherwise noted.

BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016WIRING DEVICES 26 27 26

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COORDINATION

A. Determine from dimensions shown in the Contract Documents and by actualmeasurements on the site the exact location of each wiring device. The wiring devicelocations shall be modified from those shown on the plans to accommodate changes indoor swings, space changes or to clear other interferences that arise, or from other jobmodifications. Make such modifications at no cost to the Owner as a matter of jobcoordination. Notify the Engineer of discrepancies before proceeding with the installation ofthe work.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES

A. Install receptacles and switches only in electrical boxes that are clean, free from excessbuilding materials, debris, etc.

3.3 TESTING

A. Test wiring devices to insure electrical continuity of grounding then energize circuit todemonstrate compliance with requirements.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016DISCONNECT SWITCHES 26 28 17

SECTION 26 28 17

DISCONNECT SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunctionwith installation of disconnect switches as indicated in the Contract Documents.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Furnish fusible Class 'R' or non-fusible disconnect switches of ampere rating as required, oras indicated on the Drawings. Furnish heavy-duty, quick-make, quick-break, three-phase,three-pole switches, unless otherwise noted. Use NEMA 1 enclosures where installedindoors. Use NEMA 3R for outdoor enclosures. Provide enclosures with interlockingcovers, externally front operated flange mounted switch levers, and provisions for use ofthree safety padlocks in the 'Off' position. Provide horsepower rated switches for motorcircuits. Disconnect switches shall be of the same manufacturer as the panelboards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. See Section 26 05 10 General Requirements for Electrical Work paragraph: Identificationof Electrical Equipment.

B. Install switches to comply with National Electrical Code and coordinate the work with thework under other divisions of the specifications.


BHB Project No. 2016.013.068 11/18/2016MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS 26 29 13

SECTION 26 29 13

MOTORS, MOTOR STARTERS AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION


B. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunctionwith installation of motors, motor starters and controls as indicated in the ContractDocuments.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Electrical wiring for mechanical equipment is separated into two main wiring Divisions:"Power Wiring" and "Control Wiring".

B. Power wiring is wiring and conduit from the primary energy source and includes circuitprotective devices, motor starters or controllers, conduit, wiring and safety disconnectsbeginning at the power supply and terminating at the motor terminals on equipment.

C. Control wiring is wiring and conduit not included in "Power Wiring", including automatictemperature control wiring, interlock wiring, pilot light, signal wiring, etc., that is included forproper operation or safety of the equipment.

D. Provide power wiring under Division 26 of this specification.

E. Control wiring will be provided under Division 23 of this specification.

F. Refer to Section 26 05 12, Mechanical and Electrical Coordination, for directionsconcerning coordination of the work between Divisions 23 and 26. Coordinate the workunder this section with the work under other divisions of the specifications.

G. Install power and control wiring in compliance with National Electrical Code and thisDivision.

H. Disconnect switches, except where furnished factory mounted, shall be supplied andinstalled by the Electrical Contractor.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Unless otherwise specified or required, control conductors with a potential of 120 volts orhigher shall be a minimum of #14 THWN stranded, and control conductors with a potentialof less than 120 volts may be #16 TFFN, unless larger conductors are required tocompensate for voltage drop.

B. Install control wiring in a separate conduit raceway system.

C. Color code conductors to coordinate with wiring schematics and diagrams.

D. Other materials shall be as specified in other sections of the specifications.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Note that the electrical design and drawings are based upon equipment furnished underother divisions of the specifications as indicated in the Contract Documents. Should anyequipment change dictate changes to the electrical design the required changes shall bemade at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Verify the electrical capacities of all motors and electrical equipment furnished by otherDivisions and install wiring and equipment as required to completely connect all equipment.

C. Where possible, terminate conduits in conduit boxes on motors. Where motors are notprovided with conduit boxes, terminate the conduits in condulet fittings at the motors.

D. Where disconnect switches are not provided integral with the control equipment for motors,provide disconnect switches required by these Specifications and the NEC. Generally,disconnect switches shall be heavy-duty, enclosed, externally operable, horsepower-ratedswitches. Each disconnect switch shall be installed where shown on the Drawings or asclose as possible to the motor. Each disconnect switch shall be within sight of itsassociated controller.

3.2 OVERCURRENT PROTECTION

A. Prior to providing power to equipment, obtain manufacturer's engineering and electrical data.

B. Provide overcurrent protection of equipment in strict accordance with manufacturer'smaximum recommendations and specifications. Provide HACR circuit breakers and fusesin accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and specifications.

C. Install wiring in a separate conduit raceway system in harmony with other raceway systemson the project.

D. Install starters, not furnished within a motor control center on a 3/4 in. thick marine plywoodbackboard painted to match the surrounding area. Apply a minimum of two coats of paint.


Install control and/or accessory devices on the backboard also, in mechanical equipmentareas.

3.3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

A. Provide electrical connections to each item of equipment requiring such connections.

3.4 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify starters, switches, pushbuttons and other control devices by the attachment ofnameplates constructed from laminated phenolic engraved plastic three-ply with blacksurface and white interior core at least 1/16 in. thick. Engraved lettering shall use an Arialbold font at least 1/4 in. high and properly spaced for legible and easy reading. Attachplates to equipment with chromium-plated screws. Adhesive attachment is not acceptable.
